Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 27, 2012

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

Form 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

 

      ¨   REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

      x   ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011

or

 

      ¨   TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from [            ] to [            ]

or

 

      ¨   SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report                     

For the transition period from [            ] to [            ]

Commission file number: 001-35053

 

 

 

InterXion Holding N.V.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

 

The Netherlands

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

 

Tupolevlaan 24

1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk

The Netherlands

+31 20 880 7600

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Each Class        Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered
Ordinary shares, with a nominal value of €0.10 each      New York Stock Exchange


Table of Contents

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

 

None

(Title of Class)

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

 

None

(Title of Class)

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report: 66,129,363 ordinary shares

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act: Yes   ¨  No   x

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Yes   ¨  No   x

Note – Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes   x  No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes   ¨  No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer   ¨                  Accelerated filer   ¨                  Non-accelerated filer   x

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP   ¨

    

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued

by the International Accounting Standards Board   x

   Other   ¨

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow: Item 17   ¨  Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes   ¨  No   x

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court. Yes   ¨  No   ¨

 

 

 


Table of Contents

Introduction

Presentation of Financial Information

Unless otherwise indicated, the financial information in this annual report has been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, or IFRS, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. The significant IFRS accounting policies applied to our financial information in this annual report have been applied consistently.

Financial Information

The financial information included in “Financial Statements” is covered by the auditors’ report included therein. The audit was carried out in accordance with standards issued by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA

In this annual report we refer to our EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA. We define EBITDA as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments and exceptional and non-recurring items. For a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit/(loss), see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA.” EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and other key performance indicators may not be indicative of our historical results of operations, nor are they meant to be predictive of future results.

Additional Key Performance Indicators

In addition to EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, our management also uses the following key performance indicators as measures to evaluate our performance:

 

   

Equipped Space: the amount of data center space that, on the relevant date, is equipped and either sold or could be sold, without making any significant additional investments to common infrastructure. Equipped Space at a particular data center may decrease if either (a) the power requirements of customers at such data center change so that all or a portion of the remaining space can no longer be sold as the space does not have enough power and/or common infrastructure to support it without further investment or (b) if the design and layout of a data center changes to meet among others, fire regulations or customer requirements, and necessitates the introduction of common space (such as corridors) which cannot be sold to individual customers;

 

   

Utilization Rate: on the relevant date, Revenue Generating Space as a percentage of Equipped Space; Revenue Generating Space is defined as the amount of Equipped Space that is under contract and billed on the relevant date. Some Equipped Space is not fully utilized due to customers’ specific requirements regarding the layout of their equipment. In practice, therefore, Utilization Rate does not reach 100%;

 

   

Recurring Revenue Percentage: Recurring Revenue during the relevant period as a percentage of total revenue in the same period. Recurring Revenue comprises revenue that is incurred from colocation and associated power charges, office space, amortized set-up fees and certain recurring managed services (but excluding any ad hoc managed services) provided by us directly or through third parties. Rents received for the sublease of unused sites are excluded. Monthly Recurring Revenue is the contracted Recurring Revenue over a full month excluding power usage revenues, amortized set-up fees and the sub-leasing of office space;

 

   

Average Monthly Churn: the average of the Churn Percentage in each month of the relevant period. Churn Percentage in a month is the contracted Monthly Recurring Revenue which came to an end during the month as a percentage of the total contracted Monthly Recurring Revenue at the beginning of the month.

 

1


Table of Contents

EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Recurring Revenue and Average Monthly Churn are all non-GAAP measures. Together with the other key performance indicators listed above, they serve as additional indicators of our operating performance and are not required by, or presented in accordance with, IFRS. They are not intended as a replacement for, or alternatives to, measures such as cash flows from operating activities and operating profit as defined and required under IFRS. We believe that EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and our other key performance indicators are measures commonly used by analysts, investors and peers in our industry. Accordingly, we have disclosed this information to permit a more complete analysis of our operating performance. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and our other key performance indicators, as we calculate them, may not be comparable to similarly titled measures reported by other companies. For a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit/(loss), see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA.” EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and our other key performance indicators listed above may not be indicative of our historical results of operations, nor are they meant to be predictive of future results.

Currency Presentation and Convenience Translations

Unless otherwise indicated, all references in this annual report to “euro” or “€” are to the currency introduced at the start of the third stage of the European Economic and Monetary Union pursuant to the Treaty establishing the European Community, as amended. All references to “dollars,” “$,” “U.S. $” or “U.S. dollars” are to the lawful currency of the United States. We prepare our financial statements in euro.

Solely for convenience, this annual report contains translation of certain euro amounts into U.S. dollars based on the noon buying rate of €1.00 to U.S. $ 1.2973 in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2011. These translation rates should not be construed as representations that the euro amounts have been, could have been or could be converted into U.S. dollars at that or any other rate. See “Exchange Rate Information.”

Metric Convenience Conversion

This annual report contains certain metric measurements and for your convenience, we provide the conversion of metric units into U.S. customary units. The standard conversion relevant for this annual report is approximately 1 meter = 3.281 feet or 1 square meter = 10.764 square feet.

Rounding

Certain financial data in this annual report, including financial, statistical and operating information have been subject to rounding adjustment. Accordingly, in certain instances, the sum of the numbers in a column or a row in tables contained in this annual report may not conform exactly to the total figure given for that column or row. Percentages in tables have been rounded and accordingly may not add up to 100%.

No Incorporation of Website Information

The contents of our website do not form part of this annual report.

Terminology

The terms the “Group”, “we”, “our” and “us” refer to InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries, as the context requires.

 

2


Table of Contents

MARKET, ECONOMIC AND INDUSTRY DATA

Information regarding markets, market size, market share, market position, growth rates and other industry data pertaining to our business contained in this annual report consists of estimates based on data and reports compiled by professional organizations and analysts, on data from other external sources, and on our knowledge of our sales and markets. In many cases, there is no readily available external information (whether from trade associations, government bodies or other organizations) to validate market-related analyses and estimates, requiring us to rely on internally developed estimates. While we have compiled, extracted and reproduced market or other industry data from external sources which we believe to be reliable, including third parties or industry or general publications, we have not independently verified that data. Similarly, our internal estimates have not been verified by any independent sources.

 

3


Table of Contents

Forward-Looking Statements

This annual report on Form 20-F contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, with respect to all statements other than statements of historical fact regarding our business, financial condition, results of operations and certain of our plans, objectives, assumptions, projections, expectations or beliefs with respect to these items and statements regarding other future events or prospects. These statements include, without limitation, those concerning: our strategy and our ability to achieve it; expectations regarding sales, profitability and growth; plans for the construction of new data centers; our possible or assumed future results of operations; research and development, capital expenditure and investment plans; adequacy of capital; and financing plans. The words “aim,” “may,” “will,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “future,” “continue,” “help,” “estimate,” “plan,” “schedule,” “intend,” “should,” “shall” or the negative or other variations thereof as well as other statements regarding matters that are not historical fact, are or may constitute forward-looking statements.

In addition, this annual report includes forward-looking statements relating to our potential exposure to various types of market risks, such as foreign exchange rate risk, interest rate risks and other risks related to financial assets and liabilities. We have based these forward-looking statements on our management’s current view with respect to future events and financial performance. These views reflect the best judgment of our management but involve a number of risks and uncertainties which could cause actual results to differ materially from those predicted in our forward-looking statements and from past results, performance or achievements. Although we believe that the estimates reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, such estimates may prove to be incorrect. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future. There are a number of factors that could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from these expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. These factors include, among other things:

 

   

operating expenses cannot be easily reduced in the short term;

 

   

inability to utilize the capacity of newly planned data centers and data center expansions;

 

   

significant competition;

 

   

cost and supply of electrical power;

 

   

data center industry over-capacity; and

 

   

performance under service level agreements.

These risks and others described under “Risk Factors” are not exhaustive. Other sections of this annual report describe additional factors that could adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations. We urge you to read the sections of this annual report entitled Item 3 “Key Information—“Risk Factors,” Item 4 “Information on the Company” and Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” for a more complete discussion of the factors that could affect our future performance and the industry in which we operate. Additionally, new risk factors can emerge from time to time, and it is not possible for us to predict all such risk factors, nor can we assess the impact of all such risk factors to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements. Given these risks and uncertainties, you should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements as a prediction of actual results.

All forward-looking statements included in this annual report are based on information available to us on the date of this annual report. We undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as may be required by applicable law. All subsequent written and oral forward-looking statements attributable to us or persons acting on our behalf are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained throughout this annual report.

 

4


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

PART I

  

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

     6   

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

     7   

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

     8   

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

     28   

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

     38   

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

     39   

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

     55   

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     63   

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

     67   

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

     68   

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     69   

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

     85   

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

     86   

PART II

  

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

     87   

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

     88   

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

     89   

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

     90   

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

     91   

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

     92   

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

     93   

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

     94   

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

     95   

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

     96   

PART III

  

ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     97   

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     98   

 

5


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

For the identity of Directors and Senior Management reference is made to “Item 6: Directors, Senior Management and Employees”. Identification of Advisors is not applicable for this form 20-F.

 

6


Table of Contents

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

 

7


Table of Contents

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data

The following selected financial data as of and for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements, which are included elsewhere in this annual report. The selected financial data as of and for the years ended December 31, 2008 and December 31, 2007 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements not included in this annual report. Our audited consolidated financial statements included in this annual report have been prepared and presented in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and have been audited by KPMG Accountants N.V., an independent registered public accounting firm.

You should read the selected financial data in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and related notes and Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” included elsewhere in this annual report. Our historical results do not necessarily indicate our expected results for any future periods.

 

     Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
     2011 (1)     2011     2010     2009     2008 (2)     2007 (2)(3)  
     (U.S. $’000, except per
share amounts and
number of shares)
    (€’000, except per share amounts and number of shares)  

Income statement data

            

Revenue

     316,943        244,310        208,379        171,668        138,180        100,450   

Cost of sales

     (132,021     (101,766     (91,154     (78,548     (63,069     (51,998
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     184,922        142,544        117,225        93,120        75,111        48,452   

Other income

     632        487        425        746        2,291        988   

Sales and marketing costs

     (22,936     (17,680     (15,072     (11,253     (9,862     (7,297

General and administrative costs

     (87,254     (67,258     (55,892     (50,628     (35,352     (34,837
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     75,364        58,093        46,686        31,985        32,188        7,306   

Net finance expense

     (29,558     (22,784     (29,444     (6,248     (3,713     (4,126
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     45,806        35,309        17,242        25,737        28,475        3,180   

Income tax (expense) / income

     (12,631     (9,737     (2,560     715        8,899        10,405   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     33,175        25,572        14,682        26,452        37,374        13,585   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share (4)

     0.52        0.40        0.33        0.60        0.87        0.33   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Diluted earnings per share (4)

     0.50        0.39        0.31        0.57        0.87        0.30   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Number of shares (4) ( 5 )

     66,129        66,129        44,354        44,351        43,646        42,741   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares for Basic earnings per share (4) ( 6 )

     64,176        64,176        44,352        43,999        43,194        42,741   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares for Diluted earnings per share (4) ( 6 )

     65,896        65,896        47,707        46,792        46,302        45,400   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

8


Table of Contents
     Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
     2011 (1)     2011     2010     2009     2008 (2)     2007 (2)(3)  
     (U.S. $’000, except per
share amounts and
number of shares)
    (€’000, except per share amounts and number of shares)  

Cash flow statement data

            

Net cash flows from operating activities

     83,083        64,043        74,379        51,378        35,991 ( 7 )       24,756   

Net cash flows from investing activities

     (208,880     (161,011     (100,164     (100,949     (92,252     (49,548

Net cash flows from financing activities

     182,050        140,330        92,748        19,764        82,057        45,419   

Capital expenditures including intangibles ( 8 )

     (210,106     (161,956     (100,394     (101,053     (92,252     (49,548
     Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
     2011 (1)     2011     2010     2009     2008     2007 (2)(3)  
     (U.S. $’000)     (€’000)  

Balance sheet data

          

Trade and other current assets

     88,053        67,874        55,672        55,610        49,874        29,313   

Cash and cash equivalents (9 )

     185,084        142,669        99,115        32,003        61,775        35,848   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Current assets

     273,137        210,543        154,787        87,613        111,649        65,161   

Non-current assets (3)

     692,419        533,738        391,975        320,407        250,307        145,016   

Total assets

     965,556        744,281        546,762        408,020        361,956        210,177   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Current liabilities

     173,577        133,799        112,375        120,894        122,322        74,271   

Non-current liabilities

     363,142        279,921        279,118        152,749        134,708        66,748   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     536,719        413,720        391,493        273,643        257,030        141,019   

Shareholders’ equity

     428,837        330,561        155,269        134,377        104,926        69,158   

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

     965,556        744,281        546,762        408,020        361,956        210,177   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

 

(1) The “Income statement data,” “Cash flow statement data” and “Balance sheet data” as of and for the year ended December 31, 2011 have been translated for convenience only based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2011 for euro into U.S. dollars of €1.00 = U.S. $1.2973. See “Exchange Rate Information” for additional information.
(2) In fiscal year 2008, income not related to our core activities was reclassified to the line item “Other income.” Fiscal year 2007 figures have been adjusted to reflect the same reclassification.
(3) In fiscal year 2007, the useful economic lives of certain data center assets were increased from 10 to 15 years. This change of accounting estimate was applied from January 1, 2007. This extension in the useful economic lives of certain data center assets resulted in an estimated decrease in depreciation of €3.6 million during the fiscal year 2007. Additionally, fiscal year 2007 figures have been adjusted to reflect the impairment of €1,885,000 in the “Depreciation, amortization and impairments” line item instead of in the “Exceptional general and administrative costs” line item.
(4) “Basic earnings per share”, “Diluted earnings per share” and “Number of shares” have been adjusted to reflect the five-to-one reverse stock split, which occurred in conjunction with our initial public offering in January 2011.
(5) “Number of shares” are in thousands as at the end of the year.
(6) “Weighted average number of shares for Basic earnings per share” and “Weighted average number of shares for Diluted earnings per share” are in thousands.
(7) The 2008 “Net cash flows from operating activities” include a reclassification for foreign exchange results on working capital balances.
(8) Capital expenditures including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant & equipment and intangible assets as recorded on our consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively.
(9) Cash and cash equivalents includes €4.8 million, €4.2 million, €3.9 million, €3.9 million and €3.6 million as of December 31, 2011, December 31, 2010, December 31, 2009, December 31, 2008 and December 31, 2007, respectively, which is restricted and held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies.

 

9


Table of Contents

Exchange Rates

We publish our financial statements in euro. The conversion of euro into U.S. dollars in this annual report is solely for the convenience of readers. Exchange rates of euro into U.S. dollars are based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Unless otherwise noted, all translations from euro to U.S. dollars and from U.S. dollars to euro in this annual report were made at a rate of €1.00 to U.S. $ 1.2973, the noon buying rate in effect as of December 31, 2011. We make no representation that any euro or U.S. dollar amounts could have been, or could be, converted into U.S. dollars or euro, as the case may be, at any particular rate, the rates stated below, or at all.

The following table sets forth information concerning exchange rates between the euro and the U.S. dollar for the periods indicated.

 

     Low      High  
     (U.S. $ per €1.00)  

Month :

     

October 2011

     1.3281         1.4172   

November 2011

     1.3244         1.3803   

December 2011

     1.2926         1.3487   

January 2012

     1.2682         1.3192   

February 2012

     1.3087         1.3463   

March 2012

     1.3025         1.3336   

April 2012 (through April 20, 2012)

     1.3064         1.3337   

 

     Average  for
Period (1)
 
     (U.S. $ per
€1.00)
 

Year ended December 31, :

  

2007

     1.3797   

2008

     1.4695   

2009

     1.3955   

2010

     1.3211   

2011

     1.4002   

 

Source: Federal Reserve Bank of New York

Note:

 

(1) Annual averages are calculated from month-end exchange rates, calculated by using the average of the exchange rates on the last day of each month during the year.

On April 20, 2012, the noon buying rate was €1.00 to U.S. $1.3212.

 

10


Table of Contents

Risk Factors

In addition to the other information contained in this annual report on Form 20-F, you should carefully consider the following risk factors. If any of the possible events described below occurs, our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects could be adversely affected. The risks and uncertainties below are those known to us and that we currently believe may materially affect us.

Risks Related to our Business

We cannot easily reduce our operating expenses in the short term, which could have a material adverse effect on our business in the event of a slowdown in demand for our services or a decrease in revenue for any reason.

Our operating expenses primarily consist of personnel, power and property costs. Personnel and property costs cannot be easily reduced in the short term. Therefore, we are unlikely to be able to reduce significantly our expenses in response to a slowdown in demand for our services or any decrease in revenue. The terms of our leases with landlords for facilities that serve as data centers are typically for 10 to 15 years (excluding our extension options) and do not provide us with an early termination right, while our colocation contracts with customers are initially typically for only three to five years. As at December 31, 2011, 42% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue was generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. Our personnel costs are fixed due to our contracts with our employees having set notice periods and local law limitations in relation to the termination of employment contracts. In respect of our power costs, there is a minimum level of power required to keep our data centers running irrespective of the number of customers using them so our power costs may exceed the amount of revenue derived from power. We could have higher than expected levels of unused capacity in our data centers if, among other things:

 

   

our existing customers contracts are not renewed and such customers are not replaced by new customers;

 

   

internet and telecommunications equipment becomes smaller and more compact in the future;

 

   

there is an unexpected slowdown in demand for our services; or

 

   

we are unable to terminate or amend our leases when we have underutilized space at a data center.

If we have higher than expected levels of unused space at a data center at any given time, we may be required to operate a data center at a loss for a period of time. If we have higher than expected levels of unused capacity in our data centers and we are unable to reduce our expenses accordingly, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be materially adversely affected.

Our inability to utilize the capacity of newly planned data centers and data center expansions in line with our business plan would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Historically, we have made significant investments in our property, plant and equipment and intangible assets in order to expand our data center footprint and total Equipped Space as we have grown our business. In the year ended December 31, 2011 we invested € 162.0 million in property, plant and equipment (€154.6 million) and intangible assets (€7.4 million). In the year ended December 31, 2010, we invested €100.4 million in property, plant and equipment (€98.2 million) and intangible assets (€2.2 million). Investments in property, plant and equipment includes expansion, upgrade, maintenance and general administrative IT equipment. Investments in intangibles assets include power grid rights and software development.

We expect to continue to invest as we expand our data center footprint and increase our Equipped Space based on demand in our target markets. Our total annual investment in property, plant and equipment includes maintenance and replacement capital expenditures. Although in any one year the amount of maintenance and replacement capital expenditures may vary, we expect that long term such expenses will be between 4% and 6% of total revenue. Except for two Paris datacenters (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, and our Amsterdam datacenter premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, we typically lease space for a data center and begin building it out before we have entered into agreements with customers to cover the capacity of the data center. In some cases, we enter into lease agreements for data centers or begin expansions at our existing data centers without any pre-existing customer commitments to use the additional space that will be created. If we open a new data center or complete an expansion at an existing data center, we will be required to pay substantial up-front and ongoing costs associated with that data center, including leasehold improvements, basic overhead costs and rental payments regardless of whether or not we have any agreements with customers to fill the space.

 

11


Table of Contents

As a result of our expansion plans, we will incur capital expenditures, and as a result, an increase in other operating expenses, which will negatively impact our cash flow, and depreciation that together will negatively impact our profitability unless and until these new and expanded data centers generate enough revenue to exceed their operating costs and related capital expenditures.

We incurred substantial losses during the period of 2001 to 2003 as a result of high churn and other factors. There can be no guarantee that we will be able to sustain or increase our profitability if our planned expansion is not successful or if there is not sufficient customer demand in the future to realize expected returns on these investments. Any such development would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

If we are unable to expand our existing data centers or locate and secure suitable sites for additional data centers on commercially acceptable terms our ability to grow our business may be limited.

Our ability to meet the growing needs of our existing customers and to attract new customers depends on our ability to add capacity by expanding existing data centers or by locating and securing suitable sites for additional data centers that meet our specifications, such as proximity to numerous network service providers, access to a significant supply of electrical power and the ability to sustain heavy floor loading. We have reached high utilization levels at some of our data centers and therefore any increase in these locations would need to be accomplished through the lease of additional property that satisfies our requirements. Property meeting our specifications may be scarce in our target markets. If we are unable to identify and enter into leases on commercially acceptable terms on a timely basis for any reason including due to competition from other companies seeking similar sites who may have greater financial resources than us, or are unable to expand our space in our current data centers, our rate of growth may be substantially impaired.

Our capital expenditures, together with ongoing operating expenses and obligations to service our debt, will be a drain on our cash flow and may decrease our cash balances. The capital markets in the recent past have been and may again become limited for external financing opportunities. Additional debt or equity financing, especially in the current credit-constrained climate, may not be available when needed or, if available, may not be available on satisfactory terms. Our inability to obtain needed debt and/or equity financing or to generate sufficient cash from operations may require us to prioritize projects or curtail capital expenditures which could adversely affect our results of operations.

Failure to renew or maintain real estate leases for our existing data centers on commercially acceptable terms, or at all, could harm our business.

Except for two Paris datacenters (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, and the Amsterdam datacenter premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, we do not own the property on which our data centers are located and instead lease the majority of our data center space. We generally enter leases for initial periods of 10 to 15 years (excluding renewal options). The majority of our leases are subject to an annual inflation-linked increase in rent and, on renewal (or earlier in some cases), the rent we pay may be reset to the current market rate. There is, therefore, a risk that there will be significant rent increases when the rent is reviewed. Our leases in France, Ireland, Belgium and the United Kingdom do not contain contractual options to renew or extend those leases, and we have exhausted or may in the future exhaust such options in other leases. With respect to our leases in France, certain landlords may terminate our leases following the expiration of the original lease period (being 12 years from the commencement date), and the other leases in France may be terminated by the landlords at the end of each three year period upon giving six months prior notice in the event the landlord wishes to carry out construction works to the building. The non-renewal of leases for our existing data center locations, or the renewal of such leases on less favorable terms, is a potentially significant risk to our ongoing operations. We would incur significant costs if we were forced to vacate one of our data centers due to the high costs of relocating our own and our customers’ equipment, installing the necessary infrastructure in a new data center and, as required by most of our leases, reinstating the vacated data center to its original state. In addition, if we were forced to vacate a data center, we could lose customers that chose our services based on location. If we fail to renew any of our leases, or the renewal of any of our leases is on less favorable terms and we fail to increase revenues sufficiently to offset the higher rental costs, this could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

12


Table of Contents

Our leases may obligate us to make payments beyond our use of the property.

Our leases generally do not give us the right to terminate without penalty. Accordingly, we may incur costs under leases of data center space that is not or no longer is Revenue Generating Space. Some of our leases do not give us the right to sublet, and even if we have that right we may not be able to sublet the space on favorable terms or at all. We have incurred moderate costs in relation to such onerous lease contracts in recent years.

We may experience unforeseen delays and expenses when fitting out and upgrading data centers, and the costs could be greater than anticipated.

As we attempt to grow our business, substantial management effort and financial resources are employed by us in fitting out new, and upgrading existing, data centers. In addition, we periodically upgrade and replace certain equipment at our data centers. We may experience unforeseen delays and expenses in connection with a particular client project or data center build-out. In addition, unexpected technological changes could affect customer requirements and we may not have built such requirements into our data centers and may not have budgeted for the financial resources necessary to build out or redesign the space to meet such new requirements. Furthermore, the redesign of existing space is difficult to implement in practice as it normally requires moving existing customers. Although we have budgeted for expected build-out and equipment expenses, additional expenses in the event of unforeseen delays, cost overruns, unanticipated expenses, regulatory changes, unexpected technological changes and increases in the price of equipment may negatively affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

No assurance can be given that we will complete the build-out of new data centers or expansions of existing data centers within the proposed timeframe and cost parameters or at all. Any such failure could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We face significant competition and we may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.

Our market is highly competitive. Most companies operate their own data centers and in many cases continue to invest in data center capacity, although there is a trend towards outsourcing. We compete against other carrier-neutral colocation data center service providers, such as Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. We also compete with other types of data centers, including carrier-operated colocation, wholesale and IT outsourcers and managed services provider data centers. The cost, operational risk and inconvenience involved in relocating a customer’s networking and computing equipment to another data center are significant and have the effect of protecting a competitor’s data center from significant levels of customer churn.

Further, the growth of the European data center market has encouraged new, larger companies to consider entering the market, in particular those from the United States who are active in this sector. This growth and other factors have also led to increasing alliances and consolidation. Many of these companies may have significantly greater financial, marketing and other resources than we do. Some of our competitors may be willing to, and due to greater financial resources, may be better able to adopt aggressive pricing policies, including the provision of discounted data center services as an encouragement for customers to utilize their other services. Certain of our competitors may also provide our target customers with additional benefits, including bundled communications services, and may do so in a manner that is more attractive to potential customers than obtaining space in our data centers.

 

13


Table of Contents

While not currently a direct competitive threat to us, wholesale providers of data center space might change their business plan to compete with us directly or open new data centers, thus making large amounts of capacity available at a single point in time and facilitating the entry into the market or expansion of our direct competitors. Wholesale providers of data center space may compete with us for the acquisition of new sites, thereby increasing the average rental prices for suitable sites.

In addition, corporations that have already invested substantial resources in in-house data center operations may be reluctant to outsource these services to a third party, or may choose to acquire space within a wholesale provider’s data center, which would allow them to manage the equipment themselves. If existing customers were to conclude that they could provide the same service in-house at a lower cost, with greater reliability, with increased security or for other reasons, they might move such services in-house and we would lose customers and business.

We may also see increased competition for data center space and customers from wholesale data center providers, such as large real estate companies. Rather than leasing available space to large single tenants, real estate companies, including certain of our landlords, may decide to convert the space instead to smaller square foot units designed for multi-tenant colocation use. In addition to the risk of losing customers to wholesale data center providers, this could also reduce the amount of space available to us for expansion in the future. As a result of such competition, we could suffer from downward pricing pressure and the loss of customers (and potential customers), which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our services may have a long sales cycle that may materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

A customer’s decision to take space in one of our data centers typically involves a significant commitment of resources by us and by potential customers, who often require internal approvals. In addition, some customers will be reluctant to commit to locating in our data centers until they are confident that the data center has adequate available carrier connections and network density. As a result, we may have a long sales cycle lasting anywhere from three months for smaller customers to periods in excess of one year for some of our larger customers. Furthermore, we may expend significant time and resources in pursuing a particular sale or customer that does not result in revenue.

The slowdown in global economies and their delayed recovery may further impact this long sales cycle by making it extremely difficult for customers to accurately forecast and plan future business activities. This could cause customers to slow spending, or delay decision-making, on our services, which would delay and lengthen our sales cycle.

Delays due to the length of our sales cycle may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business is dependent on the adequate supply of electrical power and could be harmed by prolonged electrical power outages or increases in the cost of power.

The operation of each of our data centers requires an extremely large amount of power and we are among the largest power consumers in certain cities in which we operate data centers. We cannot be certain that there will be adequate power in all of the locations in which we operate, or intend to open additional data centers. We attempt to limit exposure to system downtime caused by power outages by using back-up generators and uninterrupted power supply systems; however, we may not be able to limit our exposure entirely even with these protections in place. We also cannot guarantee that the generators will always provide sufficient power or restore power in time to avoid loss of or damage to our customers’ and our equipment. Any loss of services or damage to equipment resulting from a temporary loss of or reduction in power at any of our data centers could harm our customers, reduce customers’ confidence in our services, impair our ability to attract new customers and retain existing customers, and result in us incurring financial obligations to our customers as they might be eligible for service credits pursuant to their service level agreements with us. Our customers may also seek damages from us.

 

14


Table of Contents

In addition, we are susceptible to fluctuations in power costs in all of the locations in which we operate. Clients have two options with respect to power usage: either (i) to pay for power usage in “plugs” in advance (typically included in the total cabinet price), which are contractually defined amounts of power per month, for which the customer must pay in full, regardless of how much power is actually used; or (ii) to pay for their actual power usage in arrears on a metered basis. While we are contractually able to recover power cost increases from our customers, some portion of the increased costs may not be recovered or recovered in a delayed fashion based on commercial reasons and as a result, may have a negative impact on our results of operations.

Although we have not experienced any power outages that have had a material impact on our financial condition in the past, power outages or increases in the cost of power to us could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

A general lack of electrical power resources sufficient to meet our customers’ demands may impair our ability to utilize fully the available space at our existing data centers or our plans to open new data centers.

In each of our markets, we rely on third parties to provide a sufficient amount of power for current and future customers. Power and cooling requirements are generally growing on a per customer basis. Some of our customers are increasing and may continue to increase their use of high-density electrical power equipment, such as blade servers, which can significantly increase the demand for power per customer and cooling requirements for our data centers. Future demand for electrical power and cooling may exceed the designed electrical power and cooling infrastructure in our data centers. As the electrical power infrastructure is typically one of the most important limiting factors in our data centers, our ability to utilize available space fully may be limited. This, as well as any inability to secure sufficient power resources from third-party providers, could have a negative impact on the effective available capacity of a given data center and limit our ability to grow our business.

The ability to increase the power capacity or power infrastructure of a data center, should we decide to, is dependent on several factors including, but not limited to, the local utility’s ability and willingness to provide additional power, the length of time required to provide such power and/or whether it is feasible to upgrade the electrical infrastructure and cooling systems of a data center to deliver additional power to customers.

The availability of sufficient power may also pose a risk to the successful development of future data centers. In cities where we intend to open new data centers, we may face delays in obtaining sufficient power to operate our data centers. Our ability to secure adequate power sources will depend on several factors, including whether the local power supply is at or close to its limit, whether new connections for our data center would require the local power company to install a new substation or feeder and whether new connections for our data center would increase the overall risks of blackouts or power outages in a given geographic area.

If we are unable to utilize fully the physical space available within our data centers or successfully develop additional data centers or expand existing data centers due to restrictions on available electrical power or cooling, we may be unable to accept new customers or increase the services provided to existing customers, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

15


Table of Contents

A significant percentage of our Monthly Recurring Revenue is generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. If such contracts are not renewed, or if their pricing terms are negotiated downwards, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be materially adversely affected.

The majority of our initial customer contracts are entered into on a fixed-term basis for periods from three to five years, which, unless terminated in advance, are automatically renewed for subsequent one-year periods. Please see Item 4 “Information on the Company—Customer Contracts.” As at December 31, 2011, 42% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue was generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. Consequently, a large part of our customer base could either terminate their contracts with us at relatively short notice, or seek to re-negotiate the pricing of such contracts downwards, which, if either were to occur, would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our inability to use all or part of our net deferred tax assets could cause us to pay taxes at an earlier date and in greater amounts than expected.

As at December 31, 2011, we had €37.8 million of recognized and €2.1 million of unrecognized, net deferred tax assets. We cannot assure you that we will generate sufficient profit in the relevant jurisdictions to utilize these deferred tax assets fully or that the tax loss availability will not expire before we have been able to fully utilize them. In addition, applicable law could change in one or more jurisdictions in which we have deferred tax assets, rendering such assets unusable. Either such event would cause us to pay taxes in greater amounts than would otherwise occur, which may have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

Our operating results have fluctuated in the past and may fluctuate in the future, which may make it difficult to evaluate our business and prospects.

Our operating results have fluctuated in the past and may continue to fluctuate in the future, due to a variety of factors, which include:

 

   

demand for our services;

 

   

competition from other data center operators;

 

   

the cost and availability of power;

 

   

the introduction of new services by us and/or our competitors;

 

   

data center expansion by us and/or our competitors;

 

   

changes in our pricing policies and those of our competitors;

 

   

a change in our customer retention rates;

 

   

economic conditions affecting the Internet, telecommunications and e-commerce industries; and

 

   

changes in general economic conditions.

Any of the foregoing factors, or other factors discussed elsewhere in this annual report, could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Although we have experienced growth in revenues during the past three financial years, this growth rate is not necessarily indicative of future operating results. In addition, a relatively large portion of our expenses cannot be reduced in the short-term, particularly personnel and property costs and part of our power costs, which means that our results of operations are particularly sensitive to fluctuations in revenues. As such, comparisons to prior reporting periods should not be relied upon as indications of our future performance. In addition, our operating results in one or more future periods may fail to meet the expectations of securities analysts or investors. If this happens, the market price of our ordinary shares may decline significantly.

 

16


Table of Contents

We are dependent on third-party suppliers for equipment, technology and other services.

We contract with third parties for the supply of equipment (including generators, UPS systems and cabinet equipment) on which we are dependent to operate our business. Poor performance by, or any inability of, our suppliers to provide necessary equipment, products, services and maintenance could have a negative effect on our reputation and harm our business.

We depend on the ongoing service of our personnel and senior management team and may not be able to attract, train and retain a sufficient number of qualified personnel to maintain and grow our business.

Our success depends upon our ability to attract, retain and motivate highly-skilled employees, including the data center personnel who are integral to the establishment and running of our data centers, as well as sales and marketing personnel who play a large role in attracting and retaining customers. Due to several factors, including the rapid growth of the Internet, there is aggressive competition for experienced data center employees. We compete intensely with other companies to recruit and hire from this limited pool. In addition, the training of new employees requires a large amount of our time and resources. If we cannot attract, train and retain qualified personnel, we may be unable to expand our business in line with our strategy, compete for new customers or retain existing customers, which could cause our business, financial condition and results of operations to suffer.

Our future performance also depends to a significant degree upon the continued contributions of our senior management team. The loss of any member of our senior management team could significantly harm us. To the extent that the services of members of our senior management team would be unavailable to us for any reason, we would be required to hire other personnel to manage and operate our Company. There can be no assurance that we would be able to locate or employ such personnel on acceptable terms or on a timely basis.

Our failure to maintain competitive compensation packages, including equity incentives, may be disruptive to our business. If one or more of our key personnel resigns from our Company to join or form a competitor, the loss of such personnel and any resulting loss of existing or potential customers to any such competitor could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, we may be unable to prevent the unauthorized disclosure or use of our technical knowledge, practices or procedures by departed personnel.

Disruptions to our physical infrastructure could lead to significant costs, reduce our revenues and harm our business reputation and financial results.

Our business depends on providing customers with highly reliable and secure services. A number of factors may disrupt our ability to provide services to our customers, including:

 

   

human error;

 

   

power loss;

 

   

physical or electronic security breaches;

 

   

terrorist acts;

 

   

interruptions to the fiber network;

 

   

hardware and software defects;

 

   

fire, earthquake, flood and other natural disasters;

 

   

improper maintenance by our landlords; and

 

   

sabotage and vandalism.

Disruptions at one or more of our data centers, whether or not within our control, could result in service interruptions or significant equipment damage, leading to significant costs and revenue reductions. Please see “—Risks Related to our Industry—Terrorist activity throughout the world and military action to counter terrorism could adversely impact our business.”

 

17


Table of Contents

Substantial indebtedness could adversely affect our financial condition and our ability to operate our business, and we may not be able to generate sufficient cash flows to meet our debt service obligations.

We have a significant amount of debt and expect to incur additional debt to support our growth. As of December 31, 2011, our total indebtedness was approximately €262.5 million, our stockholders’ equity was €330.6 million and our cash and cash equivalents totaled €142.7 million. Our substantial amount of debt could have important consequences. For example, it could:

 

   

make it more difficult for us to satisfy our debt obligations;

 

   

restrict us from making strategic acquisitions;

 

   

limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and future business opportunities, thereby placing us at a competitive disadvantage if our competitors are not as highly leveraged;

 

   

increase our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions; or

 

   

require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations to make interest and principal payments on our debt, reducing the availability of our cash flow to fund future capital expenditures, working capital, execution of our expansion strategy and other general corporate requirements;

 

   

limit our ability to borrow additional funds, even when necessary to maintain adequate liquidity, which would also limit our ability to further expand our business; and

 

   

make us more vulnerable to increases in interest rates because of the variable interest rates on some of our borrowings to the extent we have not entirely hedged such variable rate debt.

The occurrence of any of the foregoing factors could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

We may also need to refinance a portion of our outstanding debt as it matures, such as our €260.0 million 9.50% senior secured notes due 2017. There is a risk that we may not be able to refinance existing debt or that the terms of any refinancing may not be as favorable as the terms of our existing debt. Furthermore, if prevailing interest rates or other factors at the time of refinancing result in higher interest rates upon refinancing, then the interest expense relating to that refinanced indebtedness would increase. These risks could materially adversely affect our financial condition, cash flows and results of operations

If we increase our indebtedness by borrowing under our revolving credit facility or incur other new indebtedness, the risks described above would increase.

Our insurance may not be adequate to cover all losses.

The insurance we maintain covers material damage to property, business interruption and third-party liability. This insurance contains limitations on the total coverage for damage due to catastrophic events, such as flooding or terrorism. In addition, there is an overall cap on our general insurance coverage of €34 million in any one year. There is, therefore, a risk that if one or more data centers were damaged, the total amount of the loss would not be recoverable by us. As we have multiple data centers in close proximity to each other located in Amsterdam, Frankfurt, Paris and Dublin, this increases the chance of us suffering uninsured losses.

 

18


Table of Contents

Also, our insurance policies include customary exclusions, deductibles and other conditions that could limit our ability to recover losses. In addition, some of our policies are subject to limitations involving co-payments and policy limits that may not be sufficient to cover losses. If we experience a loss that is uninsured or that exceeds policy limits, or if customers consider that there is a significant risk that such an event will occur, this may negatively affect our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our failure to meet the performance standards under our service level agreements may subject us to liability to our customers, which could have a material adverse effect on our reputation, business, financial condition or results of operations.

We have service level agreements with substantially all of our customers in which we provide various guarantees regarding our level of service. Our inability to provide services consistent with these guarantees may lead to large losses for our customers, who consequently may be entitled to service credits for their accounts or to terminate their relationship with us. We have issued service credits to customers in the past due to our failure to meet service level commitments, as was the case in connection with an outage in some cabinets in one of our Paris and one of our Frankfurt data centers in 2011, and we may do so in the future. We cannot be sure that our customers will accept these service credits as compensation in the future. Our failure or inability to meet a customer’s expectations or any deficiency in the services we provide to customers could result in a claim against us for substantial damages. Provisions contained in our agreements with customers attempting to limit damages, including provisions to limit liability for damages, may not be enforceable in all instances or may otherwise fail to protect us for liability damages.

We could be subject to costs, as well as claims, litigation or other potential liability, in connection with risks associated with the security of our data centers.

One of our key service offerings is our high level of physical premises security. Many of our customers entrust their key strategic IT services and applications to us due, in part, to the level of security we offer. A party who is able to breach our security could physically damage our and our customers’ equipment and/or misappropriate either our proprietary information or the information of our customers or cause interruptions or malfunctions in our operations.

There can be no assurance that the security of any of our data centers will not be breached or the equipment and information of our customers put at risk. Any security breach could have a serious effect on our reputation and could prevent new customers from choosing our services and lead to customers terminating their contracts early and seeking to recover losses suffered, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. We may incur significant additional costs to protect against physical premises security breaches or to alleviate problems caused by such breaches.

We face risks relating to foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations.

Our reporting currency for purposes of our financial statements is the euro. However, we also incur revenues and operating costs in non-euro denominated currencies, such as British pounds, Swiss francs, Danish kroner and Swedish krona. We recognize foreign currency gains or losses arising from our operations in the period incurred. As a result, currency fluctuations between the euro and the non-euro currencies in which we do business will cause us to incur foreign currency translation gains and losses. We cannot predict the effects of exchange rate fluctuations upon our future operating results because of the number of currencies involved, the variability of currency exposure and the potential volatility of currency exchange rates. We do not currently engage in foreign exchange hedging transactions to manage the risk of our foreign currency exposure.

 

19


Table of Contents

The slowdown in global economies and their delayed recovery may have an impact on our business and financial condition in ways that we currently cannot predict.

The European debt crisis and slowdown and delayed recovery in the global financial markets could continue to have an adverse effect on our business and our financial condition. If the market conditions continue to remain weak or uncertain, some of our customers may have difficulty paying us and we may experience increased churn in our customer base. Our sales cycle could also lengthen as customers slow spending, or delay decision-making, on our services, which could adversely affect our revenue growth. Finally, we could also experience pricing pressure as a result of economic conditions if our competitors lower prices and attempt to lure away our customers.

Additionally, our ability to access the capital markets may be severely restricted at a time when we would like, or need, to do so, which could have an impact on our flexibility to pursue additional expansion opportunities and maintain our desired level of revenue growth in the future.

Acquisitions present many risks, and we may not realize the financial or strategic goals that were contemplated at the time of any transaction.

We may make acquisitions in the future, which may include acquisitions of businesses, products, services or technologies that we believe to be complementary. We may pay for future acquisitions by using our existing cash resources (which may limit other potential uses of our cash), incurring additional debt (which may increase our interest expense, leverage and debt service requirements) and/or issuing shares (which may dilute our existing stockholders and have a negative effect on our earnings per share). Acquisitions expose us to several potential risks, including:

 

   

the possible disruption of our ongoing business and diversion of management’s attention by acquisition, transition and integration activities;

 

   

our potential inability to successfully pursue or realize some or all of the anticipated revenue opportunities associated with an acquisition or investment;

 

   

the possibility that we may not be able to successfully integrate acquired businesses, or businesses in which we invest, or achieve anticipated operating efficiencies or cost savings;

 

   

the possibility that announced acquisitions may not be completed, due to failure to satisfy the conditions to closing or for other reasons;

 

   

the dilution of our existing stockholders as a result of our issuing stock in transactions;

 

   

the possibility of customer dissatisfaction if we are unable to achieve levels of quality and stability on par with past practices;

 

   

the possibility that additional capital expenditures may be required or that transaction expenses associated with acquisitions may be higher than anticipated;

 

   

the possibility that required financing to fund the requirements of an acquisition may not be available on acceptable terms or at all;

 

   

the possibility that we may be unable to obtain required approvals from governmental authorities under antitrust and competition laws on a timely basis or at all, which could, among other things, delay or prevent us from completing an acquisition, limit our ability to realize the expected financial or strategic benefits of an acquisition or have other adverse effects on our current business and operations;

 

   

the possible loss or reduction in value of acquired businesses;

 

   

the possibility that carriers may find it cost-prohibitive or impractical to bring fiber and networks into a new data center;

 

   

the possibility of litigation or other claims in connection with or as a result of an acquisition, including claims from terminated employees, customers, former stockholders or other third parties; and

 

20


Table of Contents
   

the possibility of pre-existing undisclosed liabilities, including but not limited to lease or landlord related liability, environmental or asbestos liability, for which insurance coverage may be insufficient or unavailable.

The occurrence of any of these risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition or cash flows.

Risks Related to our Industry

The European data center industry has suffered from over-capacity in the past, and a substantial increase in the supply of new data center capacity and/or a general decrease in demand for data center services could have an adverse impact on industry pricing and profit margins.

Between 2001 and 2004, the European data center industry suffered from overcapacity due to difficult telecommunications and technology market conditions when the value of many new Internet-based companies fell after a period of significant growth. During the period of growth, many customers contracted to use more space than they needed and in the downturn in the market that followed, the number of Internet-related business failures increased significantly, resulting in high levels of customer churn due to the termination or non-renewal of contracts.

A substantial increase in the supply of new data center capacity in the European data center market and/or a general decrease in demand, or in the rate of increase in demand, for data center services could have an adverse impact on industry pricing and profit margins. If there is not sufficient customer demand for data center services, our business, financial condition and operating results would be adversely affected.

If we do not keep pace with technological changes, evolving industry standards and customer requirements, our competitive position will suffer.

The Internet and telecommunications industries are characterized by rapidly changing technology, evolving industry standards and changing customer needs. Accordingly, our future success will depend, in part, on our ability to meet the challenge of these changes. Among the most important challenges that we may face are the need to: continue to develop our strategic and technical expertise, influence and respond to emerging industry standards and other technological changes, enhance our current services and develop new services that meet changing customer needs.

All of these challenges must be met in a timely and cost-effective manner. Some of our competitors may have greater financial resources, which would allow them to react better or more quickly to changes than we may be able to. We may not effectively meet these challenges as rapidly as our competitors or at all and our failure to do so could harm our business.

Terrorist activity throughout the world and military action to counter terrorism could adversely impact our business.

Due to the high volume of important data that passes through data centers, there is a real risk that terrorists seeking to damage financial and technological infrastructure view data centers generally, and those in concentrated areas specifically, as potential targets. These factors may increase our costs due to the need to provide enhanced security, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations if we were unable to pass such costs on to our customers. These circumstances may also adversely affect the ability of companies, including ourselves, to raise capital. We may not have adequate property and liability insurance to cover terrorist attacks.

In addition, we depend heavily on the physical infrastructure (particularly as it relates to power) that exists in the markets in which we operate. Any damage to such infrastructure, particularly in the major European markets such as Amsterdam, Frankfurt, London, Madrid and Paris, where we derive a substantial amount of our revenue and which are likely to be more prone to terrorist activities, may materially and adversely affect our business.

 

21


Table of Contents

Our carrier neutral business model depends on the presence of numerous telecommunications carrier networks in our data centers.

The presence of diverse telecommunications carriers’ fiber networks in our data centers is critical to our ability to retain and attract new customers. We are not a telecommunications carrier and as such we rely on third parties to provide our non-carrier customers with carrier services. We cannot assure you that the carriers operating within our data centers will not cease to do so. For example, as a result of strategic decisions or consolidations, some carriers may decide to downsize or terminate connectivity within our data centers, which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We may be subject to reputational damage and legal action in connection with the information disseminated by our customers.

We may face potential direct and indirect liability for claims of defamation, negligence, copyright, patent or trademark infringement and other claims, as well as reputational damage, based on the nature and content of the materials disseminated from our data centers, including on the grounds of allegations of the illegality of certain activities carried out by customers through their equipment located in our data centers. For example, lawsuits may be brought against us claiming that content distributed by our customers may be regulated or banned. Our general liability insurance may not cover any such claim or may not be adequate to protect us against all liability that may be imposed. In addition, on a limited number of occasions in the past, businesses, organizations and individuals have sent unsolicited commercial e-mails (“spam”), which may be viewed as offensive by recipients, from servers hosted at our data centers to a number of people, typically to advertise products or services. We have in the past received, and may in the future receive, letters from recipients of information transmitted by our customers objecting to spam. Although our contracts with our customers prohibit them from spamming, there can be no assurance that customers will not engage in this practice, which could subject us to claims for damages, damage our reputation and have a material adverse effect on our business.

Risks Related to Regulation

Laws and government regulations governing Internet-related services, related communication services and information technology and electronic commerce, across the European countries in which we operate, continue to evolve and, depending on the evolution of such regulations, may adversely affect our business.

Laws and governmental regulations governing Internet-related services, related communications services and information technology and electronic commerce continue to evolve. This is true across the various European countries in which we operate. In particular, the laws regarding privacy and those regarding gambling and other activities that certain countries deem illegal are continuing to evolve.

Changes in laws or regulations (or the interpretation of such laws or regulations) or national or EU policy affecting our activities and/or those of our customers and competitors, including regulation of prices and interconnection arrangements, regulation of access arrangements to types of infrastructure, regulation of privacy requirements through the protection of personal data and regulation of activity considered illegal through rules affecting data center and managed service providers could materially adversely affect our results by decreasing revenue, increasing costs or impairing our ability to offer services.

The industry in which we operate is subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations and may be subject to more stringent efficiency, environmental and health and safety laws and regulations in the future.

We are subject to various environmental and health and safety laws and regulations, including those relating to the generation, storage, handling and disposal of hazardous substances and technological equipment, the maintenance of warehouse facilities and the generation and use of electricity. Certain of these laws and regulations are capable of imposing liability for the entire cost of the investigation and remediation of contaminated sites, without regard to fault or the lawfulness of the disposal activity, on former owners and operators of real property and persons who have disposed of or released hazardous substances at any location. Compliance with these laws and regulations could impose substantial ongoing compliance costs and operating restrictions on us.

 

22


Table of Contents

Hazardous substances or regulated materials of which we are not aware may be present at data centers leased and operated by us. If any such contaminants are discovered at our data centers, we may be responsible under applicable laws, regulations or leases for any required removal or clean-up or other action at substantial cost.

Our facilities contain tanks and other containers for the storage of diesel fuel and significant quantities of lead acid batteries to provide back-up power. We cannot guarantee that our environmental compliance program will be able to prevent leaks or spills in these or other technical installations.

In addition, as consumers of substantial amounts of electricity, we may be affected by the new UK Carbon Reduction Commitment Energy Efficiency Scheme, or the Scheme. The CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme Order 2010 entered into force on March 22, 2010 introducing a mandatory cap and trade scheme from April 1, 2010 applying to organizations, including our own, whose mandatory half hourly metered electricity consumption is greater than 6,000 MWh in the qualification period (which for the first phase of the CRC is calendar year 2008). Potential impacts on our data centers in the UK include the costs associated with improving energy efficiency and the administrative costs of participating in the Scheme. We will be required to purchase emissions allowances from the UK Government to cover our direct and indirect emissions in April of each year of the Scheme beginning in April 2012 (where allowances will be purchased for emissions from the 2011 fiscal year). The cost of the allowances for the initial period of the scheme will be £12/tonne, although the cost could increase in the later years of the Scheme, as allowances will be auctioned after the initial three-year introductory phase (as opposed to sold at a fixed price of £12/tonne).

Our data centers may also be adversely affected by any future application of additional regulation relating to energy usage, for example seeking to reduce the power consumption of companies and fees or levies in this regard (including the EU Energy End-Use Efficiency and Energy Services Directive (Directive 2006/32/EC)). It is possible that the resulting legislation will mean that service providers that consume energy, such as us, may incur increased energy costs, and/or caps on energy use. The European Union is continuing to implement its Climate and Energy Package legislation with a 20% greenhouse gas emissions reduction target against 1990 for the 2013-2020 period and, following the December 2011 Durban climate summit, is actively involved in the extension of the Kyoto Protocol beyond 2012. It is expected that this commitment may give rise to future domestic legislation relating to energy efficiency across the jurisdictions in which we have data centers and this may affect our business.

Non-compliance with, or liabilities under, existing or future environmental or health and safety laws and regulations, including failure to hold requisite permits, or the adoption of more stringent requirements in the future, could result in fines, penalties, third-party claims and other costs that could have a material adverse effect on us.

Risks Related Our Ordinary Shares

The market price for our ordinary shares may continue to be volatile.

The market price for our shares is likely to be highly volatile and subject to wide fluctuations in response to factors including, but not limited to, the following:

 

   

announcements of new products and services by us or our competitors;

 

   

technological breakthroughs in the data center, networking or computing industries;

 

   

news regarding any gain or loss of customers by us;

 

   

news regarding recruitment or loss of key personnel by us or our competitors;

 

   

announcements of competitive developments, acquisitions or strategic alliances in our industry;

 

23


Table of Contents
   

changes in the general condition of the global economy and financial markets;

 

   

general market conditions or other developments affecting us or our industry;

 

   

the operating and stock price performance of other companies, other industries and other events or factors beyond our control;

 

   

cost and availability of power and cooling capacity;

 

   

cost and availability of additional space inventory either through lease or acquisition in our target markets;

 

   

regulatory developments in our target markets affecting us, our customers or our competitors;

 

   

changes in demand for interconnection and colocation products and services in general or at our facilities in particular;

 

   

actual or anticipated fluctuations in our quarterly results of operations;

 

   

changes in financial projections or estimates about our financial or operational performance by securities research analysts;

 

   

changes in the economic performance or market valuations of other data center companies;

 

   

release or expiry of lock-up or other transfer restrictions on our outstanding ordinary shares; and

 

   

sales or perceived sales of additional ordinary shares.

In addition, the securities market has from time to time experienced significant price and volume fluctuations that are not related to the operating performance of particular companies. These market fluctuations may also have a material adverse effect on the market price of our ordinary shares.

A substantial portion of our total outstanding ordinary shares may be sold into the market at any time. Such future sales or issuances, or perceived future sales or issuances, could adversely affect the price of our shares.

If our existing shareholders sell, or are perceived as intending to sell, substantial amounts of our ordinary shares, including those issued upon the exercise of our outstanding share options, the market price of our ordinary shares could be adversely impacted. Such sales, or perceived potential sales, by our existing shareholders might make it more difficult for us to issue new equity or equity-related securities in the future at a time and price we deem appropriate. The ordinary shares offered in our initial public offering were eligible for immediate resale in the public market without restrictions. Shares previously held by our existing shareholders may also be sold in the public market in the future if registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), or if such shares qualify for an exemption from registration, including by reason of Rules 144 or 701 under the Securities Act. Additionally, we intend to register all of our ordinary shares that we may issue under our employee stock ownership plans. Once we register those shares, they can be freely sold in the public market upon issuance, unless pursuant to their terms these stock awards have transfer restrictions attached to them.

You may not be able to exercise pre-emptive rights.

Our board of directors has the power to limit or exclude pre-emptive rights in respect of any issue and/or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Such designation will be limited to our authorized share capital from time to time and will be effective for a period of five years. As a result, we may issue additional shares for future acquisitions or other purposes while excluding any pre-emptive rights. If we issue additional shares without pre-emptive rights, your ownership interests in our Company would be diluted and this in turn could have a material adverse effect on the price of our shares.

 

24


Table of Contents

We may need additional capital and may sell additional ordinary shares or other equity securities or incur indebtedness, which could result in additional dilution to our shareholders or increase our debt service obligations.

We believe that our current cash, anticipated cash flow from operations and proceeds from our initial public offering and high yield note issuances will be sufficient to meet our anticipated cash needs for the foreseeable future. We may, however, require additional cash resources due to changed business conditions or other future developments, including any investments or acquisitions we may decide to pursue. If these resources are insufficient to satisfy our cash requirements, we may seek to sell additional equity or debt securities or utilize our existing or obtain a new credit facility. The sale of additional equity securities could result in additional dilution to our shareholders. The incurrence of indebtedness would limit our ability to pay dividends or require us to seek consents for the payment of dividends, increase our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions, limit our ability to pursue our business strategies, require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations to service our debt, thereby reducing the availability of our cash flow to fund capital expenditure, working capital requirements and other general corporate needs, and limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and our industry. We cannot assure you that financing will be available in amounts or on terms acceptable to us, if at all.

We have never paid, do not currently intend to pay and may not be able to pay any dividends on our ordinary shares.

We have never declared or paid any dividends on our ordinary shares and currently do not plan to declare dividends on our ordinary shares in the foreseeable future. If we were to choose to declare dividends in the future, the payment of cash dividends on our shares is restricted under the terms of the agreements governing our indebtedness. In addition, because we are a holding company, our ability to pay cash dividends on our ordinary shares may be limited by restrictions on our ability to obtain sufficient funds through dividends from subsidiaries, including restrictions under the terms of the agreements governing our and our subsidiaries’ indebtedness. In that regard, our wholly-owned subsidiaries are limited in their ability to pay dividends or otherwise make distributions to us. Under Dutch law, we may only pay dividends out of profits as shown in our adopted statutory annual accounts. We will only be able to declare and pay dividends to the extent our equity exceeds the sum of the paid and called up portion of our ordinary share capital and the reserves that must be maintained in accordance with provisions of Dutch law and our articles of association. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve. Appropriation and distribution of dividends will be subject to the approval of our general meeting of shareholders. Our board of directors, in determining to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve, will consider our ability to declare and pay dividends in light of our future operations and earnings, capital expenditure requirements, general financial conditions, legal and contractual restrictions and other factors that it may deem relevant.

Your rights and responsibilities as a shareholder will be governed by Dutch law and will differ in some respects from the rights and responsibilities of shareholders under U.S. law, and your shareholder rights under Dutch law may not be as clearly established as shareholder rights are established under the laws of some U.S. jurisdictions.

Our corporate affairs are governed by our articles of association and by the laws governing companies incorporated in The Netherlands. The rights of our shareholders and the responsibilities of members of our board of directors under Dutch law may not be as clearly established as under the laws of some U.S. jurisdictions. In the performance of its duties, our board of directors will be required by Dutch law to consider the interests of our Company, our shareholders, our employees and other stakeholders in all cases with reasonableness and fairness. It is possible that some of these parties will have interests that are different from, or in addition to, your interests as a shareholder. We anticipate that all of our shareholder meetings will take place in The Netherlands.

 

25


Table of Contents

In addition, the rights of holders of ordinary shares and many of the rights of shareholders as they relate to, for example, the exercise of shareholder rights, are governed by Dutch law and our articles of association and differ from the rights of shareholders under U.S. law. For example, Dutch law does not grant appraisal rights to a company’s shareholders who wish to challenge the consideration to be paid upon a merger or consolidation of the company. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.”

The provisions of Dutch corporate law and our articles of association have the effect of concentrating control over certain corporate decisions and transactions in the hands of our board of directors. As a result, holders of our shares may have more difficulty in protecting their interests in the face of actions by members of our board of directors than if we were incorporated in the United States. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.”

The interests of our principal shareholders may be inconsistent with your interests.

As of April 1, 2012, private equity investment funds affiliated with Baker Capital indirectly own 30.88% of our equity. Upon completion of our initial public offering, we entered into a shareholders agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our board of directors, including the right to nominate the chairman of our board of directors. Please see Item 7: “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”, “Related Party Transactions—Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital.” As a result, these shareholders have, and will continue to have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day-to-day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve other changes to our operation. The interests of Baker Capital and its affiliates could conflict with your interests, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Affiliates of Baker Capital may also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments, although such transactions might involve risks to you as a holder of ordinary shares. In addition, Baker Capital or its affiliates may, in the future, own businesses that directly compete with ours or do business with us. The concentration of ownership may further have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change of control of our Company, could deprive our shareholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their ordinary shares as part of a sale of our Company and might ultimately affect the market price of our ordinary shares.

We are a foreign private issuer and, as a result, as permitted by the listing requirements of the New York Stock Exchange, we may rely on certain home country governance practices rather than the corporate governance requirements of the New York Stock Exchange.

Many of the corporate governance rules in the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) Listed Company Manual (the “NYSE Manual”) do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE Manual, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Under Sections 303A.04 and 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees and compensation committees, respectively, the Company’s Nominating Committee and Compensation Committee do not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of each respective committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

For an overview of our corporate governance principles, see Item 16G “Corporate Governance.” Accordingly, you may not have the same protections afforded to stockholders of companies that are not foreign private issuers.

 

26


Table of Contents

You may be unable to enforce judgments obtained in U.S. courts against us.

We are incorporated under the laws of The Netherlands, and all or a substantial portion of our assets are located outside of the United States and certain of our directors and officers and certain other persons named in this annual report are, and will continue to be, non-residents of the United States. As a result, although we have appointed an agent for service of process in the United States, it may be difficult or impossible for United States investors to effect service of process within the United States upon us or our non-U.S. resident directors and officers or to enforce in the United States any judgment against us or them including for civil liabilities under the United States securities laws. Therefore, any judgment obtained in any United States federal or state court against us may have to be enforced in the courts of The Netherlands, or such other foreign jurisdiction, as applicable. Because there is no treaty or other applicable convention between the United States and The Netherlands with respect to legal judgments, a judgment rendered by any United States federal or state court will not be enforced by the courts of The Netherlands unless the underlying claim is relitigated before a Dutch court. Under current practice, however, a Dutch court will generally grant the same judgment without a review of the merits of the underlying claim (i) if that judgment resulted from legal proceedings compatible with Dutch notions of due process, (ii) if that judgment does not contravene public policy of The Netherlands and (iii) if the jurisdiction of the United States federal or state court has been based on grounds that are internationally acceptable. Investors should not assume, however, that the courts of The Netherlands, or such other foreign jurisdiction, would enforce judgments of United States courts obtained against us predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the United States securities laws or that such courts would enforce, in original actions, liabilities against us predicated solely upon such laws.

We incur increased costs as a result of being a public company.

As a newly listed public company, we incur additional legal, accounting, insurance and other expenses that we have not incurred as a private company. We incur costs associated with our public company reporting requirements. In addition, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and related rules implemented by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) and the NYSE have imposed increased regulation and required enhanced corporate governance practices for public companies. Our efforts to comply with evolving laws, regulations and standards in this regard are likely to result in increased general and administrative expenses and a diversion of management time and attention from revenue generating activities to compliance activities. We also expect these new rules and regulations to make it more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced policy limits and coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain the same or similar coverage.

 

27


Table of Contents

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Overview

We are a leading provider of carrier-neutral colocation data center services in Europe. We support over 1,200 customers through 28 data centers in 11 countries enabling them to protect, connect, process and distribute their most valuable information. Within our data centers, we enable our customers to connect to a broad range of telecommunications carriers, Internet service providers and other customers. Our data centers act as content, cloud and connectivity hubs that facilitate the processing, storage, sharing and distribution of data, content, applications and media among carriers and customers, creating an environment that we refer to as a community of interest.

Our core offering of carrier-neutral colocation services includes space, power, cooling and a secure environment in which to house our customers’ computing, network, storage and IT infrastructure. We enable our customers to reduce operational and capital costs while improving application performance and flexibility. We supplement our core colocation offering with a number of additional services, including network monitoring, remote monitoring of customer equipment, systems management, engineering support services, cross connects, data backup and storage.

We are headquartered near Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and we operate in major metropolitan areas, including London, Frankfurt, Paris, Amsterdam and Madrid the main data center markets in Europe. Our data centers are located in close proximity to the intersection of telecommunications fiber routes, and we house more than 400 carriers and Internet service providers and 18 European Internet exchanges. Our data centers allow our customers to lower their telecommunications costs and reduce latency, thereby improving the response time of their applications. This high level of connectivity fosters the development of communities of interest.

Strategy

Target New Customers in High Growth Segments to Further Develop our Communities of Interest

We categorize our customers into segments, and we will continue to target new customers in high growth market segments, including financial services, cloud and managed services providers, digital media and carriers. Winning new customers in these target markets enables us to expand existing, and build new, high value communities of interest within our data centers. For example, customers in the digital media segment benefit from the close proximity to content delivery network providers and Internet exchanges in order to rapidly deliver content to consumers. We expect the high value and reduced cost benefits of our communities of interest to continue to attract new customers, which will lead to decreased customer acquisition costs for us.

Increase Share of Spend from Existing Customers

We focus on increasing revenue from our existing customers in our target market segments. New revenue from our existing customers comprises a substantial portion of our new business, generating the majority of our new bookings. Our sales and marketing teams focus on proactively working with customers to identify expansion opportunities in new or existing markets.

Maintain Connectivity Leadership

We seek to increase the number of carriers in each of our data centers by expanding the presence of our existing carriers into additional data centers and targeting new carriers. We also will continue to develop our relationships with Internet exchanges and work to increase the number of Internet service providers in these exchanges. In countries where there is no significant Internet exchange, we will work with Internet service providers and other parties to create the appropriate Internet exchange. Our carrier sales and business development team will continue to work with our existing carriers and Internet service providers, and target new carriers and Internet service providers, to maximize our share of their data center spend, and to achieve the highest level of connectivity in each of our data centers.

 

28


Table of Contents

Continue to Deliver Best-in-Class Customer Service

We will continue to provide a high level of customer service in order to maximize customer satisfaction and minimize churn. Our European Customer Service Center operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, providing continual monitoring and troubleshooting and giving our customers one call access to full, multilingual technical support, thereby reducing our customers’ internal support costs. In addition, we will continue to develop our customer tools, which include an online customer portal to provide our customers with real-time access to information. We will continue to invest in our local service delivery and assurance teams, which provide flexibility and responsiveness to customer needs.

Disciplined Expansion and Conservative Financial Management

We plan to invest in our data center capacity, while maintaining our disciplined investment approach and prudent financial policy. We will continue to determine the size of our expansions based on selling patterns, pipeline and trends in existing demand as well as working with our customers to identify future capacity requirements. We only begin new expansions once we have identified customers and we have the capital to fully fund the build out. Our expansions are done in phases in order to manage the timing and scale of our capital expenditure obligations, reduce risk and improve our return on capital. Finally, we will continue to manage our capital deployment and financial management decisions based on adherence to our target internal rate of return on new expansions and target leverage ratios. For a description of past and current capital expenditures, see Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects.”

Our Services

We offer carrier-neutral colocation and managed services to our customers.

Colocation

Our colocation services provide clients with the space and power to deploy IT infrastructure in our world-class data centers. Through a number of redundant subsystems, including power, fiber and cooling, we are able to provide our customers with highly reliable services. Our colocation services are scalable, allowing our customers to upgrade space, connectivity and services as their requirements evolve. Our data centers employ a wide range of physical security features, including biometric scanners, man traps, smoke detection, fire suppression systems, and secure access. We provide colocation services including:

Space

Each of our data centers houses our customers’ IT infrastructure in a highly connected facility, designed and outfitted to ensure a high level of network reliability. This service provides space and power to our clients to deploy their own IT infrastructure. Customers can choose individual cabinets or a secure cage depending on their space and security requirements.

Power

Each of our data centers is equipped to offer our customers high power availability, including power backup in case of outage as the availability of power is essential to the operation of a data center. The vast majority of our data centers have redundant grid connections and all of our data centers have a power backup installation in case of outage. Generators in combination with uninterrupted power supply, or UPS, system, endeavor to ensure maximum availability. We provide a full range of output voltages and currents and we offer our customers a choice of guaranteed levels of availability between 99.9% and 99.999%.

 

29


Table of Contents

Connectivity

We provide connectivity services that allow our customers to connect their IT infrastructure. These services offer connectivity with more than 400 telecommunications carriers and allow our customers to reduce costs while enhancing the reliability and performance associated with the exchange of Internet and other data traffic. Our connectivity options offer our customers a key strategic advantage by providing direct, high-speed connections to peers, partners, customers and some of the most important sources of IP data, content and distribution in the world.

Cross Connect

We install and manage physical connections running from our customers’ equipment to the equipment of our telecommunications carrier, Internet service providers and Internet exchange customers as well as other customers. Cross connects are physically secured in dedicated areas called Meet-Me rooms. Our staff test and install cables and patches and maintain cable trays and patch panels according to industry best practice.

Availability Monitoring

We assist our customers in evaluating their Internet service providers. We inspect our customers’ Internet connections and notify customers of defects. Our technicians are available to make repairs as requested.

Managed Services

In addition to providing colocation services, we provide a number of additional managed services, including systems monitoring, systems management, engineering support services, data back-up and storage. Some managed services are only performed on an ad hoc basis, as and when requested by the customer, while others are more recurring in nature. These services are provided either by us directly, or in conjunction with third parties.

Customers

We categorize our customers into customer segments including: digital media and distribution, enterprises, financial services, managed services providers and network providers. We have over 1,200 customers. The majority of our customers have entered into contracts with us for an initial three to five year term, which are typically renewed perpetually and automatically for successive one year periods.

In the year ended December 31, 2011, 31% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue came from our top 20 customers, 21% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue came from our top 10 customers and no single customer accounted for more than 5% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue.

The following table sets forth some of our representative customers by segment:

 

Digital Media and Distribution

  

Enterprises

  

Financial Services

  

Cloud Service

Providers

  

Network Providers

Akamai

Bwin

Crytek

Internap

I-stream Planet

Limelight

RTL Interactive

  

Bacardi

Canon

Ferovial

Lease Plan

Pfizer

  

ABN Amro Bank N.V.

Aviva

Interactive Data 7ticks

LME

NYSE Euronext

Trading Technologies

Sungard

Fixnetix

  

Hewlett-Packard

IBM

Terremark

  

AT&T

British Telecom

Bouygues Telecom

Interoute Communications

Colt Technology Services

 

30


Table of Contents

Customer service is provided locally by our in-country teams and centrally via our European Customer Service Center located in London. The European Customer Service Center supports five European languages (Dutch, English, French, German and Spanish) and is run by technical support staff and operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, in order to provide rapid and cost-effective technical and business support to all of our clients. In addition to its service desk functions, the European Customer Service Center monitors and manages the performance of our data centers and takes care of network monitoring and other network operations center functions. The European Customer Service Center arranges, as necessary, local engineering support, rapid response (out of hours emergency assistance), “backup and restore” and other managed services. There is also a customer relationship management system in place to electronically log each issue that the European Customer Service Center is requested to address to ensure efficient and timely support.

Customer Contracts

Our customers typically sign contracts for the provision of colocation space together with basic service level agreements that provide for support services and other managed services. Unless customers notify us of their intention to terminate 90 days in advance of the end of the contract period, contracts (a majority of which have an initial term of three to five years) typically renew perpetually and automatically for successive one year periods. However, where beneficial to us we will, prior to the expiry of a customer contract, seek to re-negotiate and re-sign with a customer (generally for a minimum one-year period). Our contracts generally allow us the option to increase prices in accordance with local price indices in each jurisdiction and we are able to adjust the amount charged for power at any time and as frequently as necessary during the life of the contract to account for any increases in power costs we are charged by our suppliers.

Contracts for colocation services are priced on the basis of a monthly recurring fee reflecting charges for space, power used in the common parts of the data center, power “plugs” and metered power usage, with related infrastructure and implementation costs included in an initial set-up fee. Clients have two options with respect to power usage: either (i) to pay for power usage in “plugs” in advance (typically included in the total cabinet price), which are contractually defined amounts of power per month, for which the customer must pay in full, regardless of how much power is actually used; or (ii) to pay for their actual power usage in arrears on a metered basis. The first option (power plugs) is usually sold in shared areas of our data centers where customers pay per cabinet. The second option (metered power usage) is usually sold to customers taking dedicated space such as a cage, suite or private room where they are charged on a per square meter basis.

As with colocation services, our managed services are typically contracted on the basis of an annual contract (or longer where appropriate) and the fee generally consists of monthly recurring charges and usage based charges as appropriate, and may also include an initial set-up fee. If managed services are ad hoc in nature, they are invoiced on completion of the service.

Each new customer contract we enter into provides that in the event of a power outage or other equivalent service level agreement breach (e.g. for repeatedly crossing a temperature or humidity benchmark), the customer will receive a service credit in the form of a reduction in its next service fee payment, the credit being on a sliding scale to reflect the seriousness of the breach. Our customer contracts typically exclude liability for consequential or indirect loss suffered as a result of a service level agreement breach and for force majeure. Historically, our penalty payments under our service level agreements have been minimal.

Customer Accounts

Fees are typically invoiced quarterly in advance, with the exception of metered power usage which is invoiced monthly in arrears. On new contracts, we generally require deposits, which we are able to use to cover any non-payment of invoices. If accounts are not paid on time, we seek recovery through the court system.

 

31


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing

Our sales and marketing teams focus on proactively identifying and converting opportunities for both existing customers and prospects within our target segments, to expand their space within our data center portfolio.

Sales

We sell our products and services through a local direct sales force and a centralized Major Accounts Team and by attending tradeshows, networking events and industry seminars. Our Major Accounts Team focuses on maximizing revenues across our European footprint from our largest customers and on identifying and developing new major accounts. We utilize a number of indirect channel partners in the United States to secure both referrals and orders from companies based out of the United States.

Marketing

Our marketing organization is responsible for identifying target customer segments, development of the value proposition that will enable us to succeed in our chosen segments, building and communicating a distinct brand, driving qualified leads into the sales pipeline and ensuring strategic alignment with key partners. Our marketing team supports our strategic priorities through the following primary objectives:

Customer Segmentation

Identification of the high-growth customer segments and associated companies that we wish to target and development of the value proposition to enable success in our chosen markets. Working with our sales team, our marketing organization is also responsible for business development of key accounts in each segment.

Brand Management and Positioning

This includes brand identity unification, positioning at the corporate and country levels, the development of methodology, marketing assets and brand awareness programs for all of our business units.

Lead Generation

Utilizing online marketing, targeted advertising, direct marketing, event marketing and public relations programs and strategies to design and execute successful lead-generation campaigns leveraging telemarketing and direct sales to grow our pipeline and deliver our revenue goals.

Employees

As of December 31, 2011 we had a total of 358 employees (full time equivalents, excluding contractors and interim staff) of which 200 employees worked in operations and support, 72 employees worked in sales and marketing and 86 employees in general and administrative. Geographically, 265 of our employees were based in our country operations and 93 employees worked from our headquarters near Amsterdam and corporate offices in London as of December 31, 2011. We believe that relations with our employees are good. Except for collective rights granted by local law, none of our employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements.

Leases

Except for two of our Paris datacenters (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011, and the Amsterdam datacenter premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, we do not own any other data centers and instead lease our data center space. We generally seek to secure property leases for terms of 20 to 25 years. Where possible, we try to mitigate the long-term financial commitment by contracting for initial lease terms of 10 to 15 years with tenant-only rights to extend the lease with multiple 5-year increments, or alternatively through tenant-only rights to terminate the lease in year 10 or year 15. Our leases generally have Consumer Price Index based annual rent increases over the full term of the lease.

 

32


Table of Contents

Data Center Operations

We have 28 carrier-neutral data centers in 13 metropolitan areas in 11 countries, representing approximately 68,100 square meters of maximum equippable space (as of December 31, 2011). Maximum equippable space is the maximum amount of space in our data centers which is designed to be used and sold as Equipped Space.

All of our data centers are located in Europe and all of our revenues are generated in Europe. For more information on the geographic breakdown of our revenues, see Note 5 of our 2011 consolidated financial statements, included elsewhere herein.

We select sites for our data centers based primarily on expected customer demand, availability of power and access to telecommunications fiber routes. Most of our data centers are stand-alone structures, close to power sub-stations and telecommunication networks in light industrial areas outside of city centers, rather than residential areas where more prohibitive environmental regulations exist. Data center design and development is a highly complex process. Data center construction requires extensive planning and must navigate regulatory procedures which can vary by jurisdiction. We have developed extensive technical experience in building data centers in Europe and we are well-positioned to bring new data centers to market rapidly to meet customer demand.

The following table presents the key characteristics of our data centers.

 

Country

  

Location

  

Initially ready for service Quarter

   Maximum
Equippable
Space as of
December 31,
2011
               Square Meters

Austria

   Vienna    Third Quarter, 2000      4,700

Belgium

   Brussels    Third Quarter, 2000      4,800

Denmark

   Copenhagen    Third Quarter, 2000      3,500

France

   Paris—1    First Quarter, 2000      1,400

France

   Paris—2    Third Quarter, 2001      3,000

France

   Paris—3    Third Quarter, 2007      2,000

France

   Paris—4    Third Quarter, 2007      1,300

France

   Paris—5    Fourth Quarter, 2009      4,100

France

   Paris—6    Third Quarter, 2009      1,400

Germany

   Dusseldorf    Second Quarter, 2000      2,800

Germany

   Frankfurt—1    First Quarter, 1999         500

Germany

   Frankfurt—2    Fourth Quarter, 1999      1,100

Germany

   Frankfurt—3    First Quarter, 2000      2,100

 

33


Table of Contents

Country

  

Location

  

Initially ready for service Quarter

   Maximum
Equippable
Space as of
December 31,
2011
               Square Meters

Germany

   Frankfurt—4    First Quarter, 2001      1,400

Germany

   Frankfurt—5    Third Quarter, 2008      1,700

Germany

   Frankfurt—6    Second Quarter, 2010      1,600

Ireland

   Dublin—1    Second Quarter, 2001      1,100

Ireland

   Dublin—2    First Quarter, 2010      2,400

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—1    First Quarter, 1998         600

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—2    First Quarter, 1999         700

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—3    Fourth Quarter, 1999      3,100

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—4*    Fourth Quarter, 2000    *

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—5    Fourth Quarter, 2008      4,500

The Netherlands

   Hilversum    Third Quarter, 2001         800

Spain

   Madrid—1    Third Quarter, 2000      4,000

Sweden

   Stockholm    Third Quarter, 2000      1,900

Switzerland

   Zurich    Fourth Quarter, 2000      6,400

UK

   London—1    Third Quarter, 2000      5,200
        

 

Subtotal

         68,100
        

 

Announced as at December 31, 2011**

        

France

   Paris—7    Expected Second Quarter, 2012      4,600

Germany

   Frankfurt—7    First Quarter, 2012      1,500

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—6    Expected Fourth Quarter, 2012      4,400

UK

   London—2    Expected Second Quarter, 2012      1,500
        

 

Subtotal

         12,000
        

 

Total

         80,100
        

 

 

Note:

 

* The maximum equippable space of Amsterdam—4 is included in the maximum equippable space of Amsterdam—1.
** These are announced expansions scheduled to become ready for service in 2012.

 

34


Table of Contents

Competition

We compete with all providers of data center services including in-house and outsourced data centers. Our chief competitors among each of the types of competition are listed below.

Carrier-Neutral Colocation Data Centers

Carrier-neutral colocation data centers in Europe include Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. These companies are our chief competitors.

IT Outsourcers and Managed Services Provider Data Centers

IT outsourcers and managed services providers in Europe include HP, IBM, Logica, Rackspace and Sungard.

Wholesale Data Centers

Competitor wholesale data center providers include Digital Realty Trust and Global Switch.

Carrier-Operated Data Centers

Carriers that operate their own data centers in Europe include AT&T, BT, Cable & Wireless, Colt Technology Services, Savvis and Verizon.

Please see Item 3 “Key Information—Risk Factors—We face significant competition and we may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.”

Litigation

We have not been party to any legal proceedings, governmental or arbitration proceedings during the 12 months preceding the date of this annual report which may have, or have had in the recent past, a significant effect on our financial position.

Regulation

Although we are not subject to any financial regulations (such as outsourcing requirements, MiFID or Basel II), our financial services customers commonly are. In their contracts with us, these financial services customers impose access, audit and inspection rights to those parts of our data centers that contain their equipment so that they can satisfy their regulatory requirements.

In addition, as consumers of substantial amounts of electricity, we may be affected by the new UK Carbon Reduction Commitment Energy Efficiency Scheme, or the Scheme. The CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme Order 2010 entered into force on March 22, 2010 introducing a mandatory cap and trade scheme from April 1, 2010 applying to organizations, including our own, whose mandatory half hourly metered electricity consumption is greater than 6,000 MWh in the qualification period (which for the first phase of the CRC is calendar year 2008). Potential impacts on our data centers in the UK include the costs associated with improving energy efficiency and the administrative costs of participating in the Scheme. We will be required to purchase emissions allowances from the UK Government to cover our direct and indirect emissions in April of each year of the Scheme beginning in April 2012 (where allowances will be purchased for emissions from the 2011 fiscal year). The cost of the allowances for the initial period of the scheme will be £12/tonne, although the cost could increase in the later years of the Scheme, as allowances will be auctioned after the initial three-year introductory phase (as opposed to sold at a fixed price of £12/tonne).

Our data centers may also be adversely affected by any future application of additional regulation relating to energy usage, for example seeking to reduce the power consumption of companies and fees or levies in this regard (including the EU Energy End-Use Efficiency and Energy Services Directive (Directive 2006/32/EC)). It is possible that the resulting legislation will mean that service providers that consume energy, such as us, may incur increased energy costs, and/or caps on energy use. The European Union is continuing to implement its Climate and Energy Package legislation with a 20% greenhouse gas emissions reduction target against 1990 for the 2013-2020 period and, following the December 2011 Durban climate summit, is actively involved in the extension of the Kyoto Protocol beyond 2012. It is expected that this commitment may give rise to future domestic legislation relating to energy efficiency across the jurisdictions in which we have data centers and this may affect our business.

 

35


Table of Contents

As an operator of data centers which act as content and connectivity hubs facilitating the storage, sharing and distribution of data, content and media for customers, we have in place an Acceptable Use Policy which applies to all of our customers using Internet connectivity services provided by us and which requires our customers to respect all legislation pertaining to the use of Internet services, including email.

We are subject to telecommunications regulation in the various European jurisdictions in which we presently operate, most notably the EU Regulatory Framework. Under these regulations, we are not required to obtain licenses for the provision of our services. However, we may be required to notify the national telecommunications regulator in certain European jurisdictions about these services. We have made the necessary notifications for such jurisdictions.

By operating data centers, we will process personal data under the EU Data Protection Directive (95/46/EC). This directive is implemented through adoption in local legislation of the EU member states. We are subject to this legislation in most European jurisdictions as processors and controllers in the meaning of this Directive. This may impose obligations on us, such as an obligation to take reasonable steps to protect that information.

Insurance

We have in place insurance coverage which we consider to be reasonable and against the type of risks usually insured by companies carrying on the same or similar types of business as ours in the markets in which we operate. Our insurance broadly falls under the following four categories: professional indemnity, general third party liability, directors and officers liability and property damage insurance and business interruption insurance.

Our History and Organizational Structure

European Telecom Exchange BV was incorporated on April 6, 1998, which (after being renamed InterXion Holding B.V. on June 12, 1998) was converted into InterXion Holding N.V. on January 11, 2000. For further information on the history and development of the Company, see Item 10 “Additional Information—General.” From inception onwards we have grown our colocation business organically. We have developed our current footprint (both in terms of countries and cities) between 1999 and 2001 and now operate in 11 countries and 13 cities. Following the industry downturn beginning in 2001 as a result of a sharp decline in demand for Internet-based businesses, we restructured to refocus on a broader and more stable customer base. We have since focused on shifting our customer base from primarily emerging Internet companies and carriers to a wide variety of established businesses seeking to house their IT infrastructure.

Our subsidiaries perform various tasks, such as servicing our clients, operating our datacenters, customers support, and providing management, sales and marketing support to the Group.

 

36


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth the name, country of incorporation and (direct and indirect) ownership interest of our most significant subsidiaries based on revenues and total assets:

 

Entity    Country of
incorporation
   Ownership
%
   Activity

Interxion HeadQuarters B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Management

Interxion Operational B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Management/Holding

Interxion Nederland B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Datacenter B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Datacenter sales & marketing

Interxion Real Estate Holding B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Real Estate Management/Holding

Interxion Real Estate I B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Real Estate

Interxion Real Estate IV B.V.

   the Netherlands    100%    Real Estate

Interxion Österreich GmbH

   Austria    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Belgium N.V.

   Belgium    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Denmark ApS

   Denmark    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion France SAS

   France    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Real Estate II SARL

   France    100%    Real Estate

Interxion Real Estate III SARL

   France    100%    Real Estate

Interxion Deutschland GmbH

   Germany    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Ireland Ltd

   Ireland    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion España SA

   Spain    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Sverige AB

   Sweden    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion (Schweiz) AG

   Switzerland    100%    Provision of co-location services

Interxion Carrier Hotel Ltd.

   United Kingdom    100%    Provision of co-location services

 

37


Table of Contents

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

Not applicable.

 

38


Table of Contents

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The following information should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and with the financial information presented in Item 18 “Financial Statements” included elsewhere in this annual report. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements that reflect our plans, estimates and beliefs. Such statements are based upon current expectations that involve risks and uncertainties. Any statements contained herein that are not statements of historical fact may be deemed to be forward-looking statements. For example, the words “believes,” “anticipates,” “plans,” “expects,” “intends” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed in these forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a discrepancy include, but are not limited to, those discussed in “—Liquidity and Capital Resources” below and Item 3 “Key Information—Risk Factors” above. All forward-looking statements in this annual report are based on information available to us as of the date of this annual report and we assume no obligation to update any such forward-looking statements.

Overview

We are a leading carrier-neutral colocation data center services provider in Europe. Our core offering is carrier-neutral colocation services, which we sell to over 1,200 customers. Within our data centers, we enable our customers to connect to a broad range of telecommunications carriers, Internet service providers and other customers. Our data centers act as content, cloud and connectivity hubs that facilitate the processing, storage, sharing and distribution of data, content, applications and media among carriers and customers, creating an environment that we refer to as a community of interest.

Our core offering is carrier-neutral colocation services, which includes space, uninterrupted power and a secure environment in which to house our customers’ computing, network, storage and IT infrastructure. Our carrier-neutral colocation services enable our customers to reduce operational and capital expenses while improving application performance and flexibility. We supplement our core colocation offering with a number of additional services, including network monitoring, remote monitoring of customer equipment, systems management, engineering support services, cross connects, data backup and storage.

We are headquartered near Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and deliver our services through 28 data centers in 11 countries strategically located in major metropolitan areas, including London, Frankfurt, Paris, Amsterdam and Madrid, which are the main data center markets in Europe. Because our data centers are located in close proximity to the intersection of telecommunications fiber routes and power sources, we are able to provide our customers with high levels of connectivity and the requisite power to meet their needs.

Our data centers house connections to more than 400 carriers and Internet service providers and 18 European Internet exchanges, which allows our customers to lower their telecommunications costs and, by reducing latency, improve the response time of their applications. This connectivity to carriers and Internet service providers, and to other customers, fosters the development of value-added communities of interest, which are important to customers in each of our segments: network providers, cloud services providers, enterprises, financial services and digital media. Development of our communities of interest generates network effects for our customers that enrich the value and attractiveness of the community to both existing and potential customers.

Growth in Internet traffic, cloud computing and the use of customer-facing hosted applications are driving significant demand for high quality carrier-neutral colocation data center services. This demand results from the need for either more space or more power, or both. These needs, in turn, are driven by, among other factors, decreased cost of Internet access, increased broadband penetration, increased usage of high-bandwidth content, increased number of wireless access points and growing availability of Internet and network based applications. If the global economy’s recovery stalls or is reversed, global IP traffic may grow at a lesser rate, which could lead to a slowdown in the increase in demand for our services.

Our ability to meet the demand for high quality carrier-neutral colocation data center services depends on our ability to add capacity by expanding existing data centers or by locating and securing suitable sites for additional data centers that meet our specifications, such as proximity to numerous network service providers, access to a significant supply of electrical power and the ability to sustain heavy floor loading.

 

39


Table of Contents

Our market is highly competitive. Most companies operate their own data centers and in many cases continue to invest in data center capacity, although there is a trend towards outsourcing. We compete against other carrier-neutral colocation data center service providers, such as Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. We also compete with other types of data centers, including carrier-operated colocation, wholesale and IT outsourcers and managed services provider data centers. The cost, operational risk and inconvenience involved in relocating a customer’s networking and computing equipment to another data center are significant and have the effect of protecting a competitor’s data center from significant levels of customer churn.

Key Aspects of Our Financial Model

We offer carrier-neutral colocation services to our customers. Our revenues are mostly recurring in nature and in the last several years, Recurring Revenue has consistently represented over 90% of our total revenue. Our contracted Recurring Revenue model together with low levels of Average Monthly Churn provide significant predictability of future revenue.

Revenue

We enter into contracts with our customers for initial terms of generally three to five years, with annual price escalators and with automatic one-year renewals after the end of the initial term. Our customer contracts provide for a fixed monthly recurring fee for our colocation, managed services and, in the case of cabinets, fixed amounts of power pre-purchased at a fixed price. These fees are billed monthly, quarterly or bi-annually in advance, together with fees for other services such as the provision of metered power (based on a price per kilowatt hour actually consumed), billed monthly in arrears, or fees for services such as remote hands and eyes support, billed on an as-incurred basis.

The following table presents our future committed revenues expected to be generated from our fixed-term customer contracts as of December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009.

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     139,475         154,634         101,235   

Between 1 to 5 years

     201,620         149,900         96,392   

After 5 years

     103,934         18,606         16,093   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     445,029         323,140         213,720   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

We recognize revenue when it is probable that future economic benefits will be realized and these benefits can be measured reliably. Revenues are measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable.

Revenues from contracts with multiple-element arrangements (e.g. installations and setup, equipment sales, data center and managed services) are recognized based on the residual value method, provided the delivered elements have value to customers on a stand-alone basis.

Colocation revenues are earned by providing data center services to customers at our data centers. Colocation revenues are recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Customers are usually invoiced quarterly in advance and income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the quarter.

Power revenues vary with the amount of power our customers use and are generally matched with corresponding power costs. At the start of the contract, we also bill our customers in advance a fee for the installation and set-up of their contracted space within our data centers. The revenue from this initial set-up fee is recognized over the term of the customer contract and also recorded as Recurring Revenue.

 

40


Table of Contents

Other services revenue relates mainly to managed services and connectivity. Revenue from other services is recognized when the services are rendered.

Deferred revenues relating to invoicing in advance and initial set-up fees are carried on the statement of financial position. Deferred revenues due to be recognized after more than one year are held in non-current liabilities.

Recurring Revenue comprises revenue that is incurred monthly from colocation and associated power charges, office space, amortized set-up fees and certain recurring managed services (but excluding any ad hoc managed services) provided by us directly or through third parties. Rents received for the sublease of unused sites are excluded.

Costs

Our cost base consists primarily of personnel, power and property costs.

We employ the majority of our personnel in operations and support roles that operate our data centers 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As of December 31, 2011 we employed 358 full-time employees: 200 in operations and support; 72 in sales and marketing; and 86 in general and administrative. A data center typically requires a fixed number of personnel to run, irrespective of customer utilization. Increases in operations and support personnel occur when we bring new data centers into service. Our approach is, where possible, to locate new data centers close to our existing data centers. In addition to other benefits of proximity, in some cases it also allows us to leverage existing personnel within a data center campus.

In 2009, 2010 and 2011, we invested resources in sales and marketing personnel to engage with our existing and potential customers on an industry basis. This has enabled us to establish closer relationships with our customers thereby allowing us to understand and anticipate their needs and to forecast demand and helping us plan the scope and timing of our expansion activities.

Our customers’ equipment consumes significant amounts of power and generates heat. In recent years the amount of power consumed by an individual piece of equipment, or power density, has increased as processing capacity has increased. In maintaining the correct environmental conditions for the equipment to operate most effectively, our cooling and air conditioning infrastructure also consume significant amounts of power. Our power costs are variable and directly dependent on the amount of power consumed by our customers’ equipment. Our power costs also increase as the Utilization Rate of a data center increases. Increases in power costs due to increased usage by our customers are generally matched by corresponding increases in power revenues.

The unit price we pay for our power also has an impact on our power costs. We generally enter into contracts with local utility companies to purchase power at fixed prices for periods of one or two years. Within substantially all of our customer contracts, we have the right to adjust at any time the price we charge for our power services to allow us to recover increases in the unit price we pay.

Except for two of our Paris datacenters (PAR3 and PAR5), acquired in December 2011. and the Amsterdam datacenter premises (AMS6), acquired in February 2012, we do not own any other data centers and instead lease our data center space. We generally seek to secure property leases for terms of 20 to 25 years. Where possible, we try to mitigate the long-term financial commitment by contracting for initial lease terms of 10 to 15 years with tenant-only rights to extend the lease with multiple 5-year increments, or alternatively through tenant-only rights to terminate the lease in year 10 or year 15. Our leases generally have fixed annual rent increases over the full term of the lease.

Larger increases in our property costs occur when we bring new data centers into service. Bringing new data centers into service also has the effect of temporarily reducing our overall Utilization Rate while the utilization of the new data center increases as we sell to customers.

 

41


Table of Contents

In addition, we enter into annual maintenance contracts with our major plant and equipment suppliers. This cost increases as new maintenance contracts are entered into in support of new data center operations.

Operating Leverage

Due to the relatively fixed nature of our costs, we generally experience margin expansion as our Utilization Rate at existing data centers increases. Our margins and the rate of margin expansion will vary based upon the scope and scale of our capacity expansions, which affects our overall Utilization Rate.

Exceptional Items

We disclose exceptional items separately as “Other income” and “Exceptional expenses” to enable a better understanding of our financial performance.

Exceptional income and expense that we have disclosed separately in the last three annual financial periods have included IPO transaction costs, abandoned transaction costs, net insurance compensation benefits from a large insurance claim and movements in the provision for onerous lease contracts. Onerous lease contracts are those in which we expect losses to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the lease contract. Provisions for these leases are based upon the present value of the future contracted payout under these leases, and movements in the provision for onerous lease contracts are reflected on our income statement. These movements arise principally from changes in the underlying discount rate and are treated as exceptional items. We sublease portions of these unused sites to third parties and treat the income from these subleases as exceptional income.

The provision for onerous lease contracts principally relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

Net Finance Expense

Towards the end of 2006, we started an expansion program of our data centers based on customer demand. This expansion program, closely matched to both customer demand and available capital resources, has continued since that time. We do not commit to a phase of an expansion or construction of a data center unless we have cash and committed capital available to complete the phase. Since 2006, we have raised debt capital to fund our expansion program, and this has contributed to increases in our finance expense. During the period of construction of a data center, we capitalize the borrowing costs as part of the construction costs of the data center. In 2010, we refinanced the Company’s debt in February 2010 when we issued €200 million of 9.5% senior secured notes, which was primarily used to repay existing debt, and a further tap offering of €60 million in November 2010. For the full year 2011, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €23.9 million and interest income of €2.3 million. For the year 2010, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €18.3 million and a €10.2 million one-time write off of costs associated with the refinancing in February 2010 together with an unwinding of interest on provisions that had been discounted to their present value at initial recognition.

We fund the expansion programs within operating entities principally through intra-group loans and since 2008, exchange differences arising, if any, on net investments including receivables from or payable to a foreign operation, are recognized directly in the foreign currency translation reserve within equity in accordance with IAS 21. Prior to 2008, these exchange differences were recognized as net finance expense or income.

We discuss our capital expenditures and our capital expansion program below in “—Liquidity and Capital Resources.”

Income Tax Expense

Since inception we have generated significant tax loss carry forwards in all of our jurisdictions. In 2006, we became taxable income positive and began offsetting our tax loss carry forwards against taxable profits. As at December 31, 2011 we have recognized most of our tax losses. We will continue to recognize the remaining deferred tax assets progressively as we become profitable in the respective jurisdiction. We expect to be able to continue to use our tax loss carry forwards to minimize cash taxes going forward.

 

42


Table of Contents

Segment Reporting

We report our financials in two segments, which we have determined based on our management and internal reporting structure: the first being France, Germany, The Netherlands and UK and the second being the Rest of Europe, which comprises our operations in Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items are presented as “corporate and other” and comprise mainly general and administrative expenses, assets and liabilities associated with our headquarters operations, provisions for onerous contracts (relating to the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the relevant leases, as further explained below) and revenue and expenses related to such onerous contracts, loans and borrowings and related expenses and income tax assets and liabilities. Segment capital expenditure is the total cost directly attributable to a segment incurred during the period to acquire property, plant and equipment.

Results of Operations

The following table presents our operating results for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
    Year ended December 31,  
     2011 (1)     2011     2010     2009  
     (U.S. $’000,
except per
share
amounts)
    (€’000, except per share amounts)  

Revenue

     316,943        244,310        208,379        171,668   

Cost of sales

     (132,021     (101,766     (91,154     (78,548
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     184,922        142,544        117,225        93,120   

Other Income

     632        487        425        746   

Sales and marketing costs

     (22,936     (17,680     (15,072     (11,253

General and administrative costs

        

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (46,122     (35,552     (31,108     (21,960

Exceptional expenses

     (2,261     (1,743     (150     (8,594

Share-based payment

     (3,549     (2,736     (1,684     (950

Other general and administrative costs

     (35,322     (27,227     (22,950     (19,124
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

General and administrative costs

     (87,254     (67,258     (55,892     (50,628
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     75,364        58,093        46,686        31,985   

Net finance expense

     (29,558     (22,784     (29,444     (6,248
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     45,806        35,309        17,242        25,737   

Income tax (expense) / income

     (12,631     (9,737     (2,560     715   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     33,175        25,572        14,682        26,452   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share

     0.52        0.40        0.33        0.60   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA ( 2 )

     126,664        97,637        79,203        62,743   

 

43


Table of Contents

The following table presents our operating results as a percentage of revenues for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
 
     2011     2010     2009  

Revenue

     100     100     100

Cost of sales

     (42     (44     (46
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     58        56        54   

Other income

     0        0        0   

Sales and marketing costs

     (7     (7     (7

General & administrative costs

      

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (15     (15     (13

Exceptional expenses

     (1     0        (5

Share-based payments

     (1     (1     (1

Other general and administrative costs

     (11     (11     (11
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

General and administrative costs

     (28     (27     (29
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     24        22        19   

Net finance expense

     (9     (14     (4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     14        8        15   

Income tax (expense) / income

     (4     (1     0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     10     7     15
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA margin (2)

     40     38     37

 

Notes:

 

(1) The operating results for the year ended December 31, 2011 have been translated for convenience only based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2011 and for euro into U.S. dollars of €1.00 = U.S. 1.2973. See Item 3 “Key Information—Exchange Rates” for additional information.
(2) EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments and exceptional and non-recurring items. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €50 million revolving credit facility and €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. However, other companies may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin differently than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS. See “—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA” for a more detailed description.

 

44


Table of Contents

The following table presents a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit according to our income statement, the most directly comparable IFRS performance measure, for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
    Year ended December 31,  
     2011 (1) *     2011     2010     2009  
     (U.S. $’000)     (€’000)  

Other financial data

        

Operating profit

     75,364        58,093        46,686        31,985   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     46,122        35,552        31,108        21,960   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA

     121,486        93,645        77,794        53,945   

Share-based payments

     3,549        2,736        1,684        950   

Exceptional expenses

        

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts (a)

     23        18        150        3,753   

IPO transaction costs (b )

     2,238        1,725        —          —     

Abandoned transaction costs (c )

     —          —          —          4,841   

Exceptional income

     (632     (487     (425     (746
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA (2) *

     126,664        97,637        79,203        62,743   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:

 

* References are to the footnotes above.
(a) “Increase (decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts” does not reflect the deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(b) “IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.
(c) “Abandoned transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write-off of capitalized initial public offering costs.

The following table sets forth some of our key performance indicators as of the dates indicated:

 

     As of December 31,  
     2011     2010     2009  

Equipped Space (1) (square meters)

     62,800        61,000        54,800   

Utilization Rate (2)

     75     72     70

 

Notes:

 

(1) Equipped Space is the amount of data center space that, on the date indicated, is equipped and either sold or could be sold, without making any additional investments to common infrastructure. Equipped Space at a particular data center may decrease if either (a) the power requirements of customers at such data center change so that all or a portion of the remaining space can no longer be sold as the space does not have enough power and/or common infrastructure to support it without further investment or (b) if the design and layout of a data center changes to meet among others, fire regulations or customer requirements, and necessitates the introduction of common space which cannot be sold to individual customers, such as corridors.
(2) Utilization Rate is, on the relevant date, Revenue Generating Space as a percentage of Equipped Space; some Equipped Space is not fully utilized due to customers’ specific requirements regarding the layout of their equipment. In practice, therefore, Utilization Rate may not reach 100%.

 

45


Table of Contents

Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010

Revenue

Our revenue for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 was as follows:

 

     Year ended December 31,      Change  
     2011      %      2010      %           %  
     (€’000, except percentages)                

Revenue

                 

Recurring revenue

     228,328         93         192,973         93         35,355         18   

Non-recurring revenue

     15,982         7         15,406         7         576         4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     244,310         100         208,379         100         35,931         17   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue increased to €244.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €208.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 17%. Recurring revenue increased by 18% and non-recurring revenue increased by 4% from the year ended December 31, 2010 to the year ended December 31, 2011. The period over period growth in recurring revenue was primarily the result of an increase of approximately 3,400 square meters in Revenue Generating Space as a result of sales to both existing and new customers in all of our regions.

Cost of Sales

Cost of sales increased to €101.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €91.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 12%. Cost of sales was 42% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 44% for the year ended December 31, 2010. The increase in cost of sales was due to increased costs associated with our overall revenue growth and data center expansion projects, including (i) an increase of €5.5 million in power costs, (ii) an increase of €1.3 million in higher datacenter rent costs and (iii) an increase of €0.9 million in compensation costs. Equipped Space increased by approximately 1,800 square meters during the year ended December 31, 2011 as a result of expansions to existing data centers in Dublin, London and Vienna. We expect cost of sales as a percentage of revenue to decrease as we increase utilization at our existing facilities. This decrease may be offset by the impact of lower utilization in new data centers we open as part of our data center expansion projects.

Sales and Marketing Costs

Our sales and marketing costs increased to €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €15.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 17%. Sales and marketing costs were 7% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010.

The increase in sales and marketing costs was primarily a result of an increase of €2.3 million in compensation and related costs due to increases in employee headcount and marketing expenses associated with our continued strategy to invest in our industry focused customer development and acquisition approach.

General and Administrative Costs

General and administrative costs consist of depreciation, amortization and impairments, exceptional expenses, share-based payments and other general and administrative costs.

Depreciation, Amortization and Impairments

Depreciation, amortization and impairments increased to €35.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €31.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 14%. Depreciation, amortization and impairments was 15% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010. The increase was due to new data centers and data center expansion. The increase was partially offset by a reversal of impairment amounting to €0.8 million related to our Sweden datacenter.

 

46


Table of Contents

Exceptional Expenses

Exceptional expenses comprise significant items which are separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a better understanding of our financial performance. In the year ended December 31, 2011, we recorded €1.7 million of exceptional expenses relating to the IPO.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back share-based payments. For the year ended December 31, 2011 we recorded share-based payments of €2.7 million, an increase of 62% from the year ended December 31, 2010.

Other General and Administrative Costs

Other general and administrative costs increased to €27.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €23.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, an increase of 19%. Other general and administrative costs were 11% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2010. The increase in the other general and administrative costs was due to an increase of €1.8 million in compensation costs resulting from headcount growth and an increase of €1.3 million in expenses for professional services mainly due to higher public company cost such as the implementation of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

Net Finance Expense

Net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2011 primarily consists of a €23.7 million net interest expense. Net finance expense decreased to €22.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 from €29.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, a decrease of 23%. Net finance expense was 9% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 14% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010. The decrease in net finance expense for the year December 31, 2011 was due primarily to the one-off charges amounting to €10.2 million associated with the debt refinancing in the first quarter of 2010, which was partially offset by increased interest expense in 2011 due to the greater outstanding principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes as result of the €60.0 million bond tap in November 2010.

We capitalized €2.7 million of finance expense to construction in progress during the year ended December 31, 2011 and €2.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2010.

Other Income

Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business, including income from the sublease of parts of our onerous lease contracts.

Income Taxes

Income tax expense was €9.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to €2.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2010. Income tax expense was 4% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 1% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010.

We recorded current tax expenses of €5.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and €1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2010. We recorded deferred tax expense of €4.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and €0.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, arising from the net impact of the utilization of deferred tax assets on loss carry-forwards as well as the initial recognition of deferred tax assets on loss carry-forwards.

 

47


Table of Contents

Years Ended December 31, 2010 and 2009

Revenue

Our revenue for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 was as follows:

 

     Year ended December 31,      Change  
     2010      %      2009      %           %  
     (€’000, except percentages)                

Revenue

                 

Recurring revenue

     192,973         93         161,314         94         31,659         20   

Non-recurring revenue

     15,406         7         10,354         6         5,052         49   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     208,379         100         171,668         100         36,711         21   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue increased to €208.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 from €171.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of 21%. Recurring revenue increased by 20% and non-recurring revenue increased by 49% from the year ended December 31, 2009 to the year ended December 31, 2010. The period over period growth in recurring revenue was primarily the result of an increase of approximately 5,300 square meters in Revenue Generating Space as a result of sales to both existing and new customers in all of our regions. During the year ended December 31, 2010, we recorded approximately €6.3 million of revenue from our new data centers in Dublin and Frankfurt as well as expansions to existing data centers in Amsterdam, London, and Zurich.

Cost of Sales

Cost of sales increased to €91.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 from €78.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of 16%. Cost of sales was 44% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010 and 46% for the year ended December 31, 2009. The increase in cost of sales was due to increased costs associated with our overall revenue growth and data center expansion projects, including (i) an increase of €4.3 million in external installation costs, (ii) an increase of €3.3 million in property costs, (iii) €2.0 million in higher compensation costs and (iv) €1.5 million in utility costs as a result of increased customer installations.

Equipped Space increased by approximately 6,200 square meters during the year ended December 31, 2010 as a result of a new data center in Dublin and Frankfurt as well as expansions to existing data centers in Amsterdam, Paris and Zurich. We expect cost of sales as a percentage of revenue to decrease as we increase utilization at our existing facilities. This decrease may be partially offset by the impact of lower utilization in new data centers we open as part of our data center expansion projects.

Sales and Marketing Costs

Our sales and marketing costs increased to €15.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 from €11.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of 34%. Sales and marketing costs were 7% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009.

The increase in sales and marketing costs was primarily a result of an increase of €2.5 million in compensation and related costs due to increases in employee headcount as we have continued to invest in our industry focused customer development and acquisition approach.

General and Administrative Costs

General and administrative costs consist of depreciation, amortization and impairments, exceptional expenses, share-based payments and other general and administrative costs.

 

48


Table of Contents

Depreciation, Amortization and Impairments

Depreciation, amortization and impairments increased to €31.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 from €22.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of 42%. Depreciation, amortization and impairments was 15% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010 and 13% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2009. This increase was due to new data centers and data center expansion.

Exceptional Expenses

Exceptional expenses comprise significant items which are separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a better understanding of our financial performance. In the year ended December 31, 2010, we recorded €0.2 million of exceptional expenses relating to an increase in the provision we have made for our onerous leases, which was offset by the sublease revenue in the unused data center site in Munich terminating in March 2016.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back share-based payments. For the year ended December 31, 2010 we recorded share-based payments of €1.7 million.

Other General and Administrative Costs

Other general and administrative costs increased to €23.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 from €19.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of 20%. Other general and administrative costs were 11% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009. The increase in the other general and administrative costs was due to an increase of €1.7 million in compensation costs resulting from headcount growth.

Net Finance Expense

Net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2010 primarily consists of a €29.4 million net interest expense. Net finance expense increased to €29.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 from €6.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, an increase of 374%. Net finance expense was 14% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010 and 4% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2009. The increase in net finance expense for the year December 31, 2010 was due primarily to the one-off charges amounting to €10.2 million associated with the debt refinancing in the first quarter and the greater outstanding principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes and higher interest rate compared to the old bank facilities.

During each of the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, we capitalized €2.0 million of finance expense to construction in progress.

Other Income

Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business, including income from the sublease of parts of our onerous lease contracts. Additionally, we reported a net insurance compensation benefit of €0.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 as a result of fire damage incurred in 2008.

Income Taxes

Income tax expense was €2.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 compared to an income tax benefit of €0.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009. Income tax expense was 1% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2010 and 0% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2009.

We recorded current tax expenses of €1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 and €0.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009. We recorded deferred tax expense of €0.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 and a benefit of €1.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, arising from the net impact of the utilization of deferred tax assets on loss carry-forwards as well as the initial recognition of deferred tax assets on loss carry-forwards.

 

49


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

As of December 31, 2011, our total indebtedness consisted of (i) €260.0 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 and (ii) other debt and finance lease obligations totaling €2.5 million.

Historically, we have made significant investments in our property, plant and equipment and intangibles assets in order to expand our data center footprint and total Equipped Space as we have grown our business. In the year ended December 31, 2011 we invested €162.0 million in property, plant and equipment (€154.6 million) and intangible assets (€7.4 million), of which €145.7 million, including acquisition of PAR3 and PAR 5 datacenters (€19.1 million), was attributed to expansion capital expenditures and the remainder to maintenance and other capital expenditures. In the year ended December 31, 2010, we invested €100.4 million in property, plant and equipment (€98.2 million) and intangibles (€2.2 million). Intangible assets include investments in power grid rights and software development.

Although in any one year the amount of maintenance and replacement capital expenditures may vary, we expect that long-term such expenses will be between 4% and 6% of total revenue.

As of December 31, 2011, we had €142.7 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €4.8 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. As of December 31, 2010, we had €99.1 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €4.2 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. Our primary source of cash is from our financing activities and customer collections.

Sources and Uses of Cash

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Cash generated from operations

     90,048        85,308        58,586   

Net cash flows from operating activities

     64,043        74,379        51,378   

Net cash flows used in investing activities

     (161,011     (100,164     (100,949

Net cash flows from financing activities

     140,330        92,748        19,764   

Operating Activities

The increase in cash generated from operations in the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily due to improved operational performance.

The decrease in net cash flows from operating activities in the year ended December 31, 2011 compared to the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily due to higher interest and income tax payments and the decrease in net working capital movements partly offset by the improved operating performance of the Company. The increase in net cash flows from operating activities in the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily due to the improved operating performance of the Company as discussed above and an increase in movements in trade and other liabilities as compared to the year ended December 31, 2009.

Investing Activities

The increase in net cash used in investing activities in the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to capital expenditures in the expansion of existing or construction of new data centers. The decrease in net cash used in investing activities in the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily due to the timing of capital expenditures in the expansion of existing or construction of new data centers. The increase in net cash used in investing activities in the year ended December 31, 2009 was also primarily due to capital expenditures in the expansion of existing data centers or construction of new data centers.

 

50


Table of Contents

Financing Activities

Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily the result of €143.0 million in gross proceeds from the issuance of new shares at the IPO, which was partly offset by the associated costs and fees. Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2010 was primarily the result of €254.3 million in gross proceeds from the issuance of the Senior Secured Notes (and after deducting deferred financing fees related to the Revolving Credit Facility), which was partly offset by repayment of our previously outstanding credit facility and associated costs and fees. Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2009 was primarily the result of €22.2 million in gross proceeds drawn under our prior credit facilities.

We anticipate that cash flows from operating activities and from the utilization of credit available will be sufficient to meet our operating requirements on a short-term (twelve months) and long-term basis, including repayment of the current portion of our debt as it becomes due, and to complete our publicly announced expansion projects.

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA

EBITDA for the year ended December 31, 2011 was €93.6 million, €77.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2010, and €53.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, representing 37%, 31% and 34% of revenue, respectively. Adjusted EBITDA for the year ended December 31, 2011 was 97.6 million, €79.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 and €62.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 representing 40%, 38% and 37% of revenue, respectively.

We present EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €50 million revolving credit facility and €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017.

Failure to comply with the financial covenants in our €50 million revolving credit facility would result in an event of default, which may cause all amounts outstanding under the facility to become immediately due and payable. Acceleration of such outstanding amounts under the facility may lead to an event of default under the indenture governing our €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes. Failure to satisfy the financial covenants in the indenture would result in our inability to incur additional debt under certain circumstances.

EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments and exceptional and non-recurring items. However, other companies may present EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA differently than we do. EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

 

51


Table of Contents

The following table presents a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit according to our income statement, for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     58,093        46,686        31,985   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     35,552        31,108        21,960   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA

     93,645        77,794        53,945   

Share-based payments

     2,736        1,684        950   

Exceptional expenses (1 )

      

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts ( 2 )

     18        150        3,753   

IPO transaction costs ( 3)

     1,725        —          —     

Abandoned transaction costs ( 4)

     —          —          4,841   

Exceptional income (5 )

     (487     (425     (746
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     97,637        79,203        62,743   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

 

(1) Exceptional expenses comprise significant items which are separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a better understanding of our financial performance.
(2) “Increase in provision for onerous lease contracts” does not reflect the deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(3) “IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.
(4) “Abandoned transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write-off of capitalized initial public offering costs.
(5) Exceptional income is reported within “Other income.” Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business including income from the sublease of parts of our onerous lease contracts.

Contractual Obligations and Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

We lease a majority of our data centers and certain equipment under non-cancellable lease agreements. The following represents our debt maturities, financings, leases and other contractual commitments as of December 31, 2011:

 

     Total      Less
than 1
year
     1 – 3
years
     3 – 5
years
     More
than 5
years
 
     (€’000)  

Long-term debt obligations (1 )

     262,605         895         105         1,605         260,000   

Financial leases

     332         236         96         —           —     

Operating leases in relation to onerous lease contracts

     13,668         3,083         6,166         4,419         —     

Operating leases

     282,030         22,446         47,871         44,285         167,428   

Other contractual commitments

     15,800         15,800         —           —           —     

Capital commitments

     101,204         101,204         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     675,639         143,664         54,238         50,309         427,428   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Notes:

 

(1) Long-term debt obligations include the Senior Secured Notes and loans from suppliers and/or landlords.

In connection with 13 of our data center leases, we entered into 15 irrevocable bank guarantees totaling €4.8 million with ABN AMRO Bank, Royal Bank of Scotland, La Caixa and Sparkasse. These bank guarantees were provided in lieu of cash deposits and automatically renew in successive one-year periods until the final lease expiration date. The bank guarantees are cash collateralized and the collateral is reflected as restricted cash on our statement of financial position. These contingent commitments are not reflected in the table above.

 

52


Table of Contents

Primarily as a result of our various data center expansion projects, as of December 31, 2011, we were contractually committed for €101.2 million of unaccrued capital expenditures, primarily for data center equipment not yet delivered and labor not yet provided, in connection with the work necessary to complete construction and open these data centers prior to making them available to customers for installation. This amount, which is expected to be paid in 2012, is reflected in the table above as “Capital commitments.”

We have other non-capital purchase commitments in place as of December 31, 2011, such as commitments to purchase power in select locations, through the year 2012, and other open purchase orders, which contractually bind us for goods or services to be delivered or provided during the remainder of 2012 and beyond. Such other purchase commitments as of December 31, 2011, which total € 15.8 million, are also reflected in the table above as “Other contractual commitments.”

In addition, although we are not contractually obligated to do so, we expect to incur additional capital expenditures consistent with our disciplined expansion and conservative financial management in our various data center expansion projects during the remainder of 2011 in order to complete the work needed to open these data centers. These non-contractual capital expenditures are not reflected in the table above.

Critical Accounting Estimates

Basis of Measurement

We present our financial statements in thousands of euro. They are prepared under the historical cost convention except for certain financial instruments. The financial statements are presented on the going-concern basis. Our functional currency is the euro.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by us and our wholly-owned subsidiaries and to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Use of Estimates and Judgments

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

In particular, information about significant areas of estimation uncertainty and critical judgments in applying accounting policies that have the most significant effect on amounts recognized in the financial statements are discussed below.

Property, Plant and Equipment Depreciation

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on our best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is therefore subjective.

Costs of Site Restoration

Liabilities in respect of obligations to restore premises to their original condition are estimated at the commencement of the lease. The actual cost of these may be different depending upon whether the Group renews the lease.

Provision for Onerous Lease Contracts

Provision is made for the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted rental income to be received over the minimum sublease term in arriving at the amount of future losses. Currently, the provision for onerous lease contracts principally relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

 

53


Table of Contents

Deferred Taxation

Provision is made for deferred taxation at the rates of tax prevailing at the period end dates unless future rates have been substantively enacted. Deferred tax assets are recognized where it is probable that they will be recovered based on estimates of future taxable profits for each tax jurisdiction. The actual profitability may be different depending upon local financial performance in each tax jurisdiction.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

The following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations set out below were issued but were not effective for the financial year ending December 31, 2011 and were not applied in preparing the financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010:

Revision to IAS 12 “Income taxes”

Revision to IAS 32, “Financial Instruments: Presentation of Rights Issues”;

IFRS 9, “Financial Instruments”

IFRS 10 “Consolidated Financial Statements”

IFRS 11 “Joint arrangements”

IFRS 12 “Disclosures of interests in Other entities”

IFRS 13 “Fair value measurement”

Revision to IFRIC 14, IAS 19, “The Limit on a Defined Benefit Assets, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction”

Following an internal review it is not anticipated that the adoption of these standards and interpretations will have a material financial impact on the financial statements in the period of initial application and the subsequent reporting periods, except for IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments” which becomes mandatory for the Groups 2013’s consolidated financial statements and could change the classification and measurement of financial assets.

 

54


Table of Contents

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Introduction

We have a one-tier board structure (the “Board”) comprised of directors with the title “Executive Directors” and directors with the title “Non-Executive Directors” (together with the Executive Directors, the “Directors”). The majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE Manual.

Senior Management and Board of Directors

The following table lists the names, positions and ages of the members of our Senior Management and our Directors:

 

Name

   Age   

Position ( 2 )

  

Term
Expiration
Date (1)

David Ruberg    66    President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director    2013
M.V. “Josh” Joshi    44    Chief Financial Officer   
Kevin Dean    49    Chief Marketing Officer   
Peter Cladingbowl    46    Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations Support   
Jaap Camman    45    Senior Vice President, Legal   
Jan Pieter Anten    39    Vice President, Human Resources   
John C. Baker    62    Chairman and Non-Executive Director    2013
Robert M. Manning    52    Non-Executive Director    2012
David Lister    53    Non-Executive Director    2014
Cees van Luijk    62    Non-Executive Director    2012
Michel Massart    61    Non-Executive Director    2014
Jean F.H.P. Mandeville    52    Non-Executive Director    2013

 

Notes:

 

(1) The term of office expires at the annual general meeting of our shareholders held in the year indicated.
(2) A majority of our Directors is independent as required by the NYSE Manual. Of our Non-Executive Directors, Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning are considered to be non-independent as they are both general partners of Baker capital affiliates. Our other Non-Executive Directors are all independent.

The business address of all members of our Senior Management and of our Directors is at our registered offices located at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands.

The principal functions and experience of each of the members of our Senior Management and our Directors are set out below:

David Ruberg, President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director

David Ruberg joined us as President and Chief Executive Officer in November 2007 and became Vice-Chairman of the board of directors when it became a one-tier board in 2011. David served as Chairman of the Supervisory Board from 2002 to 2007 and on the Management Board from 2007 until the conversion into a one-tier board. David was affiliated with Baker Capital, a private equity firm from January 2002 until October 2007. From April 1993 until October 2001 he was Chairman, President and CEO of Intermedia Communications, a NASDAQ-listed broadband communications services provider, as well as Chairman of its majority-owned subsidiary, Digex, Inc., a NASDAQ-listed managed web hosting company. He began his career as a scientist at AT&T Bell Labs, contributing to the development of operating systems and computer languages. David serves on the board of QSC AG. He holds a Bachelor’s Degree from Middlebury College and a Masters in Computer and Communication Sciences from the University of Michigan.

 

55


Table of Contents

M.V. “Josh” Joshi, Chief Financial Officer

Josh Joshi joined us as Chief Financial Officer in August 2007. From June 2006 to December 2006 he was CFO of Leisure and Gaming plc, an online gaming and gambling business, and from April 2003 to May 2006 he was CFO of TeleCity plc, a pan European carrier-neutral data center business, both publicly traded companies on the London Stock Exchange. He was one of the founders and CFO of private-equity-backed Storm Telecommunications Limited, a U.S. and pan European data and network service provider. In his early career, Josh spent 8 years in professional practice, predominantly with Arthur Andersen. Josh holds a Bachelor’s Degree in Civil Engineering from Imperial College, London and is a Chartered Accountant.

Kevin Dean, Chief Marketing Officer

Kevin Dean was appointed Senior Vice President Marketing and Chief Marketing Officer in December 2009. From 2003 to 2009 he served as Marketing Director for COLT Telecommunications, a FTSE 200 listed European voice, data and hosting company. From 1994 to 2003 he worked at Cable and Wireless, a FTSE 200 listed global telecommunications company, holding a number of positions including General Manager sector marketing and business development, Director Marketing and Vice President Marketing Analysis, Planning and Strategy. Mr. Dean graduated from Manchester Metropolitan University with a Degree in Applied Physics, and subsequently earned an MBA from the Open Business School and is a Chartered Marketer.

Peter Cladingbowl, Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations Support

Peter Cladingbowl joined us as Senior Vice President, Engineering and Operations Support in August of 2010. Prior to joining us, Peter was the Vice President Operations EMEA at Global Crossing. Previous roles at Global Crossing, where he spent a total of 12 years, included CIO EMEA and Director of Business Operations. Peter also has substantial operational and general management experience in manufacturing and started his career as a geophysical engineer in the off-shore oil industry. He holds a BSc (Mechanical Engineering) from the University of Cape Town, South Africa.

Jaap Camman, Senior Vice President, Legal

Jaap Camman is responsible for all legal and corporate affairs across the Group. He joined us in November 1999 as Manager Legal and has been our Executive Vice President Legal since July 2002. Before joining us, he worked for the Dutch Government from February 1994 until October 1999. His latest position was Deputy Head of the Insurance Division within The Netherlands Ministry of Finance. Jaap holds a Law Degree from Utrecht University.

Jan-Pieter Anten, Vice President, Human Resources

Jan-Pieter Anten joined us as Vice President Human Resources in October 2011. Prior to joining us, Jan-Pieter worked for Hay Group, a global management consulting firm, as Director International Strategic Clients Europe, where he led major accounts within the European market. Prior to that, he held the position of Vice President Human Resources at Synthon, an international organization with worldwide affiliates. Before Synthon he worked for Hay Group as a Senior Consultant. Jan-Pieter holds a degree from the University of Utrecht.

John C. Baker, Chairman and Non-Executive Director

Mr. Baker serves as Chairman of the board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Baker served as Chairman of our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2007. Mr. Baker founded Baker Capital in 1995. Mr. Baker is a graduate of Harvard College and Harvard Business School.

 

56


Table of Contents

Robert M. Manning, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Manning serves on our board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Manning served on our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2002. Mr. Manning is a general partner with Baker Capital. Prior to joining Baker Capital, Mr. Manning was CFO of Intermedia Communications, Inc., an integrated communications service provider, from 1996 to 2001, and a director of its majority-owned subsidiary Digex, Inc., a provider of complex, managed, web hosting services, from 1998 to 2001. Prior to Intermedia, Mr. Manning was a founding executive of DMX, Inc., the first satellite- and cable-delivered digital radio network, from 1990 to 1996. Prior to DMX, Mr. Manning worked as an investment banker to the cable television and communications industries. Mr. Manning serves on the boards of Broadview, Inc., PlusTV, Wine.com (Chairman) and Adaptix (Chairman) and is a graduate of Williams College.

David Lister, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Lister serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in June 2011. Mr. Lister joined National Grid as Global Chief Information Officer in March 2009. He is also a Non-Executive Director of the UK Government’s Department of Work and Pensions. Before joining National Grid, David held CIO positions at a number of leading international companies including Royal Bank of Scotland, Reuters, Boots, Glaxo, Wellcome, and Guinness plc. Prior to these assignments, he held a series of increasingly senior positions in Information Technology across a range of industries including Chemicals, Construction, and Electronics as well as time in Management Consultancy with Coopers & Lybrand. He was a Non-Executive Director of IXEurope, a European IT Services company, prior to its acquisition. He is a member of several IT consultative boards including the Board of eSkills, the Skills Sector Council for Business and Information Technology in the UK and is a Fellow of the British Computer Society. Before entering industry, David studied Architecture at the University of Edinburgh.

Cees van Luijk, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Van Luijk serves on our board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Van Luijk served on our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2002. Since 2003 he has been Chairman and co-managing partner of Capital-C Ventures, a Benelux-focused technology venture capital firm. Mr. Van Luijk was formerly the CEO of Getronics between 1999 and 2001 and prior to that a member of the Global Leadership Team of PricewaterhouseCoopers. Mr. Van Luijk serves on the boards of PontMeyer NV, Intersafe Groeneveld, Holland Colours NV, Parkking Holding BV and Lirema BV. Mr. Van Luijk is a Certified Public Accountant in The Netherlands and holds a Master’s Degree in Business Economics from the Erasmus University Rotterdam.

Michel Massart, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Massart serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in January 2012. He is a former managing partner of PricewaterhouseCoopers (PWC) in Belgium, where he held various positions in the field of audit, specializing in Technology and FMCG companies and the Public Sector. From 1988 to 1996, he also assumed HR responsibilities for PWC Belgium. In 1997, he set up the Corporate Finance Department of PWC Belgium specializing in M&A, valuations and corporate restructuring. From 2003 to 2011, he was a director and chairman of the audit committee of Millicom International Cellular S.A., a mobile telephone operator in emerging countries listed on the NASDAQ and Stockholm stock exchanges. He is a former member of the Board of the Belgian Institute of Statutory Auditors. He is currently a professor at Solvay Brussels School of Economics and Management in Brussels, Belgium where he lectures on accounting, risk management and corporate governance.

 

57


Table of Contents

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Mandeville serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in January 2011. From October 2008 to December 2010, Mr. Mandeville served as Chief Financial Officer and board member of MACH S.à.r.l. He served as an Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Global Crossing Holdings Ltd/Global Crossing Ltd., from February 2005 to September 2008. Mr. Mandeville joined Global Crossing in February 2005, where he was responsible for all of its financial operations. He served as Chief Financial Officer of Singapore Technologies Telemedia Pte. Ltd./ST Telemedia from July 2002 to January 2005. Mr. Mandeville was a Senior Consultant with Coopers & Lybrand, Belgium from 1989 to 1992. In 1992, he joined British Telecom and served in various capacities covering all sectors of the telecommunications market (including wireline, wireless and multi-media) in Europe, Asia and the Americas. From 1992 to June 2002, Mr. Mandeville served in various capacities at British Telecom PLC, including President of Asia Pacific from July 2000 to June 2002, Director of International Development Asia Pacific from June 1999 to July 2000 and General Manager, Special Projects from January 1998 to July 1999. He graduated from the University Saint-Ignatius Antwerp with a Masters in Applied Economics in 1982 and a Special degree in Sea Law in 1985.

Board Powers and Function

Our Board is responsible for the overall conduct of our business and has the powers, authorities and duties vested in it by and pursuant to the relevant laws of The Netherlands and our articles of association. In all its dealings, our Board shall be guided by the interests of our Group as a whole, including but not limited to our shareholders. Our Board has the final responsibility for the management, direction and performance of us and our Group. Our Executive Director will be responsible for the day-to-day management of the Company. Our Non-Executive Directors will supervise the Executive Director and our general affairs and provide general advice to the Executive Director.

Our CEO is the general manager of our business, subject to the control of our Board, and is entrusted with all of our Board’s powers, authorities and discretions (including the power to sub-delegate) delegated by the full Board from time to time by a resolution of our Board. Matters expressly delegated to our CEO are validly resolved upon by our CEO and no further resolutions, approvals or other involvement of our Board is required. Our Board may also delegate authorities to its committees. Upon any such delegation our Board supervises the execution of its responsibilities by our CEO and/or our Board committees. It remains ultimately responsible for the fulfilment of its duties by them.

Our articles of association provide that in the event we have a conflict of interest with one or more Directors, we may still be represented by the Board or an Executive Director. In the event of a conflict of interest, however, our general meeting of shareholders has the power to designate one or more other persons to represent us. Directors who have a conflict of interest are not prohibited from participating in Board meetings or the decision making process.

Board Meetings and Decisions

All resolutions of our Board are adopted by an absolute majority of votes cast in a meeting at which at least the majority of the Directors are present or represented. A member of the Board may authorize another member of the Board to represent him/her at the Board meeting and vote on his/her behalf. Each Director is entitled to one vote (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, a member representing one or more absent members of the Board by written power of attorney will be entitled to cast the vote of each such absent member). If there is a tie, the Chairman has the casting vote.

Our Board meets as often as it deems necessary or appropriate or upon the request of any member of our Board. Our Board has adopted rules, which contain additional requirements for our decision-making process, the convening of meetings and, through separate resolution by our Board, details on the assignment of duties and a division of responsibilities between Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors. Our Board has appointed one of the Directors as Chairman and one of more Directors as Vice-Chairman of the Board. Our Board is further assisted by a corporate secretary. The corporate secretary may be a member of our Board or our Senior Management and is appointed by our Board.

 

58


Table of Contents

Composition of Board

The majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE Manual.

Our Board consists of a minimum of one Executive Director and a minimum of three Non-Executive Directors, provided that our Board is comprised of a maximum of 7 (seven) members. The number of Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors is determined by our general meeting of shareholders, provided that the majority of our Board must consist of Non-Executive Directors. Only natural persons can be Non-Executive Directors. The Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors as such are appointed by our general meeting of shareholders, provided that our Board is classified, with respect to the term for which each member of our Board will severally be appointed and serve as member of our Board, into three classes, as nearly equal in number as reasonably possible.

The class I Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2014, the class II Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2012, and the class III Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2013. At each annual general meeting of shareholders, Directors appointed to succeed those Directors whose terms expire are appointed to serve for a term of office to expire at the third succeeding annual general meeting of shareholders after their appointment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Directors appointed to each class continue to serve their term in office until their successors are duly appointed and qualified or until their earlier resignation, death or removal. If a vacancy occurs, any Director so appointed to fill that vacancy serves its term in office for the remainder of the full term of the class of Directors in which the vacancy occurred.

Our Board has nomination rights with respect to the appointment of a Director. Any nomination by our Board may consist of one or more candidates per vacant seat. If a nomination consists of a list of two or more candidates, it is binding and the appointment to the vacant seat concerned will be from the persons placed on the binding list of candidates and will be effected through election. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our general meeting of shareholders may, at all times, by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of our issued and outstanding capital, resolve that such list of candidates will not be binding. See Item 7 “Major Shareholder and Related Party Transactions—Related Party Transactions—Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital” for nomination rights granted to Baker Capital.

Directors may be suspended or removed at any time by our general meeting of shareholders. A resolution to suspend or remove a Director must be adopted by at least a two-thirds majority of the votes cast, provided such majority represents more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital. Currently, Dutch law does not allow Directors to be suspended by our Board; however, Dutch law is expected to be amended to facilitate the suspension of executive directors by a board of directors and following such amendment a Director may also be suspended by our Board for no longer than three months in the aggregate. If, at the end of that period, no decision has been taken on termination of the suspension, the suspension shall end.

Directors’ Insurance and Indemnification

In order to attract and retain qualified and talented persons to serve as members of our Board or our Senior Management, we currently do and expect to continue to provide such persons with protection through a directors’ and officers’ insurance policy. Under this policy, any of our past, present or future Directors and members of our Senior Management will be insured against any claim made against any one of them for any wrongful act in their respective capacities.

Under our articles of association, we are required to indemnify each current and former member of our Board who was or is involved, in that capacity, as a party to any actions or proceedings, against all conceivable financial loss or harm suffered in connection with those actions or proceedings, unless it is ultimately determined by a court having jurisdiction that the damage was caused by intent ( opzet ), willful recklessness ( bewuste roekeloosheid ) or serious culpability ( ernstige verwijtbaarheid ) on the part of such member.

Insofar as indemnification of liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to members of our Board, officers or persons controlling us pursuant to the foregoing provisions, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

 

59


Table of Contents

Board Committees

Our Board has established an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating committee. The audit committee is in compliance with the NYSE listed company board committee independence requirements. The compensation committee and the nominating committee do not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual. Rule 303A permits foreign private issuers like us to follow home country practice with regard to, amongst others, the independence requirement for the compensation committee and for the nominating committee. Our Board may also establish such other committees as it deems appropriate, in accordance with applicable law and regulations and our articles of association and any applicable Board rules.

Many of the corporate governance rules in the NYSE Manual do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE Manual, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Audit Committee

Our audit committee consists of three independent Directors, Cees van Luijk, Michel Massart and Jean Mandeville, with Cees van Luijk serving as the chairperson of the audit committee. The audit committee is independent as defined under and required by Rule 10A-3 under the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (“Rule 10A-3”) and the NYSE. Our board of directors has determined that Cees van Luijk qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert,” as that term is defined in Item 16A of Form 20-F. The audit committee has the responsibility, subject to Board and shareholder approval, for the appointment, compensation, retention and oversight of the work of our independent registered public accounting firm, KPMG Accountants N.V. In addition, approval of the audit committee is required prior to our entering into any related-party transaction. It is also responsible for “whistle-blowing” procedures, certain other compliance matters and the evaluation of the Company’s policies with respect to risk assessment and risk management.

Compensation Committee

Our compensation committee consists of two independent Directors, Cees van Luijk and David Lister, and one non-independent Director, John C. Baker, who also serves as the chairperson of the compensation committee. Among other things, the compensation committee reviews, and makes recommendations to the Board regarding, the compensation and benefits of our CEO and our Board. The compensation committee also administers the issuance of stock options and other awards under our equity incentive plan and evaluates and reviews policies relating to the compensation and benefits of our employees and consultants.

Under Section 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, which governs compensation committees, the Company’s Compensation Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Nominating Committee

Our nominating committee consists of two independent Directors, Cees van Luijk and Jean Mandeville, and one non-independent Director, John C. Baker, who serves as the chairman of the nominating committee. The nominating committee is responsible for, among other things, developing and recommending to our Board our corporate governance guidelines, identifying individuals qualified to become Directors, overseeing the evaluation of the performance of the Board, selecting the Director nominees for the next annual meeting of shareholders, and selecting director candidates to fill any vacancies on the Board.

 

60


Table of Contents

Under Section 303A.04 of the NYSE Manual, which governs nominating/corporate governance committees, the Company’s Nominating Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Compensation

The aggregate annual compensation of our Senior Management and Non-Executive Directors for the year ended December 31, 2011 was approximately €5.1 million. For amounts set aside for post-employment benefits, see Note 23 of our 2011 consolidated financial statements, included elsewhere herein.

The aggregate compensation of our Non-Executive, Executive Directors, and other Senior Management members for the year ended December 31, 2011 is set forth below.

 

     Salaries      Bonus      Share-
based
payment
charges
     Termination
/ post-
employment
benefits
     Total  
     (€’000)  

D.C. Ruberg

     540         747         832         —           2,119   

J.C. Baker

     35         —           —           —           35   

R.M. Manning

     35         —           —           —           35   

C.G. van Luijk

     45         —           —           —           45   

D. Lister (appointed June 2011)

     18         —           7         —           25   

M. Massart (appointed January 2012)

     —           —           —           —           —     

J.F.H.P. Mandeville

     35         —           14         —           49   

P. E.D. Ekelund (resigned as per June 2011)

     18         —           —           —           18   

P. Schröder (resigned as per January 2012)

     35         —           —           —           35   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Subtotal

     761         747         853         —           2,361   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Senior Management (excluding D.C. Ruberg)

     1,386         733         431         159         2,709   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     2,147         1,480         1,284         159         5,070   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

None of the non-executive directors is entitled to any contractually agreed benefit upon termination. Upon termination, the Executive Director is entitled to a contractually agreed benefit compensation equal to 12 months base salary.

Employee Share Ownership Plans

Our InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan (the “2011 Plan”) provides for the grant of options to employees. The purpose of the Plan is to attract, retain and motivate employees responsible for the success and growth of our Company by providing them with appropriate incentives and rewards and enabling them to participate in the growth of our Company.

On January 26, 2011, our general meeting of shareholders authorized our Board to establish this new option plan following the offering, to be called the InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option Plan and Incentive Master Award Plan (the “2011 Plan”), under and in accordance with which our Board may grant options for ordinary shares to certain eligible persons following completion of the offering. The 2008 Plan was discontinued following our initial public offering, but outstanding options will remain governed by the terms of the 2008 Plan until such options have been exercised in full.

 

61


Table of Contents

Corporate Governance

The Dutch Corporate Governance Code, as revised, became effective on January 1, 2009, and applies to all Dutch companies listed on a government-recognized stock exchange, whether in the Netherlands or elsewhere. The Dutch Corporate Governance Code is based on a “comply or explain” principle, under which all companies filing annual reports in the Netherlands must disclose whether or not they are in compliance with the various rules of the Dutch Corporate Governance Code and explain the reasons for any instance of noncompliance.

With exception to Sections 303A.04 and 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees and compensation committees, respectively, we intend to comply with the NYSE Manual. We also intend to comply with the Dutch Corporate Governance Code, but where the NYSE Manual conflicts with the Dutch Corporate Governance Code we intend to comply with the NYSE Manual. For further information with respect to the composition of our Board committees, see the discussed above under “—Board Committees.”

Stock Options

In 2011, certain of our senior managers and directors were granted options under the “2011 Plan” as set forth in the table below.

The ordinary shares beneficially owned by our senior managers and directors are disclosed in Item 7 “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions.”

 

Name

   Options
granted
     Option
Exercise
Price(s)
     Option
Expiration Date
 

D. Ruberg

     600,000       $ 14.74         June 29, 2019   

D. Lister

     15,000       $ 14.74         June 29, 2016   

J.F.H.P. Mandeville

     15,000       $ 13.00         June 29, 2016   

Employees

For a discussion of the number of employees, see Item 4 “Information on the Company—Employees.”

 

62


Table of Contents

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Major Shareholders

The following table sets forth information with respect to Directors, Senior Management and major shareholders, meaning shareholders that are beneficial owners or 5% or more of our ordinary shares as of April 1, 2012.

Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with rules of the SEC and generally includes any shares over which a person exercises sole or shared voting and/or investment power. Ordinary shares subject to options and warrants currently exercisable or exercisable within 60 days are deemed outstanding and have therefore been included in the number of shares beneficially owned and the calculation of the percentage ownership of the person holding the options but are not deemed outstanding for computing the percentage ownership of any other person. Except as otherwise indicated, we believe the beneficial owners of the ordinary shares listed below, based on information furnished by them, have sole voting and investment power with respect to the number of shares listed opposite their names. Except as otherwise set forth below, the address of each beneficial owner is c/o InterXion Holding N.V., Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands.

 

     Shares Beneficially
Owned
 

Name of Beneficial Owner

   Number      Percent
(%)
 

5% Shareholders

     

Baker Capital (1)( 2 )

     20,657,892         30.88   

Lamont Finance N.V. (1)( 2 )

     20,641,613         30.86   

Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. ( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 )

     16,279         *   

Parc-IT II B.V. ( 4 )

     5,930,517         8.89   

Directors ( 4 ) and Senior Management

     

David Ruberg ( 5 )

     1,300,000         1.94   

Josh Joshi ( 6 )

     256,000         *   

Kevin Dean ( 7 )

     76,250         *   

Peter Cladingbowl ( 8 )

     22,500         *   

Jaap Camman ( 9 )

     0         *   

Jan Pieter Anten ( 10 )

     0         *   

John C. Baker ( 2 )

     60,618         *   

Robert M. Manning ( 2 )

     10,144         *   

David Lister

     0         *   

Cees van Luijk ( 4 )

     0         *   

Michel Massart

     0         *   

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville

     5,000         *   

 

Notes:

 

(1) The address of Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. is 540 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10022.
(2) The board of managers of the general partners of each of BCF II and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. consists of John C. Baker, Robert M. Manning, Jonathan I. Grabel and Henry G. Baker and each manager may be deemed to share voting and dispositive control over the shares held by those entities. Each of Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning serves as one of our directors. Each of Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning disclaims beneficial ownership of shares held by Baker Capital except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein.

 

63


Table of Contents
(3) David Ruberg, Jean Mandeville, John Baker and Rob Manning own our shares or share options. Messrs. Van Luijk, Lister and Massart do not own any of our shares or share options. Messrs. Baker and Manning are associated with (i) Baker Capital, through Lamont Finance N.V., which owned 30.88% of our shares as of April 1, 2012; and (ii) Baker Communications Fund II, L.P., which owned less than one percent of our shares as of April 1, 2012. Mr. van Luijk and Mr. Schröder are indirect minority shareholders of Parc-IT II B.V., which owns 8.89% of our shares as of April 1, 2012, and which is ultimately owned by Parcom Capital B.V.
(4) The majority shareholder of Parc-IT II B.V. is Parc-IT Holding B.V. The remainder of Parc-IT II B.V.’s shares are held by individual investors. Investment control of Parc-IT II B.V. is held by an investment committee, which is made up of Erik Westerink, Rob Ouwerkerk and Cees van Luijk. Messrs. Westerink and Ouwerkerk serve on behalf of Parc-IT Holding B.V. and Mr. van Luijk serves on behalf of individual investors. Mr. van Luijk also serves as one of our directors. Mr. van Luijk disclaims beneficial ownership of shares held by Parc-IT II B.V. except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein. Voting power of Parc-IT II B.V. is held by Parcom Capital Management B.V., which is the managing director of Parc-IT II B.V. Erik Westerink is the managing director of Parcom Capital Management B.V. The address of Parc-IT II B.V. is Schiphol Boulevard 375 D7, 1118 BJ Schiphol Airport, The Netherlands. Parc-IT Holding B.V.is fully owned by Parcom Capital B.V. of which the ultimate beneficial shareholder is ING Groep N.V.
(5) David Ruberg is our President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director. David Ruberg’s shares beneficially owned consist of our ordinary shares and options for our ordinary shares.
(6) Josh Joshi is our Chief Financial Officer. Josh Joshi’s total shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(7) Kevin Dean is our Chief Marketing Officer. Kevin Dean’s total shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(8) Peter Cladingbowl is our Senior Vice President of Engineering and Operations Support. Peter Cladingbowl’s shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(9) Jaap Camman is our Senior Vice President of Legal and Corporate Secretary.
(10) Jan Pieter Anten is our Vice President of Human Resources.

We effected a registered public offering of our ordinary shares and our ordinary shares began trading on the NYSE on January 28, 2011. Accordingly, certain of our principal shareholders acquired their ordinary shares either at or subsequent to this time. Our major shareholders have the same voting rights as our other shareholders, but Baker Capital currently has the right to nominate a majority of the members of our Board, as described below in “Related Party Transactions – Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital.” As of April 1, 2012, we had eleven shareholders of record. Four of the shareholders of record were located in the United States and held in the aggregate 66,449,053 ordinary shares representing approximately 99% of our outstanding ordinary shares. However, the United States shareholders of record include Cede & Co., which, as nominee for The Depository Trust Company, is the record holder of 45,764,949 ordinary shares. Accordingly, we believe that the shares held by Cede & Co. include ordinary shares beneficially owned by both holders in the United States and non-United States beneficial owners. As a result, these numbers may not accurately represent the number of beneficial owners in the United States.

Related Party Transactions

Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital

On February 2, 2011, we entered into a Shareholders Agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our Board. As such, upon consummation of the initial public offering, Baker Capital will be entitled to designate four nominees for the seven-member board. At such time that a majority of our Board is required to be independent in accordance with the listing requirements of the NYSE, Baker Capital will remain entitled to designate for nomination four of the seven members of the Board, provided, that at least two of the Baker Capital nominees shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors as set forth in the corporate governance rules of the NYSE.

 

64


Table of Contents

For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 25% but more than 15% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination three of the seven members of our Board, at least one of whom shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors as set forth in the applicable listing standards. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 15% but more than 10% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination two of the seven members of our Board, none of whom shall be required to be independent. At such time that the ownership of Baker Capital or its affiliates is less than or equal to 10% but more than 5% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination one of the seven members of our Board, who shall not be required to be independent.

Furthermore, for so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right, but not the obligation, to nominate the Chairman of our Board.

In addition, as long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 15% of our outstanding ordinary shares, at least one of Baker Capital’s director nominees shall be appointed to each of our standing committees, provided that, when required by the transition provisions for companies listing in conjunction an initial public offering, such Baker Capital nominees shall meet any independence or other requirements of the applicable listing standards.

In the event of a change in the number of members of our Board, Baker Capital will have the right to designate a proportional amount of the members of the nominees for our Board to most closely approximate the rights described above.

Registration Rights Agreement

We have entered into a registration rights agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital (the “Baker Shareholders”), pursuant to which 30,801,491 ordinary shares are entitled to the registration rights described below. Of these shares 10,143,599 have been distributed by Baker Capital to its limited partners on March 15, 2012.

Demand registration rights.  We are required to effect up to four registrations at the request of one or more of the Baker Shareholders holding ordinary shares representing in the aggregate a majority of ordinary shares held by the Baker Shareholders (the “Majority Baker Shareholders”). We are not required to effect a registration within 90 days after the effective date of a registration statement. We may not effect a registration for our own account (other than a registration effected solely with respect to an employee benefit plan or pursuant to a registration on Form F-4 or S-4) within 90 days after any such registration without the consent of the Majority Baker Shareholders.

In the event that the managing underwriter advises us that the number of ordinary shares requested to be included in such registration exceeds the number that can be sold in such offering without adversely affecting the underwriter’s ability to effect an orderly distribution of such ordinary shares, we will include in the registration statement the number of ordinary shares that, in the opinion of the managing underwriter, can be sold. The allocation of such ordinary shares to be included in such registration statement will be done on a pro rata basis.

Registration on Form F-3.  After we become eligible under applicable securities laws to file a registration statement on Form F-3, we will file a registration statement on Form F-3 at the request of the Majority Baker Shareholders. These shareholders may request such a registration no more than once every six months. There is no limit to the number of such registrations that these shareholders may request. In connection with the foregoing registrations: (1) we are not required to effect a registration pursuant to a request by shareholders holding registrable securities if, within the 12-month period preceding the date of such request, we have already effected one registration on Form F-3, (2) each registration on Form F-3 must be for anticipated proceeds of at least U.S. $500,000, and (3) we may not effect a registration for our own account (other than a registration effected solely with respect to an employee benefit plan) within 90 days after any such registration without the consent of the Majority Baker Shareholders.

 

65


Table of Contents

Piggyback registration rights.  Baker Shareholders also have the right to request the inclusion of their registrable shares in any registration statements filed by us in the future for the purposes of a public offering, subject to specified exceptions. In the event that the managing underwriter advises that the number of our securities included in such a request exceeds the number that can be sold in such offering without adversely affecting such underwriters’ ability to effect an orderly distribution of our securities, the shares will be included in the registration statement in the following order of preference: first, the shares that we wish to include for our own account and second, ordinary shares held by the Baker Shareholders on a pro rata basis.

Termination.  All registration rights granted to holders of registrable shares terminate when all ordinary shares resulting from the conversion of the Preferred Shares have been effectively registered under the Securities Act, or, with respect to any holder, can be sold freely during a three-month period without registration under the Securities Act.

Expenses.  We will be required to pay all expenses relating to up to two demand registration and up to two registrations on Form F-3. We will be required to pay all expenses relating to piggyback registrations.

CEO

On October 31, 2007, Mr. Ruberg resigned as a partner of Baker Capital LLP and on November 5, 2007 he was appointed as our CEO. On June 23, 2008, Mr. Ruberg sold his interest in Baker Capital funds.

 

66


Table of Contents

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Reference is made to Item 18 for a list of all financial statements filed as part of this annual report. For information on legal proceedings, please refer to Item 4 “Information on the Company,” above.

Dividends and Dividend Policy

We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our ordinary shares. We currently intend to retain any future earnings to fund the development and growth of our business and we do not currently anticipate paying dividends on our ordinary shares. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve. The remaining profits will be at the disposal of our general meeting of shareholders for distribution of a dividend or to be added to the reserves or for such other purposes as our general meeting of shareholders decides, upon a proposal of our board of directors. Our board of directors, in determining whether to recommend to our shareholders the payment of dividends, will consider our ability to declare and pay dividends in light of our future operations and earnings, capital expenditure requirements, general financial conditions, legal and contractual restrictions and other factors that it may deem relevant. In addition, our outstanding €260 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 and our credit agreements limit our ability to pay dividends and we may in the future become subject to debt instruments or other agreements that further limit our ability to pay dividends. To the extent we pay dividends in euro, the amount of U.S. dollars realized by shareholders will vary depending on the rate of exchange between U.S. dollars and euro. Shareholders will bear any costs related to the conversion of euro into U.S. dollars.

We are a holding company incorporated in The Netherlands. Under Dutch law, we may only pay dividends out of our profits or our share premium account subject to our ability to service our debts as they fall due in the ordinary course of our business and subject to Dutch law and our articles of association. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.” We rely on dividends paid to us by our wholly-owned subsidiaries in the United Kingdom, France, Germany, Austria, The Netherlands, Ireland, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Belgium and Denmark to fund the payment of dividends, if any, to our shareholders.

 

67


Table of Contents

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

Markets

Our ordinary shares began trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “INXN” on January 28, 2011.

New York Stock Exchange Trading History

The following table shows, for the periods indicated, the high and low sales prices per ordinary share as reported on the New York Stock Exchange.

 

Yearly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2011

     15.88         10.71   

 

Quarterly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2012

     

First quarter

     15.39         15.00   

2011

     

First quarter

     15.88         12.11   

Second quarter

     15.62         12.93   

Third quarter

     15.39         10.71   

Fourth quarter

     14.24         11.12   

 

Monthly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2012

     

January

     14.42         13.42   

February

     15.93         14.10   

March

     18.32         14.94   

April (through April 25, 2012)

     19.17         17.49   

2011

     

October

     14.07         11.12   

November

     14.24         12.40   

December

     13.49         12.05   

On April 25, 2012, the closing price of InterXion’s ordinary shares listed on The New York Stock Exchange was $18.99.

 

68


Table of Contents

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Material contracts

Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated as of February 1, 2010 among InterXion Holding N.V. and the financial institutions party thereto, as Lenders and Barclays Bank PLC, as agent and security trustee.

On February 1, 2010, we entered into the Revolving Facilities Agreement, (the “Revolving Facilities Agreement”) which, among other things, provides for an amount available for drawing under the Revolving Credit Facility of up to €60.0 million (the “Revolving Credit Facility”). We have amended the Revolving Facilities Agreement to reduce the amount available for drawing under the Revolving Credit Facility to €50.0 million.

The Revolving Credit Facility bears interest at a rate per annum equal to EURIBOR (or, for loans denominated in Sterling, U.S. $ or CHF, LIBOR) plus certain mandatory costs and a margin of 4.00% per annum, subject to a margin ratchet based on the ratio of consolidated Total Debt at each quarter end to the pro forma EBITDA for the 12 months ending on that quarter end (as such terms are defined in the Revolving Credit Facility).

Borrowings under the Revolving Credit Facility are secured by various share pledges, inter-company loan receivables owed to the Company or any of the guarantors under the Revolving Credit Facility and the bank accounts of the Company and the guarantors under the Revolving Credit Facility.

The Revolving Credit Facility contains customary affirmative, negative and financial covenants, subject to certain agreed exception as well as customary events of default, including a cross default with respect to an event of default under the Indenture (as defined below) governing the Notes (as defined below).

General

Incorporation and Registered Office

We were incorporated on April 6, 1998 as a private company with limited liability ( besloten venootschap met beperkte aansprakelijkheid ) under the laws of The Netherlands. On January 11, 2000, we were converted from a B.V. to a limited liability company ( naamloze venootschap ) under the laws of The Netherlands.

Our corporate seat is in Amsterdam, The Netherlands. We are registered with the Trade Register of the Chamber of Commerce in Amsterdam under number 33301892. Our executive offices are located at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands. Our telephone number is +31 20 880 7600.

Articles of Association and Dutch Law

Set forth below is a summary of relevant information concerning our share capital and of material provisions of our articles of association (the “Articles”) and applicable Dutch law. This summary does not constitute legal advice regarding those matters and should not be regarded as such.

 

69


Table of Contents

Corporate Purpose

Pursuant to Article 3 of our Articles, our corporate purpose is:

 

  (a) to incorporate, to participate in any way whatsoever in, to manage, to supervise businesses and companies;

 

  (b) to finance businesses and companies;

 

  (c) to borrow, to lend and to raise funds, including through the issue of bonds, debt instruments or other securities or evidence of indebtedness as well as to enter into agreements in connection with aforementioned activities;

 

  (d) to render advice and services to businesses and companies with which the Company forms a group and to third parties;

 

  (e) to grant guarantees, to bind the Company and to pledge its assets for obligations of businesses and companies with which it forms a group and on behalf of third parties; and

 

  (f) to perform any and all activities of an industrial, financial or commercial nature,

and to do all that is connected therewith or may be conducive thereto, all to be interpreted in the broadest sense.

Issue of Ordinary Shares

Our Articles provide that we may issue ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares, pursuant to a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders upon a proposal of our Board. Our Articles provide that our general meeting of shareholders may, upon a proposal of our Board, designate another corporate body, which can only be our Board, as the competent body to issue ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Pursuant to our Articles and Dutch law, the period of designation may not exceed five years, but may be renewed by a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders for periods of up to five years. If not otherwise stated in the resolution approving the designation, such designation is irrevocable. The resolution designating our Board must specify the number of shares which may be issued and, if applicable, any conditions to the issuance.

Our Board is designated as the corporate body competent to issue ordinary shares and to grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. This authority is limited to a maximum equal to our authorized share capital from time to time. Our Board’s authority to issue ordinary shares and grant rights to acquire ordinary shares is for a period of five years expiring on January 28, 2016. Our general meeting of shareholders may extend this period at any time, subject to the limitations set out above.

Ordinary shares may not be issued at less than their nominal value and must be fully paid up upon issue.

No resolution of our general meeting of shareholders or our Board is required for an issue of ordinary shares pursuant to the exercise of a previously granted right to subscribe for ordinary shares.

Pre-emptive Rights

Dutch law and our Articles generally give our shareholders pre-emptive rights to subscribe on a pro rata basis for any issue of new ordinary shares or grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Exceptions to these pre-emptive rights include: (i) the issue of ordinary shares and the grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares to our employees, (ii) the issue of ordinary shares and the grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares in return for non-cash consideration and (iii) the issue of ordinary shares to persons exercising a previously-granted right to subscribe for ordinary shares.

 

70


Table of Contents

A shareholder has the legal right to exercise pre-emption rights for at least two weeks after the date of the announcement of the issue or grant. However, our general meeting of shareholders, or our Board if so designated by our general meeting of shareholders, may restrict or exclude pre-emptive rights. A resolution by our general meeting of shareholders to designate another corporate body, which can only be our Board, as the competent authority to exclude or restrict pre-emptive rights requires a proposal by our Board and approval by a majority of at least two-thirds of the valid votes cast at our general meeting of shareholders if less than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A simple majority is sufficient if more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A resolution by our general meeting of shareholders to designate our Board as the competent authority to exclude or restrict pre-emptive rights must be for a fixed period not exceeding five years and is only possible if our Board is simultaneously designated as the corporate body authorized to issue ordinary shares. If not otherwise stated in the resolution approving designation, such designation is irrevocable. If our general meeting of shareholders has not designated our Board, our general meeting of shareholders itself is the corporate body authorized to restrict or exclude pre-emptive rights upon a proposal by our Board.

Our Board is designated as the corporate body authorized to limit or exclude pre-emptive rights, subject to the limited authority it has to issue ordinary shares and grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares as set out under “—Issue of Ordinary Shares” above, for a period of ending on January 28, 2016.

Reduction of Share Capital

Our general meeting of shareholders may, subject to Dutch law and our Articles and only upon a proposal of our Board, resolve to reduce our issued share capital by cancellation of ordinary shares or reduction of the nominal value of ordinary shares by amendment of our Articles. A resolution of our general meeting of shareholders to reduce the issued share capital must designate the ordinary shares to which the resolution applies and must make provisions for the implementation of such resolution. A resolution to cancel ordinary shares may only be adopted in relation to ordinary shares or depositary receipts for such shares we hold ourselves. A partial repayment or exemption from the obligation to pay up ordinary shares must be made pro rata, unless all of our shareholders agree otherwise. A resolution at our general meeting of shareholders to reduce our issued share capital requires a majority of at least two-thirds of the votes validly cast at a meeting at which less than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A simple majority is sufficient if more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented.

Acquisition of Ordinary Shares

We may acquire our own fully paid up ordinary shares at any time for no consideration, or, subject to certain provisions of Dutch law and our Articles, if (i) our shareholders’ equity minus the payment required to make the acquisition, does not fall below the sum of called-up and paid-up share capital and any statutory reserves we must maintain by Dutch law or our Articles, and (ii) we and our subsidiaries would thereafter not hold ordinary shares or rights of pledge over ordinary shares with an aggregate nominal value exceeding 50% of our issued and outstanding share capital.

Dutch law generally and more specifically, the Dutch Civil Code, imposes minimum capital and other reserve requirements on legal entities as a way of protecting shareholders and creditors and maintaining the capital of a company. Such minimum capital and reserve requirements include, among other things, complying with certain minimum capital requirements when declaring and paying dividends and repurchasing shares in its own capital, maintaining reserves on the granting of legitimate financial assistance loans by a public limited company and maintaining reserves on the re-evaluation of assets.

An acquisition of ordinary shares for a consideration must be authorized by our general meeting of shareholders. Such authorization may be granted for a maximum period of 18 months and must specify the number of ordinary shares that may be acquired, the manner in which ordinary shares may be acquired and the price limits within which ordinary shares may be acquired. Authorization is not required for the acquisition of ordinary shares in order to transfer them to our employees. The actual acquisition may only be effected by a resolution of our Board.

 

71


Table of Contents

Our shareholders authorized our Board to acquire ordinary shares up to a maximum of ten percent of the ordinary shares outstanding, whether through the stock exchange or by other means, at prices between an amount equal to the nominal value of the ordinary shares and an amount equal to 110% of the market prices of the ordinary shares on the New York Stock Exchange (the market price being the average of the closing price on each of the 30 consecutive days of trading preceding the three trading days prior to the date of acquisition) for a period ending on July 26, 2012.

Any ordinary shares held by us in our own capital may not be voted on or counted for quorum purposes.

Exchange Controls and Other Provisions Relating to Non-Dutch Shareholders

There are no Dutch exchange control restrictions on investments in, or payments on, the ordinary shares. There are no special restrictions in our Articles or Dutch law that limit the right of shareholders who are not citizens or residents of The Netherlands to hold or vote the ordinary shares.

Dividends and Distributions

We may only make distributions to our shareholders in so far as our equity exceeds the sum of our paid-in and called-up share capital plus the reserves we are required to maintain by Dutch law or our proposed Articles. Under our Articles, our Board may determine that a portion of the profits of the current financial year shall be added to our reserves. The remaining profits are at the disposal of our general meeting of shareholders.

We may only make distributions of dividends to our shareholders after the adoption of our statutory annual accounts from which it appears that such distributions are legally permitted. However, our Board may resolve to pay interim dividends on account of the profits of the current financial year if the equity requirement set out above is met, as evidenced by an interim statement of assets and liabilities relating to the condition of such assets and liabilities on a date no earlier than the first day of the third month preceding the month in which the resolution to distribute interim dividends is made public. Our general meeting of shareholders may resolve, upon a proposal to that effect by our Board, to pay distributions at the expense of any of our reserves.

Additionally, if we choose to declare dividends, the payment of cash dividends on our shares is restricted under the terms of the agreements governing our indebtedness.

Dividends and other distributions may be made in cash or, but only at all times with the approval of the Board, in ordinary shares. Dividends and other distributions are due and payable as from the date determined by the corporate body resolving on the distribution. Claims to dividends and other declared distributions lapse after five years from the date that such dividends or distributions became payable and any such amounts not collected within this period revert to us and are allocated to our general reserves.

General Meetings of Shareholders and Voting Rights

Our annual general meeting of shareholders must be held within six months after the end of each of our financial years. It must be held in The Netherlands in Amsterdam, Haarlemmermeer (Schiphol Airport) or Hoofddorp. Our financial year coincides with the calendar year. An extraordinary general meeting of shareholders may be convened whenever our Board or CEO deems such necessary. Shareholders representing at least 10% of our issued and outstanding share capital may, pursuant to Dutch law and our Articles, request that a general meeting of shareholders be convened, specifying the items for discussion. If our Board has not convened a general meeting of shareholders within four weeks of such request such that such meeting can be held within six weeks following such request, the shareholders requesting such meeting are authorized to call such meeting themselves with due observance of the relevant provisions of our Articles.

 

72


Table of Contents

The notice convening any general meeting of shareholders must include an agenda indicating the items for discussion, or it must state that the shareholders and any holders of depositary receipts for ordinary shares may review such agenda at our main offices in The Netherlands. We will have the notice published by electronic means of communication which is directly and permanently accessible until the meeting and in such other manner as may be required to comply with any applicable rules of the New York Stock Exchange. The explanatory notes to the agenda must contain all facts and circumstances that are relevant for the proposals on the agenda. Such explanatory notes and the agenda will be placed on our website.

Shareholders holding at least 1% of our issued and outstanding share capital or ordinary shares representing a value of at least €50 million may submit agenda proposals for any general meeting of shareholders. Provided we receive such proposals no later than 60 days before the date of the general meeting of shareholders, and provided that such proposal does not, according to our Board, conflict with our vital interests, we will have the proposals included in the notice.

Each of the ordinary shares confers the right to cast one vote. Each shareholder entitled to participate in a general meeting of shareholders, either in person or through a written proxy, is entitled to attend and address the meeting and, to the extent that the voting rights accrue to him, to exercise his voting rights in accordance with our Articles. The voting rights attached to any ordinary shares, or ordinary shares for which depositary receipts have been issued, are suspended as long as they are held in treasury.

Our Board may allow shareholders to, in person or through a person holding a written proxy, participate in a general meeting of shareholders, including to take the floor and, to the extent applicable, to exercise voting rights, through an electronic means of communication. Our Board selects the means of electronic communication and may subject its use to conditions.

To the extent that our Articles or Dutch law do not require a qualified majority, all resolutions of our general meeting of shareholders shall be adopted by a simple majority of the votes cast.

The following resolutions of our general meeting of shareholders may only be adopted upon a proposal by our Board:

 

  (a) to effect a statutory merger ( juridische fusie ) or demerger ( juridische splitsing );

 

  (b) to issue ordinary shares or to restrict or exclude pre-emption rights on ordinary shares to the extent the authority to issue has not been delegated to our Board;

 

  (c) to designate our Board as the corporate body authorized to issue ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for ordinary shares and to restrict or to exclude the pre-emption rights on ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for ordinary shares;

 

  (d) to reduce our issued share capital;

 

  (e) to make a whole or partial distribution of reserves;

 

  (f) to amend our articles of association or change our corporate form; and

 

  (g) to dissolve us.

Amendment of our Articles of Association

Our general meeting of shareholders may resolve to amend our Articles upon a proposal made by our Board.

Dissolution and Liquidation

Under our Articles, we may be dissolved by a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders upon a proposal of our Board.

In the event of dissolution, our business will be liquidated in accordance with Dutch law and our Articles and the liquidation shall be effected by our Board. During liquidation, the provisions of our Articles will remain in force to the extent possible. Any assets remaining upon completion of the dissolution will be distributed to the holders of ordinary shares in proportion to the aggregate nominal amount of their ordinary shares.

 

73


Table of Contents

Disclosure of Information

Dutch law contains specific rules intended to prevent insider trading, tipping and market manipulation. We are subject to these rules and accordingly, we have adopted a code of securities dealings in relation to our securities.

Squeeze Out

If a shareholder, alone or together with group companies, (the “Controlling Entity”) holds a total of at least 95% of a company’s issued share capital by nominal value for its own account, Dutch law permits the Controlling Entity to acquire the remaining shares in the controlled entity (the “Controlled Entity”) by initiating proceedings against the holders of the remaining shares. The price to be paid for such shares will be determined by the Enterprise Chamber of the Amsterdam Court of Appeal (the “Enterprise Chamber”). A Controlling Entity that holds less than 95% of the shares in the Controlled Entity, but that in practice controls the Controlled Entity’s general meeting of shareholders, could attempt to obtain full ownership of the business of the Controlled Entity through a legal merger of the Controlled Entity with another company controlled by the Controlling Entity, by subscribing to additional shares in the Controlled Entity (for example, in exchange for a contribution of part of its own business), through another form of reorganization aimed at raising its interest to 95% or through other means.

In addition to the general squeeze-out procedure mentioned above, following a public offer a holder of at least 95% of the outstanding shares and voting rights has the right to require the minority shareholders to sell their shares to it. To the extent there are two or more types of shares the request can only be made with regard to the type of shares of which the shareholder holds at least 95% in aggregate representing at least 95% of the voting rights attached to those shares. Any request to require the minority shareholders to sell their shares must be filed with the Enterprise Chamber within three months after the end of the acceptance period of the public offer. Conversely, in such a case, each minority shareholder has the right to require the holder of at least 95% of the outstanding shares and voting rights to purchase its shares. The minority shareholders must file such claim with the Enterprise Chamber within three months after the end of the acceptance period of the public offer.

Reporting of Insider Transactions

Pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act, the Directors and any other person who has managerial responsibilities or who has the authority to make decisions affecting our future developments and business prospects or who has regular access to inside information relating, directly or indirectly, to us (each an “Insider”), must notify The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets (“AFM”) of all transactions conducted for his own account relating to ordinary shares or securities the value of which is determined by the value of ordinary shares. The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets must be notified within five days following the transaction date. Notification may be postponed until the date the value of the transactions amounts to €5,000 or more per calendar year.

In addition, persons designated by the Decree on Market Abuse pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act ( Besluit Marktmisbruik Wft ) (the “Market Abuse Decree”) who are closely associated with an Insider must notify The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets of any transactions conducted for their own account relating to ordinary shares or securities the value of which is determined by the value of the ordinary shares. The Market Abuse Decree designates the following categories of persons: (i) the spouse or any partner considered by national law as equivalent to the spouse, (ii) dependent children, (iii) other relatives who have shared the same household for at least one year prior to the relevant transaction date, and (iv) any legal person, trust or partnership whose managerial responsibilities are discharged by, which is controlled by, which has been incorporated for the benefit of, or whose economic interests are the same as, a person referred to in the previous paragraph or under (i), (ii) or (iii) above.

 

74


Table of Contents

The AFM keeps a public register of all notifications made pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act.

Pursuant to the rules against insider trading we have, among other things, further adopted rules governing the holding of, reporting and carrying out of transactions in our securities by the Directors or our employees. Further, we have drawn up a list of those persons working for us who could have access to inside information on a regular or incidental basis and have informed the persons concerned of the rules against insider trading and market manipulation including the sanctions which can be imposed in the event of a violation of those rules.

Non-compliance with the notification obligations under the market abuse obligations laid down in the Dutch Financial Supervision Act may lead to criminal fines, administrative fines, imprisonment or other sanctions.

Comparison of Dutch Corporate Law and U.S. Corporate Law

The following comparison between Dutch corporation law, which applies to us, and Delaware corporation law, the law under which many corporations in the United States are incorporated, discusses additional matters not otherwise described in this annual report.

Duties of directors

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law the board of directors is collectively responsible for the policy and day-to-day management of the Company. The non-executive directors will be assigned the task of supervising the executive directors and providing them with advice. Each director has a duty to the Company to properly perform the duties assigned to him. Furthermore, each board member has a duty to act in the corporate interest of the Company. Under Dutch law, the corporate interest extends to the interests of all corporate stakeholders, such as shareholders, creditors, employees, customers and suppliers. The duty to act in the corporate interest of the Company also applies in the event of a proposed sale or break-up of the Company, whereby the circumstances generally dictate how such duty is to be applied. Any board resolution regarding a significant change in the identity or character of the Company or its business requires shareholders’ approval.

Delaware

The board of directors of a Delaware corporation bears the ultimate responsibility for managing the business and affairs of a corporation. In discharging this function, directors of a Delaware corporation owe fiduciary duties of care and loyalty to the corporation and to its shareholders. Delaware courts have decided that the directors of a Delaware corporation are required to exercise an informed business judgment in the performance of their duties. An informed business judgment means that the directors have informed themselves of all material information reasonably available to them. Delaware courts have also imposed a heightened standard of conduct upon directors of a Delaware corporation who take any action designed to defeat a threatened change in control of the corporation. In addition, under Delaware law, when the board of directors of a Delaware corporation approves the sale or break-up of a corporation, the board of directors may, in certain circumstances, have a duty to obtain the highest value reasonably available to the shareholders.

 

75


Table of Contents

Director terms

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law a director of a listed company is generally appointed for a maximum term of four years. There is no limit to the number of terms a director may serve.

Delaware

The Delaware General Corporation Law generally provides for a one-year term for directors, but permits directorships to be divided into up to three staggered classes with up to three-year terms, with the terms for each class expiring in different years, if permitted by the certificate of incorporation, an initial bylaw or a bylaw adopted by the shareholders, with exceptions if the board is classified or if the company has cumulative voting.

Director vacancies

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law, new members of the board of directors of a company such as ours are appointed by the general meeting. Our Articles provide that our Board has nomination rights with respect to the appointment of a new member of our Board. If a nomination consists of a list of two or more candidates, it is binding and the appointment to the vacant seat concerned shall be from the persons placed on the binding list of candidates and shall be effected through election. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our general meeting of shareholders may, at all times, by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of our issued and outstanding capital, resolve that such list of candidates shall not be binding.

Delaware

The Delaware General Corporation Law provides that vacancies and newly created directorships may be filled by a majority of the directors then in office (even though less than a quorum) unless (a) otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation or by-laws of the corporation or (b) the certificate of incorporation directs that a particular class of stock is to elect such director, in which case any other directors elected by such class, or a sole remaining director elected by such class, will fill such vacancy.

Shareholder proposals

The Netherlands

Pursuant to our Articles, extraordinary shareholders’ meetings will be held as often as our Board or our CEO deems such necessary. Additionally, shareholders and/or persons with depository receipt holder rights representing in the aggregate at least one-tenth of the issued capital of the Company may request the Board to convene a general meeting, specifically stating the business to be discussed. If our Board has not given proper notice of a general meeting within four weeks following receipt of such request such that the meeting can be held within six weeks after receipt of the request, the applicants shall be authorized to convene a meeting themselves. Pursuant to Dutch law, one or more shareholders representing at least 10% of the issued share capital may request the Dutch Courts to order that a general meeting be held.

The agenda for a meeting of shareholders must contain such items as our Board or the person or persons convening the meeting decide, including the time and place of the shareholders’ meeting and the procedure for participating in the shareholders’ meeting by way of a written power of attorney. The agenda shall also include such other items as one or more shareholders, representing at least such part of the issued share capital as required by the laws of the Netherlands (currently, 1% of the issued share capital or shares representing a value of €50 million) may request by providing a substantiated written request or a proposal for a resolution to our Board at least 60 days before the date of the meeting.

 

76


Table of Contents

Delaware

Delaware law does not specifically grant shareholders the right to bring business before an annual or special meeting.

Shareholder suits

The Netherlands

In the event a third party is liable to a Dutch company, only the company itself can bring a civil action against that party. The individual shareholders do not have the right to bring an action on behalf of the company. Only in the event that the cause for the liability of a third party to the company also constitutes a tortious act directly against a shareholder does that shareholder have an individual right of action against such third party in its own name. The Dutch Civil Code provides for the possibility to initiate such actions collectively. A foundation or an association whose objective is to protect the rights of a group of persons having similar interests can institute a collective action. The collective action itself cannot result in an order for payment of monetary damages but may only result in a declaratory judgment ( verklaring voor recht ). In order to obtain compensation for damages, the foundation or association and the defendant may reach—often on the basis of such declaratory judgment—a settlement. A Dutch court may declare the settlement agreement binding upon all the injured parties with an opt-out choice for an individual injured party. An individual injured party may also itself institute a civil claim for damages.

Delaware

Under the Delaware General Corporation Law, a shareholder may bring a derivative action on behalf of the corporation to enforce the rights of the corporation. An individual also may commence a class action suit on behalf of himself and other similarly situated shareholders where the requirements for maintaining a class action under Delaware law have been met. A person may institute and maintain such a suit only if that person was a shareholder at the time of the transaction which is the subject of the suit. In addition, under Delaware case law, the plaintiff normally must be a shareholder not only at the time of the transaction that is the subject of the suit, but also throughout the duration of the derivative suit. Delaware law also requires that the derivative plaintiff make a demand on the directors of the corporation to assert the corporate claim and such demand has been refused before the suit may be prosecuted by the derivative plaintiff in court, unless such a demand would be futile.

Anti-takeover provisions

The Netherlands

Neither Dutch law nor our Articles specifically prevent business combinations with interested shareholders. Under Dutch law various protective measures are as such possible and admissible, within the boundaries set by Dutch case law and Dutch law.

Delaware

In addition to other aspects of Delaware law governing fiduciary duties of directors during a potential takeover, the Delaware General Corporation Law also contains a business combination statute that protects Delaware companies from hostile takeovers and from actions following the takeover by prohibiting some transactions once an acquirer has gained a significant holding in the corporation.

Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law prohibits “business combinations,” including mergers, sales and leases of assets, issuances of securities and similar transactions by a corporation or a subsidiary with an interested shareholder that beneficially owns 15% or more of a corporation’s voting stock, within three years after the person becomes an interested shareholder, unless:

 

   

the transaction that will cause the person to become an interested shareholder is approved by the board of directors of the target prior to the transactions;

 

77


Table of Contents
   

after the completion of the transaction in which the person becomes an interested shareholder, the interested shareholder holds at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation not including shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers of interested shareholders and shares owned by specified employee benefit plans; or

 

   

after the person becomes an interested shareholder, the business combination is approved by the board of directors of the corporation and holders of at least 66.67% of the outstanding voting stock, excluding shares held by the interested shareholder.

A Delaware corporation may elect not to be governed by Section 203 by a provision contained in the original certificate of incorporation of the corporation or an amendment to the original certificate of incorporation or to the bylaws of the Company, which amendment must be approved by a majority of the shares entitled to vote and may not be further amended by the board of directors of the corporation. Such an amendment is not effective until twelve months following its adoption.

Removal of directors

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law, the general meeting has the authority to suspend or remove members of the board of directors at any time. Under our Articles, a member of our Board may be suspended or removed by our general meeting of shareholders at any time by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of the issued and outstanding capital. If permitted under the laws of the Netherlands, a member of our Board may also be suspended by our Board itself. Any suspension may not last longer than three months in the aggregate. If, at the end of that period, no decision has been taken on termination of the suspension, the suspension shall end. Currently, Dutch law does not allow directors to be suspended by the board of directors; however, Dutch law is expected to be amended to facilitate the suspension of directors by the board of directors.

Delaware

Under the Delaware General Corporation Law, any director or the entire board of directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares then entitled to vote at an election of directors, except (a) unless the certificate of incorporation provides otherwise, in the case of a corporation whose board is classified, shareholders may effect such removal only for cause, or (b) in the case of a corporation having cumulative voting, if less than the entire board is to be removed, no director may be removed without cause if the votes cast against his removal would be sufficient to elect him if then cumulatively voted at an election of the entire board of directors, or, if there are classes of directors, at an election of the class of directors of which he is a part.

Taxation

Certain U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

This section describes certain material United States federal income tax consequences of owning our ordinary shares. It applies to a US Holder (as defined below) that holds our ordinary shares as capital assets for tax purposes. This section does not apply to a US Holder that is a member of a special class of holders subject to special rules, including:

 

   

a financial institution,

 

   

a dealer in securities,

 

   

a trader in securities that elects to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for its securities holdings,

 

   

a real estate investment trust;

 

78


Table of Contents
   

a regulated investment company;

 

   

U.S. expatriates;

 

   

persons who acquired shares pursuant to the exercise of any employee share option or otherwise as compensation;

 

   

a tax-exempt organization,

 

   

an insurance company,

 

   

a person liable for alternative minimum tax,

 

   

a person that actually or constructively owns 10% or more of our voting stock,

 

   

a person that owns shares through a partnership or other pass-through entity,

 

   

a person that holds shares as part of a straddle or a hedging or conversion transaction, or

 

   

a person whose functional currency is not the US dollar.

This section is based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions, all as currently in effect. These laws are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis.

This section does not describe any tax consequences arising out of the tax laws of any state, local or non-U.S. jurisdiction, any estate or gift tax consequences or the recently enacted Medicare tax on certain “net investment income.” If a partnership, including any entity or arrangement that is treated as a partnership for United States federal income tax purposes, is a beneficial owner of our ordinary shares, the treatment of a partner in the partnership will generally depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Partners in such partnerships should consult with their tax advisors.

For purposes of this discussion, a US Holder is a beneficial owner of our ordinary shares that is:

 

   

a citizen or resident of the United States,

 

   

a US domestic corporation (or other entity taxable as a US domestic corporation for United States federal income tax purposes),

 

   

an estate the income of which is subject to United States federal income tax regardless of its source, or

 

   

a trust, if a United States court can exercise primary supervision over the trust’s administration and one or more United States persons are authorized to control all substantial decisions of the trust.

US Holders should consult their own tax advisor regarding the United States federal, state and local and other tax consequences of owning and disposing of our ordinary shares in their particular circumstances.

Taxation of Dividends

Under the United States federal income tax laws, and subject to the passive foreign investment company, or PFIC, rules discussed below, US Holders will include in gross income the gross amount of any dividend paid by us out of our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for United States federal income tax purposes). The dividend is ordinary income that the US Holder must include in income when the dividend is actually or constructively received. The dividend will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to United States corporations in respect of dividends received from other United States corporations. The amount of a dividend distribution paid in euros includible in the income of a US Holder will be the US dollar value of the euro payment made, determined at the spot euro/US dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includible in the income of the US Holder, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date the dividend payment is includible in income to the date such payment is converted into US dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss. Such gain or loss generally will be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes. Distributions in excess of current and accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for United States federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of the US Holder’s basis in the shares and thereafter as capital gain. We currently do not, and we do not intend to, calculate our earnings and profits under United States federal income tax principles. Therefore, a US Holder should expect that a distribution will generally be reported as a dividend even if that distribution would otherwise be treated as a non-taxable return of capital or as capital gain under the rules described above.

 

79


Table of Contents

With respect to non-corporate taxpayers for taxable years beginning before January 1, 2013, dividends may be taxed at the lower applicable capital gains rate provided that (1) either (a) our ordinary shares are readily tradable on an established securities market in the United States or (b) we are eligible for the benefits of the “Convention between the United States of America and the Kingdom of the Netherlands for the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income,” (2) we are not a PFIC (as discussed below) for either the our taxable year in which the dividend was paid or the preceding taxable year, and (3) certain holding period requirements are met. Common stock is considered for purposes of clause (1) above to be readily tradable on an established securities market if it is listed on the NYSE. US Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the availability of the lower rate for dividends paid with respect to our ordinary shares.

For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, the dividend will generally constitute foreign source income and will generally be “passive category income” but could, in the case of certain US Holders, constitute “general category income.” If the dividends are taxed as qualified dividend income (as discussed above), the amount of the dividend taken into account for purposes of calculating the foreign tax credit limitation will in general be limited to the gross amount of the dividend, multiplied by the reduced tax rate applicable to qualified dividend income and divided by the highest tax rate normally applicable to dividends.

If Dutch withholding taxes apply to any dividends paid to you with respect to our ordinary shares, the amount of the dividend would include withheld Dutch taxes and, subject to certain conditions and limitations, such Dutch withholding taxes may be eligible for credit against your U.S. federal income tax liability. The rules relating to the determination of the foreign tax credit are complex, and you should consult your tax advisors regarding the availability of a foreign tax credit in your particular circumstances, including the effects of any applicable income tax treaties.

Taxation of Capital Gains

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, upon the sale or other disposition of our ordinary shares, a US Holder will recognize capital gain or loss for United States federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the US Holder’s amount realized and the US Holder’s tax basis in such shares. If a US Holder receives consideration for shares paid in a currency other than US dollars, the US Holder’s amount realized will be the US dollar value of the payment received. In general, the US dollar value of such a payment will be determined on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, a US Holder may recognize US source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the US dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, if our ordinary shares are treated as traded on an established securities market and the US Holder is a cash basis taxpayer or an accrual basis taxpayer who has made a special election, the US dollar value of the amount realized in a foreign currency is determined by translating the amount received at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date of the sale, and no exchange gain or loss would be recognized at that time. Capital gain of a non-corporate US Holder is generally taxed at a reduced rate where the property is held more than one year. The gain or loss will generally be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

 

80


Table of Contents

PFIC Rules

We believe that our ordinary shares should not be treated as stock of a PFIC for United States federal income tax purposes for the taxable year that ended on December 31, 2011. However, the application of the PFIC rules is subject to uncertainty in several respects, and we cannot assure you that the United States Internal Revenue Service will not take a contrary position. In addition, PFIC status is a factual determination which cannot be made until the close of the taxable year. Accordingly, there is no guarantee that we will not be a PFIC for any future taxable year. Furthermore, because the total value of our assets for purposes of the asset test generally will be calculated using the market price of our ordinary shares, our PFIC status will depend in large part on the market price of our ordinary shares. Accordingly, fluctuations in the market price of our ordinary shares could render us a PFIC for any year. A non-U.S. corporation is considered a PFIC for any taxable year if either:

 

   

at least 75% of its gross income is passive income, or

 

   

at least 50% of the value of its assets (based on an average of the quarterly values of the assets during a taxable year) is attributable to assets that produce or are held for the production of passive income (the “asset test”).

In the PFIC determination, we will be treated as owning its proportionate share of the assets and earning its proportionate share of the income of any other corporation in which it owns, directly or indirectly, 25% or more (by value) of the stock.

If we were to be treated as a PFIC for any year during the US Holder’s holding period, unless a US Holder elects to be taxed annually on a mark-to-market basis with respect to the shares (which election may be made only if our ordinary shares are “marketable stock” within the meaning of Section 1296 of the Code), a US Holder will be subject to special tax rules with respect to any “excess distribution” received and any gain realized from a sale or other disposition (including a pledge) of that holder’s shares. Distributions a US Holder receives in a taxable year that are greater than 125% of the average annual distributions received during the shorter of the three preceding taxable years or the holder’s holding period for the shares will be treated as excess distributions. Under these special tax rules:

 

   

the excess distribution or gain will be allocated ratably over the US Holder’s holding period for the shares;

 

   

the amount allocated to the current taxable year, and any taxable year prior to the first taxable year in which we are treated as a PFIC, will be treated as ordinary income; and

the amount allocated to each other year will be subject to tax at the highest tax rate in effect for that year and the interest charge generally applicable to underpayments of tax will be imposed on the resulting tax attributable to each such year.

The tax liability for amounts allocated to years prior to the year of disposition or “excess distribution” cannot be offset by any net operating losses for such years, and gains (but not losses) realized on the sale of the shares cannot be treated as capital, even if the shares are held as capital assets. If we were to be treated as a PFIC for any year during which a US Holder holds the shares, we generally would continue to be treated as a PFIC with respect to that US Holder for all succeeding years during which it owns our ordinary shares. If we were to cease to be treated as a PFIC, however, a US Holder may avoid some of the adverse effects of the PFIC regime by making a deemed sale election with respect to our ordinary shares.

If a US Holder holds shares in any year in which we are a PFIC, that holder will be required to file an annual information report with the Internal Revenue Service.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

Dividend payments with respect to our shares and proceeds from the sale, exchange or redemption of our ordinary shares may be subject to information reporting to the United States Internal Revenue Service and possible United States backup withholding. Backup withholding will not apply, however, to a US Holder that furnishes a correct taxpayer identification number and makes any other required certification or that is otherwise exempt from backup withholding. US Holders that are required to establish their exempt status generally must provide such certification on United States Internal Revenue Service Form W-9. US Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the application of the U.S. information reporting and backup withholding rules.

 

81


Table of Contents

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts withheld as backup withholding may be credited against your United States federal income tax liability, and you may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules by filing the appropriate claim for refund with the United States Internal Revenue Service and furnishing any required information in a timely manner.

Information with respect to Foreign Financial Assets

U.S. individuals that own “specified foreign financial assets” with an aggregate value in excess of US$50,000 are generally required to file an information report with respect to such assets with their tax returns. “Specified foreign financial assets” include any financial accounts maintained by foreign financial institutions, as well as any of the following, but only if they are not held in accounts maintained by financial institutions: (i) stocks and securities issued by non-U.S. persons, (ii) financial instruments and contracts held for investment that have non-U.S. issuers or counterparties, and (iii) interests in foreign entities. Our shares may be subject to these rules. US Holders that are individuals should consult their tax advisers regarding the application of this requirement to their ownership of the our shares.

Certain Dutch Tax Considerations

Introduction

This section describes the material Dutch tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of our ordinary shares as of the date hereof and is intended as general information only. The following summary does not purport to be a comprehensive description of all Dutch tax considerations that could be relevant for holders of the ordinary shares. This summary is intended as general information only. Each prospective holder should consult a professional tax adviser with respect to the tax consequences of an investment in the ordinary shares. This summary is based on Dutch tax legislation and published case law in force as of the date of this annual report. It does not take into account any developments or amendments thereof after that date, whether or not such developments or amendments have retroactive effect.

For the purpose of this section, “The Netherlands” shall mean the part of the Kingdom of the Netherlands in Europe.

Scope

Regardless of whether or not a holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands, this summary does not address the Dutch tax consequences for such a holder:

 

  (a) having a substantial interest ( aanmerkelijk belang ) in our Company (such a substantial interest is generally present if an equity stake, profit stake of at least 5%, or a right to acquire such a equity/profit stake, is held, in each case by reference to our Company’s total issued share capital, or the issued capital of a certain class of shares);

 

  (b) who is a private individual and may be taxed for the purposes of Dutch income tax ( inkomstenbelasting ) as an entrepreneur ( ondernemer ) having an enterprise ( onderneming ) to which the ordinary shares are attributable, as one who earns income from miscellaneous activities ( resultaat uit overige werkzaamheden ), which include the performance of activities with respect to the ordinary shares that exceed regular, active portfolio management (normaal, actief vermogensbeheer ), or who may otherwise be taxed as one earning taxable income from work and home ( werk en woning ) with respect to benefits derived from the ordinary shares;

 

  (c) which is a corporate entity, and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax ( vennootschapsbelasting ) and Dutch dividend tax ( dividendbelasting ), has, or is deemed to have, a participation ( deelneming ) in our Company (such a participation is generally present in the case of an interest of at least 5% of our Company’s nominal paid-in capital); or

 

82


Table of Contents
  (d) which is a corporate entity and an exempt investment institution ( vrijgestelde beleggingsinstelling ) or investment institution ( beleggingsinstelling ) for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax, a pension fund, or otherwise not a taxpayer or exempt for tax purposes.

Dividend tax

Withholding requirement

We are required to withhold 15% Dutch dividend tax in respect of proceeds from the ordinary shares, which include, but is not limited to:

 

  (a) proceeds in cash or in kind, including deemed and constructive proceeds;

 

  (b) liquidation proceeds, proceeds on redemption of the ordinary shares and, as a rule, the consideration for the repurchase of ordinary shares by our Company in excess of its average paid-in capital ( gestort kapitaal ) as recognized for Dutch dividend tax purposes, unless a particular statutory exemption applies;

 

  (c) the par value of the ordinary shares issued to a holder, or an increase in the par value of the ordinary shares, except when the (increase in the) par value of the ordinary shares is funded out of our paid-in capital as recognized for Dutch dividend tax purposes; and

 

  (d) partial repayments of paid-in capital, if and to the extent there are qualifying profits ( zuivere winst ), unless the general meeting of holders of shares has resolved in advance to make such repayment and provided that the nominal value of the ordinary shares concerned has been reduced by an equal amount by way of an amendment of the articles of association and the capital concerned is recognized as paid-in capital for Dutch dividend tax purposes.

Resident holders

If a holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands, Dutch dividend tax which is withheld with respect to proceeds from the ordinary shares will generally be creditable for Dutch corporate income tax or Dutch income tax purposes if the holder is the beneficial owner ( uiteindelijk gerechtigde ) of the proceeds concerned. A resident corporate holder of ordinary shares may under certain conditions be entitled to an exemption from Dutch dividend withholding tax.

Non-resident holders

If a private individual holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of a country other than The Netherlands, such holder is generally not entitled to claim full or partial relief at source, or a refund in whole or in part, of Dutch dividend tax with respect to proceeds from the ordinary shares. A non-resident corporate holder of ordinary shares may under certain conditions be entitled to an exemption from, reduction or refund of Dutch dividend withholding tax under the provisions of a treaty for the avoidance of double taxation between the Netherlands and its country of residence.

Income tax

Resident holders

A holder who is a private individual and a resident, or treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch income tax and who does not have a substantial interest in our Company nor otherwise is taxed in relation to the ordinary shares as one earning taxable income from work and home, must record the ordinary shares as assets that are held in box 3. Taxable income with regard to the ordinary shares is then determined on the basis of a deemed return on income from savings and investments ( sparen en beleggen ), rather than on the basis of income actually received or gains actually realized. This deemed return is fixed at a rate of 4% of the holder’s yield basis ( rendementsgrondslag ) on January 1 of each year, insofar as the yield basis concerned exceeds a certain threshold. Such yield basis is determined as the fair market value of certain qualifying assets held by the holder of the ordinary shares, less the fair market value of certain qualifying liabilities. The fair market value of the ordinary shares will be included as an asset in the holder’s yield basis. The deemed return of 4% on the holder’s yield basis, being the fair market value of the ordinary shares, is taxed at a rate of 30% (insofar as the yield basis concerned exceeds a certain threshold).

 

83


Table of Contents

Non-resident holders

A holder who is a private individual and neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch income tax, will not be subject to such tax in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares.

Corporate income tax

Resident holders or holders having a Dutch permanent establishment

A holder which is a corporate entity and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax a resident (or treated as being a resident) of The Netherlands, or a non-resident having (or treated as having) a permanent establishment in The Netherlands, is generally taxed in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares at rates of up to 25%.

Non-resident holders

A holder which is a corporate entity and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands, having no permanent establishment in The Netherlands (and is not treated as having such a permanent establishment), will generally not be subject to such tax in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares.

Gift and inheritance tax

Resident holders

Dutch gift tax or inheritance tax ( schenk- of erfbelasting ) will arise in respect of an acquisition (or deemed acquisition) of the ordinary shares by way of a gift by, or on the death of, a holder of ordinary shares who is a resident, or treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch gift and inheritance tax. A holder is so treated as being a resident of The Netherlands, if one having Dutch nationality has been a resident of The Netherlands during the ten years preceding the relevant gift or death. A holder is further so treated as being a resident of The Netherlands, if one has been a resident of The Netherlands at any time during the twelve months preceding the time of the relevant gift.

Non-resident holders

No Dutch gift tax or inheritance tax will arise in respect of an acquisition (or deemed acquisition) of the ordinary shares by way of a gift by, or on the death of, a holder of ordinary shares who is neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch gift and inheritance tax.

Other taxes

No Dutch turnover tax ( omzetbelasting ) will arise in respect of any payment in consideration for the issue of the ordinary shares, with respect to a distribution of proceeds from the ordinary shares or with respect to a transfer of ordinary shares. Furthermore, no Dutch registration tax, capital tax, transfer tax or stamp duty (nor any other similar tax or duty) will be payable in connection with the issue or acquisition of the ordinary shares.

 

84


Table of Contents

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Interest Rate Risk

Under our credit facilities, interest is based on a floating rate index. The interest expense on the remainder of our outstanding indebtedness is based on a fixed rate.

Foreign Exchange Rate Risk

Our reporting currency for purposes of our financial statements is the euro. However, we also incur revenue and operating costs in non-euro denominated currencies, such as British pounds, Swiss francs, Danish kroner and Swedish krona. We recognize foreign currency gains or losses arising from our operations in the period incurred. As a result, currency fluctuations between the euro and the non-euro currencies in which we do business will cause us to incur foreign currency translation gains and losses. We cannot predict the effects of exchange rate fluctuations upon our future operating results because of the number of currencies involved, the variability of currency exposure and the potential volatility of currency exchange rates. We have determined that the impact of a near-term 10% appreciation or depreciation of non-euro denominated currencies relative to the euro would not have a significant effect on our financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

We do not maintain any derivative instruments to mitigate the exposure to translation and transaction risk. Our foreign exchange transaction gains and losses are included in our results of operations and were not material for all periods presented. We do not currently engage in foreign exchange hedging transactions to manage the risk of our foreign currency exposure.

Commodity Price Risk

We are a significant user of electricity and have exposure to increases in electricity prices. In recent years, we have seen significant increases in electricity prices. We use independent consultants to monitor price changes in electricity and negotiate fixed-price term agreements with the power supply companies where possible.

Approximately 60% of our customers by revenue pay for electricity on a metered basis while the remainder of our customers pay for power “plugs.” While we are contractually able to recover power cost increases from our customers, some portion of the increased costs may not be recovered. In addition, some portion of the increased costs may be recovered in a delayed fashion based on commercial reasons at the discretion of local management.

 

85


Table of Contents

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

Not applicable.

 

86


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

Not applicable.

 

87


Table of Contents

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

Not applicable.

 

88


Table of Contents

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Conclusion Regarding the Effectiveness of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

Under the supervision and with the participation of the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Chief Financial Officer (CFO), the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) have been evaluated as of December 31, 2011. Based upon the evaluation, the CEO and CFO, concluded that as of December 31, 2011, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were adequate and effective and designed to ensure that material information relating to the Company is accumulated and communicated to our management, including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) and for the assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting includes maintaining records, that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect our transactions; providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary for preparation of our financial statements; providing reasonable assurance that receipts and expenditures of Company assets are made in accordance with management authorization; and providing reasonable assurance that unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of Company assets that could have material effect on our financial statements would be prevented or detected on a timely basis. The Company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of the consolidated financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting is not intended to provide absolute assurance that a misstatement of our financial statements would be prevented or detected.

In connection with the preparation of the Company’s annual consolidated financial statements, management has undertaken an assessment of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2011, based on criteria established in Internal Control Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (the COSO Framework).

Based on this assessment, management concluded that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of December 31, 2011.

Management’s report is not subject to attestation by the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm given its current status as a non-accelerated filer. Therefore, the annual report and Form 20-F do not include an attestation report from the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm regarding internal control over financial reporting.

Changes in Controls and Procedures

There were no changes that occurred during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

89


Table of Contents

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The Board of Directors has determined that Cees van Luijk is the audit committee financial expert as defined by the SEC and meets the applicable independence requirements of the SEC and the NYSE.

 

90


Table of Contents

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

Our board of directors has adopted a code of ethics on December 20, 2011, which applies to our principal executive officer, principal financial officer, principal accounting officers, controllers and employees. The code is posted on our website at www.interxion.com.

 

91


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

KPMG Accountants N.V. has served as the Company’s principal accountant for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010 and 2011. Set forth below are the fees for audit and other services rendered by KPMG Accountants N.V. or other KPMG network for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2010 and 2011.

 

     Year ended
December 31,
 
     2011      2010  
     (€’000)  

Audit fees

     578         441   

Audit-related fees

     251         1,175   

Tax fees

     6         7   

All other fees

     0         10   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     835         1,633   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Audit fees include fees billed for audit services rendered for the Company’s annual consolidated financial statements filed with regulatory organizations. Audit-related fees in the year 2010 include fees paid to KPMG as compensation for professional services related to our initial public offering in 2011, work for which started in 2010.

Tax fees include fees billed for tax compliance.

All other fees consist of fees for all other services not included in any of the other categories noted above.

All of the above fees were pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

Audit Committee’s Policies and Procedures

In accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission rules regarding auditor independence, the Audit Committee has established Policies and Procedures for Audit and Non-Audit Services Provided by an Independent Auditor. The rules apply to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries engaging any accounting firms for audit services and the auditor who audits the accounts filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the external auditor, for permissible non-audit services.

When engaging the external auditor for permissible non-audit services (audit-related services, tax services, and all other services), pre-approval is obtained prior to the commencement of the services.

 

92


Table of Contents

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

 

93


Table of Contents

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

None.

 

94


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

Not applicable.

 

95


Table of Contents

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Many of the corporate governance rules in the NYSE Manual do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE Manual, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Nominating Committee

Under Section 303A.04 of the NYSE Manual, a domestic listed company must have a nominating/corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors. The Company’s Nominating Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Compensation Committee

Under Section 303A.05 of the NYSE Manual, a domestic listed company must have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors. The Company’s Compensation Committee does not meet the independence standard of the NYSE Manual, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE Manual standard.

Internal Audit Function

Under Section 303A.07 of the NYSE Manual, a domestic listed company must have an internal audit function. The Company does not have a formal internal audit function, but is planning to implement one in 2012.

 

96


Table of Contents

PART III

ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Company has responded to Item 18 in lieu of responding to this item.

 

97


Table of Contents

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Reference is made to pages F-1 through F-51, which are incorporated herein by reference.

 

98


Table of Contents

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

The following instruments and documents are included as Exhibits to this annual report.

 

Exhibit
Number
  Description of Document
      1.1‡   Articles of Association of InterXion Holding N.V., as amended, dated as of January 20, 2012.
      1.2‡   Bylaws of InterXion Holding N.V. dated as of January 23, 2012.
      2.1*   Indenture dated as of February 12, 2010 among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Nederland B.V., InterXion HeadQuarters B.V.; InterXion Carrier Hotel (UK) Ltd and InterXion Deutschland GmbH, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, The Bank of New York Mellon (Luxembourg) S.A. and Barclays Bank PLC.
      2.2*   Intercreditor Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch and others named therein dated February 12, 2010
      2.3*   Additional Intercreditor Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch and others named therein dated November 11, 2010.
      2.4.*
  Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated as of February 1, 2010 among InterXion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, ABN AMRO Bank N.V. (as successor to Fortis Bank (Nederland) N.V.), Merrill Lynch International, Credit Suisse AG, London Branch and Jefferies Finance LLC.
      2.5*   Amendment Letter to the Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated November 3, 2010 between InterXion Holding N.V. and Barclays Bank PLC
      2.6*   Form of Registration Rights Agreement.
      4.1*†
  Lease Agreement between InterXion Österreich GmbH and S-Invest Beteiligungsgesellschaft mbH dated January 1, 2000 as amended by the Supplement to the Floridsdorf Technology Park Lease dated November 13, 2007.
      4.2*†   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Belgium N.V. and First Cross Roads dated June 25, 2001.
      4.3*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion HeadQuarters B.V. and Keops A/S dated May 1, 2000.
      4.4*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and SCI 43 Rue du Landy dated June 29, 2007 as amended by the Amendment to the Lease Agreement dated October 26, 2007.
      4.5*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and SCI 43 Rue du Landy dated April 28, 2006.
      4.6*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Holding B.V. and GiP Gewerbe im Park GmbH dated January 29, 1999 as amended by Supplement No. 15 to the Lease Agreement dated November 30, 2009.
      4.7*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and ICADE dated December 23, 2008.

 

99


Table of Contents
      4.8*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Nederland B.V. and VastNed Industrial B.V. dated November 4, 2005.
      4.9*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Nederland B.V. and VA No. 1 (Point of Logistics) B.V. dated May 14, 2007.
      4.10*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Carrier Hotel S.L. and Naves y Urbanas Andalucia S.A. dated March 20, 2000 as amended by the Annex to the Lease Agreement dated March 15, 2006.
      4.11*†   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited and Eliahou Zeloof, Amira Zeloof, Ofer Zeloof and Oren Zeloof dated February 23, 2000.
      4.12*   Deed of Pledge of Shares among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Operational B.V. and Barclays Bank PLC dated June 15, 2010.
      4.13*†   Lease/Loan Agreement between Alpine Finanz Immobilien AG, InterXion (Schweiz) AG and InterXion Holding N.V. dated March 13, 2009.
      4.14‡   Directors Remuneration Policy of InterXion Holding N.V. dated January 20, 2012.
      4.15§   InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan dated June 2011.
      4.16§   InterXion Holding N.V. 2008 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan dated January 2008.
      4.17*   Shareholders Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Chianna Investment N.V., Lamont Finance N.V. and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P.
      4.18††   Lease Agreement among InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited and Amira Zeloof, Ofer Zeloof and Oren Zeloof dated November 1, 2011.
      4.19††   Lease Agreement among InterXion France Sas and Corpet Louvet Sas dated January 3, 2011.
      4.20††   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion España, S.A.U and Chainco Investments Company, S.L. dated October 10, 2011.
      4.21   Employment Agreement Managing Director InterXion Holding N.V.
      8.1*   Subsidiaries InterXion Holding N.V.
    12.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer
    12.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer
    13.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer
    13.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer

 

Notes:

 

* Previously filed as an exhibit to the InterXion Holding N.V.’s Registration Statement on Form F-1 (File No. 333-171662) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference to such Registration Statement.
Confidential treatment has been received for certain portions which are omitted in the copy of the exhibit filed with the SEC. The omitted information has been filed separately with the SEC pursuant to an application for confidential treatment.
†† The omitted information has been filed separately with the SEC pursuant to an application for confidential treatment.
Previously filed as an exhibit on Form 6-K (File No. 001-35053) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference.
§ Previously filed as an exhibit to the InterXion Holding N.V.’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 119-28329) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference to such Registration Statement.

 

100


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

  INTERXION HOLDING N.V.    
 

/s/ David C. Ruberg

   
  Name:   David C. Ruberg    
  Title:   Chief Executive Officer    
  Date:   April 27, 2012    

 

101


Table of Contents

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Audited financial statements of InterXion Holding N.V. as of and for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009

  

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-2   

Consolidated Income Statement

     F-3   

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

     F-3   

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position

     F-4   

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity

     F-5   

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

     F-7   

Notes to the 2011 Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-8   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To: The Board of Directors and Shareholders of InterXion Holding N.V.

We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial position of InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, and the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in shareholders’ equity and consolidated statements of cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2011. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2011, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

/s/ KPMG ACCOUNTANTS N.V.

Amstelveen, The Netherlands

April 27, 2012

 

F-2


Table of Contents

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

 

            For the year ended December 31  
     Note      2011     2010     2009  
            (€’000)  

Revenue

     5         244,310        208,379        171,668   

Cost of sales

     5,6         (101,766     (91,154     (78,548
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

        142,544        117,225        93,120   

Other income

     5         487        425        746   

Sales and marketing costs

     5,6         (17,680     (15,072     (11,253

General and administrative costs

     5,6,9         (67,258     (55,892     (50,628
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     5         58,093        46,686        31,985   

Finance income

     7         2,290        582        536   

Finance expense

     7         (25,074     (30,026     (6,784
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

        35,309        17,242        25,737   

Income tax (expense) / income

     8         (9,737     (2,560     715   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

        25,572        14,682        26,452   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Earnings per share attributable to shareholders post 5:1 reverse stock split at January 28, 2011:

         

Basic earnings per share: (€)

     14         0.40        0.33        0.60   

Diluted earnings per share: (€)

     14         0.39        0.31        0.57   

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

     For the year ended December 31  
     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     25,572         14,682         26,452   

Foreign currency translation differences

     2,253         4,520         1,347   

Total other comprehensive income

     2,253         4,520         1,347   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax

     200         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

     2,453         4,520         1,347   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

     28,025         19,202         27,799   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-3


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

 

            As at December 31  
     Note      2011     2010     2009  
            (€’000)  

Non-current assets

         

Property, plant and equipment

     9         477,798        342,420        275,960   

Intangible assets

     10         12,542        6,005        3,642   

Deferred tax assets

     8         39,557        39,841        39,585   

Other non-current assets

     11         3,841        3,709        1,220   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        533,738        391,975        320,407   

Current assets

         

Trade and other current assets

     11         67,874        55,672        55,610   

Cash and cash equivalents

     12         142,669        99,115        32,003   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        210,543        154,787        87,613   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

        744,281        546,762        408,020   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Shareholders’ equity

         

Share capital

     13         6,613        4,434        4,434   

Share premium

     13         466,166        321,078        319,388   

Foreign currency translation reserve

     13         7,386        4,933        413   

Accumulated deficit

     13         (149,604     (175,176     (189,858
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        330,561        155,269        134,377   

Non-current liabilities

         

Trade payables and other liabilities

     15         10,294        7,795        8,227   

Deferred tax liability

     8         1,742        660        —     

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     16         10,618        13,260        15,844   

Borrowings

     17         257,267        257,403        128,678   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        279,921        279,118        152,749   

Current liabilities

         

Trade payables and other liabilities

     15         127,639        106,038        91,029   

Tax liabilities

        2,249        868        376   

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     16         3,108        3,073        3,068   

Borrowings

     17         803        2,396        26,421   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        133,799        112,375        120,894   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

        413,720        391,493        273,643   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

        744,281        546,762        408,020   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

     Note      Share
capital
     Share
premium
    Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
     Accumulated
deficit
    Total
equity
 
            (€’000)  

Balance at January 1, 2011

        4,434         321,078        4,933         (175,176     155,269   

Profit for the period

        —           —          —           25,572        25,572   

Total other comprehensive income

        —           —          2,453         —          2,453   

Total comprehensive income

        —           —          2,453         25,572        28,025   

IPO proceeds

        1,625         142,487        —           —          144,112   

Conversion of Pref. shares

        337         (337     —           —          —     

Liquidation price paid to Pref. shareholders

        —           (3,055     —           —          (3,055

Exercise of options

        217         3,257        —           —          3,474   

Share-based payments

     19         —           2,736        —           —          2,736   

Total contribution by and distributions to owners of the Company

        2,179         145,088        —           —          147,267   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2011

        6,613         466,166        7,386         (149,604     330,561   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at January 1, 2010

        4,434         319,388        413         (189,858     134,377   

Profit for the period

        —           —          —           14,682        14,682   

Total other comprehensive income

        —           —          4,520         —          4,520   

Total comprehensive income

        —           —          4,520         14,682        19,202   

Exercise of options

        —           6        —           —          6   

Share-based payments

     19         —           1,684        —           —          1,684   

Total contribution by and distributions to owners of the Company

        —           1,690        —           —          1,690   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2010

        4,434         321,078        4,933         (175,176     155,269   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Balance at January 1, 2009

        4,364         317,806         (934     (216,310     104,926   

Profit for the period

        —           —           —          26,452        26,452   

Total other comprehensive income

        —           —           1,347        —          1,347   

Total comprehensive income

        —           —           1,347        26,452        27,799   

Issue of preference shares

        70         632         —          —          702   

Share-based payments

     19         —           950         —          —          950   

Total contribution by and distributions to owners of the Company

        70         1,582         —          —          1,652   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2009

        4,434         319,388         413        (189,858     134,377   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As no minority shareholders in group equity exist, the group equity is entirely attributable to the parent’s shareholders.

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

 

            For the years ended December 31  
     Note      2011     2010     2009  
            (€’000)  

Profit for the year

        25,572        14,682        26,452   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     9         35,552        31,108        21,960   

IPO transaction costs

     5         1,725        —          —     

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     16         (3,125     (3,157     950   

Share-based payments

     19         2,736        1,684        950   

Abandoned transaction costs

     5         —          —          4,841   

Net finance expense

     7         22,784        29,444        6,248   

Income tax expense

     8         9,737        2,560        (715
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        94,981        76,321        60,686   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Movements in trade and other current assets

        (16,942     511        (11,151

Movements in trade and other liabilities

        12,009        8,476        9,051   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash generated from operations

        90,048        85,308        58,586   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest and fees paid

        (24,472     (9,980     (7,373

Interest received

        2,251        390        583   

Income tax paid

        (3,784     (1,339     (418
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flows from operating activities

        64,043        74,379        51,378   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flow from investing activities

         

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

        (154,559     (98,171     (99,979

Disposal of property, plant and equipment

        945        230        104   

Purchase of intangible assets

        (7,397     (2,223     (1,074
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flows used in investing activities

        (161,011     (100,164     (100,949
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flow from financing activities

         

Proceeds from exercised options

        3,474        6        702   

Proceeds from issuance new shares

        142,952        —          —     

Repayment of ‘Liquidation Price’ to former preferred shareholders

        (3,055     —          —     

Proceeds/(repayment) bank facilities

        —          (159,046     21,667   

Proceeds from Senior Secured Notes and RCF

        (645     254,276        —     

Repayment of other Borrowings

        (2,396     (2,488     (2,605
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flows from financing activities

        140,330        92,748        19,764   

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

        192        149        35   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net movement in cash and cash equivalents

        43,554        67,112        (29,772

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

        99,115        32,003        61,775   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

     12         142,669        99,115        32,003   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

NOTES TO THE 2011 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

1 The Company

Interxion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) is domiciled in The Netherlands. The address of the Company’s registered office is Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands. The consolidated financial statements of the Company for the year ended December 31, 2011 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the “Group”). The Group is a leading pan-European operator of carrier-neutral Internet data centers.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on April 27, 2012. The financial statements are subject to adoption by the General Meeting of Shareholders.

 

2 Basis of preparation

Statement of compliance

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) effective as at December 31, 2011 as issued by the Internal Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) and IFRS as adopted by the European Union, and also comply with the financial reporting requirements included in Part 9 of Book 2 of the Netherlands Civil Code, as far as applicable.

Basis of measurement

The Group presents its consolidated financial statements in thousands of Euros. They are prepared on a going concern basis and under the historical cost convention except for certain financial instruments which have been measured at fair value. The Company’s functional currency is the Euro.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by the Group entities and to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Use of estimates and judgments

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

In particular, information about significant areas of estimation uncertainty and critical judgments in applying accounting policies that have the most significant effect on amounts recognized in the financial statements are discussed below:

Property, plant and equipment depreciation (also see Note 9) — Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on the Company’s best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is therefore subjective.

Costs of site restoration (also see Note 15) — Liabilities in respect of obligations to restore premises to their original condition are estimated at the commencement of the lease and reviewed yearly based on rent period, contracted extension possibilities and possibilities of lease terminations.

Provision for onerous lease contracts (also see Note 16) — A provision is made for the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted rental income to be received over the minimum sublease term, which meets the Group’s revenue recognition criteria in arriving at the amount of future losses.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Deferred taxation (also see Note 8) — Provision is made for deferred taxation at the rates of tax prevailing at the period-end dates unless future rates have been substantively enacted. Deferred tax assets are recognized where it is probable that they will be recovered based on estimates of future taxable profits for each tax jurisdiction. The actual profitability may be different depending upon local financial performance in each tax jurisdiction.

Functional and presentation currency

These consolidated financial statements are presented in euro, which is the Company’s functional currency. All information presented in euro has been rounded to the nearest thousand, except when stated otherwise.

 

3 Significant accounting policies

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and all entities in which a direct or indirect controlling interest exists. Subsidiaries are entities that are directly or indirectly controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities.

Accounting policies used by subsidiaries for group reporting purposes are identical to the accounting policies of the Group.

Loss of control

On the loss of control, the Group derecognises the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, any non-controlling interests and the other components of equity related to the subsidiary. Any surplus or deficit arising on the loss of control is recognised in profit or loss.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation

Intercompany balances and transactions, and any unrealized income and expenses arising from intercompany transactions, are eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements.

Subsidiaries

With the exception of Stichting Administratiekantoor Management Interxion, all of the subsidiary undertakings of the Group as set out below are wholly owned. Stichting Administratiekantoor is part of the consolidation based on the groups controlling influence.

Interxion HeadQuarters B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Nederland B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Trademarks B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Österreich GmbH, Vienna, Austria;

Interxion Belgium N.V., Brussels, Belgium;

Interxion Denmark ApS, Copenhagen, Denmark;

Interxion France SAS, Paris, France;

Interxion Real Estate II SARL, Paris, France;

Interxion Real Estate III SARL, Paris, France;

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Interxion Deutschland GmbH, Frankfurt, Germany;

Interxion Ireland Ltd, Dublin, Ireland;

Interxion Telecom SRL, Milan, Italy;

Interxion España SAU, Madrid, Spain;

Interxion Sverige AB, Stockholm, Sweden;

Interxion (Schweiz) AG, Zurich, Switzerland;

Interxion Carrier Hotel Ltd., London, United Kingdom;

Interxion Real Estate Holding B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Real Estate I B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Real Estate IV B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Operational B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands;

Interxion Datacenter B.V., The Hague, the Netherlands (formerly Centennium Detachering B.V.);

Interxion Consultancy Services B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

Interxion Telecom B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

Interxion Trading B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

Interxion B.V., Amsterdam, the Netherlands (dormant);

Interxion Europe Ltd., London, United Kingdom (dormant);

Interxion Telecom Ltd., London, United Kingdom (dormant);

Stichting Administratiekantoor Management Interxion, Amsterdam, the Netherlands.

Foreign currency

Foreign currency transactions

The individual financial statements of each Group entity are presented in the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (its functional currency). For the purpose of the consolidated financial statements, the results and the financial position of each entity are expressed in Euros, which is the functional currency of the Company and the presentation currency for the consolidated financial statements.

In preparing the financial statements of the individual entities, transactions in foreign currencies other than the entity’s functional currency are recorded at the rates of exchange prevailing at the dates of the transactions. At each balance sheet date, monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are not retranslated. The income and expenses of foreign operations are translated to Euros at average exchange rates.

Foreign operations

For the purpose of presenting consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign operations are expressed in Euros using exchange rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. Income and expense items are translated at average exchange rates for the period. Exchange differences arising, if any, on net investments including receivables from or payables to a foreign operation for which settlement is neither planned nor likely to occur, are recognized directly in the foreign currency translation reserve (FCTR) within equity. When control over a foreign operation is lost, in part or in full, the relevant amount in the FCTR is transferred to profit or loss.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

Borrowing costs

Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use or sale, are added to the cost of those assets, until such time as the assets are substantially ready for their intended use or sale. All other borrowing costs are recognized in profit or loss in the period in which they are incurred.

Financial Instruments

Derivative financial instruments

The Group may enter into derivative financial instruments (interest rate swaps) to manage its exposure to interest risk. Further details of derivative financial instruments are disclosed in Note 18. Derivatives are initially recognized at fair value at the date the derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently re-measured to their fair value at the end of each reporting period. The fair value of interest rate swaps is based on broker quotes. Those quotes are tested for reasonableness by discounting estimated future cash flows based on the terms and maturity of each contract and using market interest rates for a similar instrument at the measurement date.

The resulting gain or loss is recognized in profit or loss immediately.

Non-derivative financial instruments

Non-derivative financial instruments comprise trade and other receivables, cash and cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other payables.

Non-derivative financial instruments are recognized initially at fair value, net of any directly attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, non-derivative financial instruments are measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

The Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset expire, or it transfers the right to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all the risk and rewards of ownership of the financial asset are transferred. Any interest in such transferred financial assets that is created or retained by the Group is recognised as a separate asset or liability.

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only when, the Group has a legal right to offset the amounts and intends either to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Trade receivables

Trade receivables are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.

A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original term of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganization, and default or delinquency in payments are considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired.

The amount of the provision is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the income statement.

When a trade receivable is uncollectable, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited in the income statement.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, deposits held at call with banks and other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less. Cash and cash equivalents, including short-term investments, are valued at face value, which equals its fair value.

Share capital

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of ordinary shares and share options are recognized as a deduction from equity, net of any tax effects.

Preference share capital, no longer applicable since the IPO January 2011, is classified as equity if it is non-redeemable and any dividends are discretionary. Dividends thereon are recognized as distributions within equity upon approval by the Group’s shareholders.

Trade payables

Trade payables are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.

Cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of the asset and comprises purchase cost, together with the incidental costs of installation and commissioning. These costs include external consultancy fees, capitalised borrowing costs, rent and associated costs attributable to bringing the assets to a working condition for their intended used and internal employment costs which are directly and exclusively related to the underlying asset. Where it is probable that the underlying property lease will not be renewed, the cost of self-constructed assets includes the estimated costs of dismantling and removing the items and restoring the site on which they are located.

When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items (major components) of property, plant and equipment.

Gains and losses on disposal of an item of property, plant and equipment are determined by comparing the proceeds from disposal with the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment and are recognized within income.

The cost of replacing part of an item of property, plant and equipment is recognized in the carrying amount of the item if it is probable that the future economic benefits embodied within the part will flow to the Group and its cost can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the replaced part is derecognized. The costs of the day-to-day servicing of property, plant and equipment are recognized in profit or loss as incurred.

Depreciation is calculated from the date an asset becomes available for use and is written off on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of each part of an item of property, plant and equipment. Leased assets are depreciated on the same basis as owned assets over the shorter of the lease term and their useful lives. The principal periods used for this purpose are:

 

Land

   Indefinite

Data center equipment

   10 – 15 years

Office buildings

   10 – 15 years

Office equipment

   3 – 5 years

Depreciation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each reporting date.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Data center equipment consists of buildings, leasehold improvements and equipment or infrastructure for advanced environmental controls such as ventilation and air conditioning, specialized heating, fire detection and suppression equipment and monitoring equipment. Office buildings consist of office buildings, office leasehold improvements and office equipment consists of furniture, computer equipment and software.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets represent computer software, power grid rights and other intangible assets and are recognized at cost less accumulated amortization and accumulated impairment losses. Other intangible assets principally consist of lease premiums (paid in addition to obtain rental contracts).

Amortization is recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the intangible asset. Amortization methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each reporting date.

The estimated useful lives are:

 

Lease premiums

   12 years

Power grid rights

   10 – 15 years

Computer software

   3 – 5 years

Other

   3 – 10 years

Impairment of non-financial assets

The carrying amounts of the Group’s non-financial assets, other than deferred tax assets, are reviewed at each reporting date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, then the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. For intangible assets that have indefinite lives or that are not yet available for use, the recoverable amount is estimated at each reporting date.

The recoverable amount of an asset or cash-generating unit is the greater of either its value in use or its fair value less costs to sell. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. For the purpose of impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows from continuing use that are largely independent of the cash inflows of other assets or groups of assets (the “cash-generating unit”).

An impairment loss is recognized if the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its estimated recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognized in profit or loss. Impairment losses recognized in respect of cash-generating units are to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit (group of units) on a pro rata basis.

Impairment losses recognized in prior periods are assessed at each reporting date for any indications that the loss has decreased or no longer exists. An impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortization, if no impairment loss had been recognized.

Borrowings

Borrowings are recognized initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortized costs; with any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value recognized in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the balance sheet date. The Group derecognises a financial liability when its contractual obligations are discharged, cancelled or expired.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Provisions

A provision is recognized in the statement of financial position when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event; it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be estimated reliably. Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and, where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. The discount rate arising on the provision is amortized in future years through interest.

A provision for site restoration is recognized when costs for restoring leasehold premises to their original condition at the end of the lease need to be made.

A provision for onerous lease contracts is recognized when the expected benefits to be derived by the Group from a contract are lower than the unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations under the contract. The provision is measured at the present value of the lower of either the expected cost of terminating the contract or the expected net cost of continuing with the contract. Before a provision is established, the Group recognizes any impairment loss on the assets associated with that contract.

Leases

Leases, where the Group assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, are classified as finance leases. Upon initial recognition the leased asset is measured at an amount equal to the lower of either its fair value or the present value of the minimum lease payments. Subsequent to initial recognition, the asset is accounted for in accordance with the accounting policy applicable to that asset.

Other leases are operating leases and the leased assets are not recognized on the Group’s statement of financial position. Payments made under operating leases are recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives received are recognized as an integral part of the total lease expense, over the term of the lease.

Minimum finance lease payments are apportioned between the finance charge and the reduction of the outstanding liability. The finance charge is allocated to each period during the lease term so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability.

At inception of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is or contains a lease. This will be the case if the following two criteria are met:

 

   

the fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset, or assets; and

 

   

the arrangement contains the right to use an asset(s).

At inception or on reassessment of the arrangement, the Group separates payments and other consideration required by such an arrangement into those for the lease and those for other elements on the basis of their relative fair values.

Segment reporting

The segments are reported in a manner consistent with internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision maker, identified as the Board of Directors. There are two segments: the first segment being France, Germany, the Netherlands and the United Kingdom and the second segment being Rest of Europe , which comprises Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. Shared expenses such as corporate management, general and administrative expenses, loans and borrowings and related expenses and income tax assets and liabilities are stated in Corporate and other .

Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items presented as Corporate and other principally comprise provisions for onerous lease contracts and related revenue and expenses; loans and borrowings and related expenses; corporate assets and expenses (primarily the Company’s headquarters); and income tax assets and liabilities.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Segment capital expenditure is defined as the net cash outflows during the period to acquire property, plant and equipment, and intangible assets other than goodwill.

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, as well as recurring revenue, are additional indicators of our operating performance and are not required by, or presented in accordance with, IFRS. They are not intended as a replacement or alternative for measures such as cash flows from operating activities and operating profit as defined and required under IFRS. EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. Adjusted EBITDA is defined as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, income (charge) attributable to a defined benefit scheme, exceptional and non-recurring items and include share of profits (losses) of non-group companies.

This information, provided to the chief operating decision maker, is disclosed to permit a more complete analysis of our operating performance. Exceptional items are those significant items that are separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a full understanding of the Group’s financial performance. EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, as calculated here, may not be comparable to similarly titled measures reported by other companies.

Revenue recognition

Revenues are recognized when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the Group and that these benefits, together with their related costs, can be measured reliably. Revenues are measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable.

The Group earns colocation revenue as a result of providing data center services to customers at its data centers. Colocation revenues are recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Customers are usually invoiced quarterly in advance and income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the quarter. Initial set-up fees payable at the beginning of customer contracts are deferred at inception and recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the initial term of the customer contract. Power revenues are recognised based on customers’ usage.

The Group reviews transactions for separately identifiable components and if necessary applies individual recognition treatment, revenues are allocated to separately identifiable components based on their relative fair values.

Other services revenue relates mainly to managed services and connectivity. Revenue from other services is recognized when the services are rendered.

Certain installation services and equipment sales, which by its nature have a non-recurring character, are accounted for as non-recurring revenues.

Deferred revenues relating to invoicing in advance and initial set-up fees are carried on the statement of financial position. Deferred revenues due to be recognized after more than one year are held in non-current liabilities.

Cost of sales

The cost of sales consists mainly of rental costs for the data centers and offices, power costs, maintenance costs relating to the data center equipment, operation and support personnel costs and costs related to installations and other customer requirements. In general, maintenance and repairs are expensed as incurred. In cases where maintenance contracts are in place, the costs are recorded on a straight-line basis over the contractual period.

Sales and marketing costs

The operating expenses related to sales and marketing consist of costs for personnel (including sales commissions), marketing and other costs directly related to the sales process. Costs of advertising and promotion are expensed as incurred.

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Employee benefits

Defined contribution pension plans

A defined contribution pension plan is a post-employment plan under which an entity pays fixed contributions into a separate entity and has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution plans are recognised as an employee benefit expense in the income statement in the periods during which the related services are rendered by employees. Prepaid contributions are recognised as an asset to the extent that a cash refund or a reduction in future payments is available. Contributions to a defined contribution plan that are due more than 12 months after the end of the period in which the employees render the service are discounted to their present value.

Termination benefits

Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the Group is demonstrably committed, without realistic possibility of withdrawal, to a formal detailed plan to either terminate employment before the normal retirement date, or to provide termination benefits as a result of an offer made to encourage voluntary redundancy. Termination benefits for voluntary redundancy are recognised as an expense if the Group has made an offer of voluntary redundancy, it is probable that the offer will be accepted, and the number of acceptances can be estimated reliably. If benefits are payable more than 12 months after the reporting date, then they are discounted to their present value.

Share-based payments

The share option program allows Group employees to acquire shares (and before the IPO share certificates) of the Group. The fair value at the date of grant to employees of share options is recognized as an employee expense, with a corresponding increase in equity, over the period that the employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. The amount recognized as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of share options that vest except where forfeiture is only due to share prices not achieving the threshold for vesting.

Finance income and expense

Finance expense comprises interest payable on borrowings calculated using the effective interest rate method and foreign exchange gains and losses. Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of data center assets, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use, are added to the costs of those assets, until such time as the assets are ready for their intended use.

Interest income is recognized in the income statement as it accrues, using the effective interest method. The interest expense component of finance lease payments is recognized in the income statement using the effective interest rate method.

Foreign currency gains and losses are reported on a net basis, as either finance income or expenses, depending on whether the foreign currency movements are in a net gain or a net loss position.

Income tax

Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax is recognized in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to items recognized directly in equity, in which case it is recognized in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantially enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Deferred tax is recognized using the balance sheet liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not provided for: the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realization or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date that are expected to be applied to temporary differences when they reverse or loss carry forwards when they are utilized.

A deferred tax asset is also recognized for unused tax losses and tax credits. A deferred tax asset is recognized only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be utilized. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realized.

Additional income taxes that arise from the distribution of dividends are recognized at the same time as the liability to pay the related dividend.

In determining the amount of current and deferred tax the Company takes into account the impact of uncertain tax positions and whether additional taxes and interest may be due. The Company believes that its accruals for tax liabilities are adequate for all open tax years based on its assessment of many factors, including interpretations of tax law and prior experience. This assessment relies on estimates and assumptions and may involve a series of judgements about future events. New information may become available that causes the Company to change its judgement regarding the adequacy of existing tax liabilities; such changes to tax liabilities will impact tax expense in the period that such a determination is made.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets, and they relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority on the same taxable entity, or on different tax entities, but they intend to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis of their tax assets and liabilities will be realised simultaneously.

Earnings per share

The Group presents basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS) data for its ordinary shares. Ordinary shares share on an equal basis in profits with preference shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting the profit or loss attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders and the weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares, which comprise the share options granted to employees.

 

F-17


Table of Contents

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted

A number of new standards, amendments to standards, and interpretations are not yet effective for the year ended December 31, 2011 and have not been applied in preparing these consolidated financial statements:

Revision to IAS 12 “Income taxes”

Revision to IAS 32, “Financial Instruments: Presentation of Rights Issues”;

IFRS 9, “Financial Instruments”

IFRS 10” Consolidated Financial Statements”

IFRS 11 “Joint arrangements”

IFRS 12”Disclosures of interests in Other entities”

IFRS 13”Fair value measurement”

Revision to IFRIC 14, IAS 19, “The Limit on a Defined Benefit Assets, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction”

The Group has not opted for earlier adoption. Following an internal review, it is not anticipated that the adoption of these new but not yet effective standards and interpretations will have a material financial impact on the financial statements in the period of initial application and subsequent reporting, except for IFRS 9 “Financial Instruments” which becomes mandatory for the Groups 2013’s consolidated financial statements and could change the classification and measurement of financial assets.

 

4 Financial risk management

Overview

The Group has exposure to the following risks from its use of financial instruments:

Credit risk

Liquidity risk

Market risk

Other price risks

This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above risks, the Group’s goals, policies and processes for measuring and managing risk, and the Group’s management of capital. Further quantitative disclosures are included throughout these consolidated financial statements.

The Board of Directors has overall responsibility for the oversight of the Group’s risk management framework.

The Company continues developing and evaluating the Group’s risk management policies with a view to identifying and analyzing the risks faced by the Group, to setting appropriate risk limits and controls, and to monitoring risks and adherence to limits. Risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. The Group, through its training and management standards and procedures, aims to develop a disciplined and constructive control environment in which all employees understand their roles and obligations.

The Board of Directors oversees how management monitors compliance with the Group’s risk management policies and procedures and reviews the adequacy of the risk management framework in relation to the risks faced by the Group.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer, bank or other counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations. This risk principally arises from the Group’s receivables from customers. The Group’s most significant customer accounts for less than 5% of the revenues for 2011, 2010 and 2009.

Trade and other receivables

The Group’s exposure to credit risk is influenced mainly by the individual characteristics of each customer. The demographics of the Group’s customer base, including the default risk of the industry and the country in which customers operate, has less of an influence on credit risk.

The Group has an established credit policy under which each new customer is analyzed individually for creditworthiness before they commence trading with the Group. If customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. Otherwise, if there is no independent rating, the credit quality of the customer is analyzed taking into account its financial position, past experience and other factors.

The Group’s standard terms require contracted services to be paid in advance of these services being delivered. In the event that a customer fails to pay amounts that are due, the Group has a clearly defined escalation policy that can result in a customer’s access to their equipment being denied or service to the customer being suspended.

In 2011, 93% (2010: 93% and 2009: 94%) of the Group’s revenues were derived from contracts under which customers pay an agreed contracted amount including power on a regular basis (usually monthly or quarterly) or from deferred initial set-up fees paid at the outset of the customer contract.

As a result of the Group’s credit policy and the contracted nature of the revenues, losses have occurred infrequently (see Note 18). The Group establishes an allowance that represents its estimate of potential incurred losses in respect of trade and other receivables. This allowance is entirely composed of a specific loss component relating to individually significant exposures.

Bank counterparties

The Group has certain obligations under the terms of its revolving loan agreement and Senior Secured Notes which limit disposal with surplus cash balances. Term risk is limited to short-term deposits. The Group monitors its cash position, including counterparty and term risk, daily.

Guarantees

Certain of our subsidiaries have granted guarantees to our lending banks in relation to our facilities. The Company grants rent guarantees to landlords of certain of the Group’s property leases (see Note 22).

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to managing liquidity is to ensure, as far as possible, that it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to the Group’s reputation or jeopardizing its future.

The majority of the Group’s revenues and operating costs are contracted, which assists it in monitoring cash flow requirements, which are monitored on a daily and weekly basis. Typically the Group ensures that it has sufficient cash on demand to meet expected normal operational expenses for a period of 60 days, including the servicing of financial obligations; this excludes the potential impact of extreme circumstances that cannot reasonably be predicted, such as natural disasters.

All significant capital expansion projects are subject to formal approval by the Board of Directors, and material expenditure or customer commitments are only made once the management is satisfied that the Group has adequate committed funding to cover the anticipated expenditure (refer to Note 21).

 

F-19


Table of Contents

As at December 31, 2011, the Group listed € 260.0 million 9.5% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. The notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange’s Euro MTF Market. Interest on the Senior Secured Notes is payable at the rate of 9.5%, which falls due on February 12 and August 12 each year.

The Group has secured additional € 50 million multicurrency Revolving Credit Facility that is fully undrawn as at December 31, 2011. As at December 31 2011, on the Revolving Credit Facility the interest payable on EUR amounts drawn would be at the rate of EURIBOR plus 400 basis points and for GBP amounts drawn the interest payable would be LIBOR plus 400 basis points.

On January 28, 2011, the Company went public and started trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. The net proceeds were € 138.6 million, which was used for general corporate purposes including construction of new data centers.

Refer to Borrowing section for more details (Note 17).

Market risk

Currency risk

The Group is exposed to currency risk on sales, purchases and borrowings that are denominated in a currency other than the respective functional currencies of Group entities, primarily the Euro, but also pounds sterling (GBP), Swiss francs (CHF), Danish kroner (DKK) and Swedish kronor (SEK). The currencies in which these transactions are primarily denominated are EUR, GBP, CHF, DKK and SEK.

Historically, the revenues and operating costs of each of the Group’s entities have provided an economic hedge against foreign currency exposure and have not required foreign currency hedging.

It is anticipated that a number of capital expansion projects will be funded in a currency that is not the functional currency of the entity in which the associated expenditure will be incurred. In the event that this occurs and is material to the Group, the Group will seek to implement an appropriate hedging strategy.

The majority of the Group’s borrowings are Euro denominated and the Company believes that the Interest on these borrowings will be serviced from the cash flows generated by the underlying operations of the Group whose functional currency is the Euro. The Group’s investments in subsidiaries are not hedged.

Interest rate risk

Following the issuance of 9.5% Senior Secured Notes in 2010 and the repayment of the old bank facilities, the Group is no longer exposed to significant variable interest rate expense for borrowings. As at December 31, 2011, the interest rate risk is very limited.

Other risks

Price risk

The risk of changes in market circumstances, such as strong unanticipated increases in operational costs, construction costs of new data centers or that customer contracts will churn, will negatively affect the Group’s income. Customers individually have medium-term contracts that require notice prior to termination. The objective of market risk management is to manage and control market risk exposures within acceptable parameters, while optimizing the return.

The Group is a significant user of power and has exposure to increases in power prices. The Group uses independent consultants to monitor price changes in electricity and seeks to negotiate fixed-price term agreements with the power supply companies, not more than for own use, where possible. The risk to the Group is mitigated by the contracted ability to recover power price increases through adjustments in the pricing for power services.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Capital management

The Group has a capital base comprising its equity, including reserves, senior secured notes and committed debt facilities. The Group monitors its solvency ratio, financial leverage, funds from operations and net debt with reference to multiples of the Group’s last twelve months Adjusted EBITDA levels. The Company’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base and access to capital in order to sustain the future development of the business and maintain shareholders, creditors and customers confidence.

The principal use of capital in the development of the business is through capital expansion projects for the deployment of further equipped space in new and existing data centers. Major capital expansion projects are not started unless the Company has access to adequate capital resources at the start of the project to complete the project, and they are evaluated against target internal rates of return before approval. Capital expansion projects are continually monitored both before and after completion.

There were no changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the year.

 

5 Information by segment

Operating segments are to be identified on the basis of internal reports about components of the Group that are regularly reviewed by the chief operating decision maker in order to allocate resources to the segments and to assess their performance. Management monitors the operating results of its business units separately for the purpose of making decisions about performance assessments.

The performance of the operating segments is primarily based on the measures of revenue, EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA. Other information provided, except as noted below, to the Board of Directors is measured in a manner consistent with that in the financial statements.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Information by segment 2011

 

0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000
     FR, DE,
NL and
UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     136,460        91,868        228,328        —          228,328   

Non-recurring revenue

     10,352        5,630        15,982        —          15,982   

Total revenue

     146,812        97,498        244,310        —          244,310   

Cost of sales

     (58,969     (37,685     (96,654     (5,112     (101,766
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     87,843        59,813        147,656        (5,112     142,544   

Other income

     487        0        487        0        487   

Sales and marketing costs

     (4,730     (3,876     (8,606     (9,074     (17,680

Total general and administrative costs

     (30,014     (17,956     (47,970     (19,288     (67,258
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     53,586        37,981        91,567        (33,474     58,093   

Net finance expense

             (22,784
          

 

 

 

Profit before tax

             35,309   
          

 

 

 

Total Assets

     412,160        181,186        593,346        150,935        744,281   

Total Liabilities

     97,779        40,774        138,553        275,167        413,720   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (122,880     (35,366     (158,246     (3,710     (161,956

Depreciation and amortization

     (21,289     (13,154     (34,443     (1,892     (36,335

Impairment reversal

     —          783        783        —          783   

Adjusted EBITDA

     74,774        50,676        125,450        (27,813     97,637   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
Information by segment 2010           
     FR, DE,
NL and
UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     114,689        78,284        192,973        —          192,973   

Non-recurring revenues

     9,161        6,245        15,406        —          15,406   

Total revenue

     123,850        84,529        208,379        —          208,379   

Cost of sales

     (52,861     (33,513     (86,374     (4,780     (91,154
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     70,989        51,016        122,005        (4,780     117,225   

Other income

     425        —          425        —          425   

Sales and marketing costs

     (4,859     (3,357     (8,216     (6,856     (15,072

Total general and administrative costs

     (27,297     (15,854     (43,151     (12,741     (55,892
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     39,258        31,805        71,063        (24,377 )       46,686   

Net finance expense

             (29,444
          

 

 

 

Profit before tax

             17,242   
          

 

 

 

Total Assets

     279,735        150,026        429,761        117,001        546,762   

Total Liabilities

     81,339        35,335        116,674        274,819        391,493   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (59,419     (35,709     (95,128     (5,266     (100,394

Depreciation and amortization

     (18,659     (10,972     (29,631     (1,477     (31,108

Adjusted EBITDA

     58,060        43,010        101,070        (21,867     79,203   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Information by segment 2009

 

0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000
     FR, DE,
NL and
UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     94,088        67,226        161,314        —          161,314   

Non-recurring revenue

     6,542        3,812        10,354        —          10,354   

Total revenue

     100,630        71,038        171,668        —          171,668   

Cost of sales

     (44,615     (29,893     (74,508     (4,040     (78,548
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     56,015        41,145        97,160        (4,040     93,120   

Other income

     471        275        746        —          746   

Sales and marketing costs

     (3,987     (2,282     (6,269     (4,984     (11,253

Total general and administrative costs

     (21,629     (13,169     (34,798     (15,830     (50,628
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     30,870        25,969        56,839        (24,854     31,985   

Net finance expense

             (6,248
          

 

 

 

Profit before tax

             25,737   
          

 

 

 

Total Assets

     235,575        123,460        359,035        48,985        408,020   

Total Liabilities

     102,967        45,493        148,460        125,183        273,643   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (55,253     (42,584     (97,837     (3,216     (101,053

Depreciation and amortization

     (12,785     (8,289     (21,074     (886     (21,960

Adjusted EBITDA

     46,509        33,983        80,492        (17,749     62,743   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:

 

* Capital expenditures, including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, as recorded in the consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively. This definition was amended to include paid intangible assets in comparison to prior year. Comparative figures have been adjusted to reflect this change.

 

F-23


Table of Contents

Reconciliation Adjusted EBITDA

Consolidated

 

0000000 0000000 0000000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Adjusted EBITDA

     97,637        79,203        62,743   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from subleases on unused data center sites

     487        425        471   

Net insurance compensation benefit

     —          —          275   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional income

     487        425        746   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Increase in provision onerous lease contracts (1)

     (18     (150     (3,753

IPO transaction costs

     (1,725     —          —     

Abandoned transaction costs

     —          —          (4,841

Share based payments

     (2,736     (1,684     (950
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional general and administrative costs

     (4,479     (1,834     (9,544
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (2)

     93,645        77,794        53,945   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     (35,552     (31,108     (21,960
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     58,093        46,686        31,985   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

France, Germany, Netherlands and UK

 

0000000 0000000 0000000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Adjusted EBITDA

     74,774        58,060        46,509   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income from subleases on unused data center sites

     487        425        471   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional income

     487        425        471   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Increase in provision onerous lease contracts (1)

     (18     (150     (1,813

Share based payments

     (368     (418     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional general and administrative costs

     (386     (568     (1,813
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (2)

     74,875        57,917        45,167   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     (21,289     (18,659     (12,785
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     53,586        39,258        32,382   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

 

(10) Before deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(11) Operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets.

 

F-24


Table of Contents

Rest of Europe

 

00000000 00000000 00000000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Adjusted EBITDA

     50,676        43,010        33,983   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net insurance compensation benefit

     —          —          275   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional income

     —          —          275   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Increase in provision onerous lease contracts (1)

     —          —          (1,512

Share based payments

     (324     (233     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional general and administrative costs

     (324     (233     (1,512
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (2)

     50,352        42,777        32,746   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     (12,371     (10,972     (8,289
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     37,981        31,805        24,457   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Corporate and other

 

00000000 00000000 00000000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Adjusted EBITDA

     (27,813     (21,867     (17,749
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

IPO transaction costs

     (1,725     —          —     

Increase in provision onerous lease contracts (1)

     —          —          (428

Abandoned transaction costs

     —          —          (4,841

Share based payments

     (2,044     (1,033     (950
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Exceptional general and administrative costs

     (3,769     (1,033     (6,219
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (2)

     (31,582     (22,900     (23,968
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     (1,892     (1,477     (886
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     (33,474     (24,377     (24,854
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

 

(12) Before deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(13) Operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets.

Exceptional income is recorded as “Other income” in the consolidated income statement. In 2011, the IPO transaction costs represent the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering. In 2009, the net insurance compensation benefit received from our insurance company, as a result of fire damage incurred in 2008, represents the difference between the net book value and the replacement value of the equipment damaged. The increase in the provision for onerous lease contracts in 2009 relates to an unused data center in Germany and an office property in the Netherlands (see Note 16).

 

F-25


Table of Contents
6 Employee benefit expenses

The Group employed on average 347 employees (full-time equivalents) during 2011 (2010: 321 and 2009: 269). Costs incurred in respect of these employees were:

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Salaries, commissions and bonuses

     26,540        24,588        20,561   

Social security charges

     4,364        4,037        3,363   

Contributions to defined contribution pension plans

     1,487        1,437        1,104   

Other personnel-related costs

     6,155        6,176        4,776   

Share-based payments

     2,736        1,684        950   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     41,282        37,922        30,754   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The following income statement line items include employee benefit expenses of:

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Costs of sales

     15,147        14,419        13,233   

Sales and marketing costs

     11,352        9,848        5,423   

General and administrative costs

     14,783        13,655        12,098   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     41,282        37,922        30,754   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Group operates a defined contribution scheme for most of its employees. The contributions are made in accordance with the scheme and are expensed in the income statement as incurred.

 

7 Finance income and expense

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Bank and other interest

     2,271        582        536   

Net foreign currency exchange gain

     19        —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance income

     2,290        582        536   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest expense on senior secured notes, banks and other loans

     (23,302     (18,155     (5,794

Interest expense on finance leases

     (57     (92     (102

Interest expense on provision for onerous lease contracts

     (518     (578     (708

Other financial expenses

     (1,197     (11,102     (99

Net foreign currency exchanges loss

     —          (99     (81
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance expense

     (25,074     (30,026     (6,784
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net finance expense

     (22,784     (29,444     (6,248
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Company funds the capital expansion programs within operating entities principally through intra-group loans; exchange differences arising, if any, on net investments including receivables from or payable to a foreign operation with a permanent nature, are recognized directly in the foreign currency translation reserve within equity in accordance with IAS 21.

The “Interest expense on provision for onerous lease contracts” relates to the unwinding of the discount rate used to calculate the “Provision for onerous lease contracts”.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Other financial expenses in 2010 principally consisted of € 10.2 million costs related to the repayment of the Company’s bank borrowings and termination of the hedge contracts of which € 3.5 million was non-cash.

 

8 Income taxes

Income tax benefit/(expense)

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Current taxes

     (5,033     (1,802     (666

Deferred taxes

     (4,704     (758     1,381   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total income tax (expense)/benefit

     (9,737     (2,560     715   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

A reconciliation between income taxes calculated at the Dutch statutory tax rate of 25% in 2011 (25.5% in 2010 and 2009) and the actual tax benefit/expense is as follows:

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year

     25,572        14,682        26,452   

Income tax (expense)/benefit

     (9,737     (2,560     715   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     35,309        17,242        25,737   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax using Company’s domestic tax rate

     (8,827     (4,397     (6,563

Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions

     (1,300     (891     (701

Change in tax rate and legislation

     (325     (1,038     50   

Non-deductible expenses

     (1,494     (645     (523

Recognition of previously unrecognized tax losses

     2,741        3,532        4,982   

Current year results for which no deferred tax asset was recognized

     219        849        476   

Prior year adjustments included in current year tax

     (243     —          —     

Change in previously unrecognized temporary differences

     37        30        2,994   

Other

     (545     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit

     (9,737     (2,560     715   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Recognized deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

The movement in recognized deferred tax assets during the year is as follows:

 

     Property,
plant and
equipment
and
Intangibles
    Provision
onerous
contracts
    Other     Tax loss
carry-
forward
    Total  
     (€’000)  

January 1, 2009

     545        3,922        1,011        38,620        44,098   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2009

     91        1,761        507        (2,040     319   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2009

     636        5,683        1,518        36,580        44,417   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2010

     (340     (435     3,175        1,440        3,840   

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     —          —          —          354        354   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

     296        5,248        4,693        38,374        48,611   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2011

     14,526        (866     (2,635     (15,316     (4,291

Recognized in equity

     —          —          —          3,225        3,225   

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     (74     —          (10     197        113   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

     14,748        4,382        2,048        26,480        47,658   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Offset deferred tax liabilities

     (5,976     —          (1,226     (899     (8,101
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

     8,772        4,382        822        25,581        39,557   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated tax losses in the Netherlands available as at December 31, 2010, which were due to expire by December 31, 2011, have been preserved and renewed resulting in a temporary valuation difference for intangible assets.

In 2011 a total of € 3,225,000 in deferred taxes was recognized directly in equity to account for the deferred tax impact of fiscally deductible IPO costs directly recognized in equity.

The movement in recognized deferred tax liabilities during the year is as follows:

 

     Property,
plant and
equipment
and
Intangibles
    Provision
onerous
contracts
     Other     Tax loss
carry-
forward
     Total  
     (€’000)  

January 1, 2009

     (3,896     —           (1,998     —           (5,894

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2009

     685        —           377        —           1,062   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2009

     (3,211     —           (1,621     —           (4,832

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2010

     (5,416     —           818        —           (4,598
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

     (8,627     —           (803     —           (9,430

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2011

     (163     —           (250     —           (413
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

     (8,790     —           (1,053     —           (9,843
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Offset deferred tax assets

     5,976        —           1,226        899         8,101   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

     (2,814     —           173        899         (1,742
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-28


Table of Contents

The deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented as net amounts per tax jurisdiction as far as the amounts can be offset.

The estimated utilization of carried-forward tax losses in future years is based on management’s forecasts of future profitability by tax jurisdiction.

The following net deferred tax assets have not been recognized:

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011      2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Deductible temporary differences - net

     67         (204     (183

Tax losses

     2,054         5,305        12,532   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     2,121         5,101        12,349   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accumulated tax losses expire as follows:

 

000,000 000,000 000,000
     2011      2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Within one year

     4,204         52,149        5,741   

Between 1 and 5 years

     10,974         15,047        61,218   

After 5 years

     7,140         10,055        19,632   

Unlimited

     77,491         91,282        97,002   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     99,809         168,533        183,593   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The accumulated tax losses expiring within one year include tax losses in Switzerland. The expiration of accumulated tax losses was part of the assessment of the valuation of deferred tax assets.

 

F-29


Table of Contents
9 Property, plant and equipment

 

     Land      Data
center
equipment
    Office
buildings
    Office
equipment
    Assets
under
construction
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Cost:

             

As at January 1, 2011

     1,388         467,228        7,578        14,020        16,346        506,560   

Additions

     19,057         43,229        1,732        1,418        103,245        168,681   

Exchange differences

     —           2,783        103        46        (42     2,890   

Disposals

     —           (6,504     (4     (63     0        (6,571

Transfers

     —           18,376        —          —          (18,376          
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     20,445         525,112        9,409        15,421        101,173        671,560   

Accumulated depreciation:

             

As at January 1, 2011

     —           (149,425     (3,737     (10,978     —          (164,140

Depreciation

     —           (33,340     (547     (1,315     —          (35,202

Impairment reversal

     —           783        —          —          —          783   

Exchange differences

     —           (774     (28     (35     —          (837

Disposals

     —           5,598        0        36        —          5,634   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

                (177,158     (4,312     (12,292               (193,762
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2011

     20,445         347,954        5,097        3,129        101,173        477,798   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

             

As at January 1, 2010

     —           326,345        6,211        12,265        62,165        406,986   

Additions

     1,388         72,740        1,000        1,221        15,889        92,238   

Exchange differences

     —           5,667        116        157        1,936        7,876   

Disposals

     —           (529     (10     (1     —          (540

Transfers

     —           63,005        261        378        (63,644          
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     1,388         467,228        7,578        14,020        16,346        506,560   

Accumulated depreciation:

             

As at January 1, 2010

     —           (117,941     (3,282     (9,803     —          (131,026

Depreciation

     —           (28,916     (384     (1,038     —          (30,338

Exchange differences

     —           (2,878     (71     (137     —          (3,086

Disposals

     —           310        —          —          —          310   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

                (149,425     (3,737     (10,978               (164,140
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2010

     1,388         317,803        3,841        3,042        16,346        342,420   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

             

As at January 1, 2009

     —           226,543        5,197        10,237        75,089        317,066   

Additions

     —           25,414        909        1,653        59,890        87,866   

Exchange differences

     —           1,399        31        99        1,005        2,534   

Disposals

     —           (176     —          —          —          (176

Transfers

     —           73,165        74        276        (73,819     (304   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2009

     —           326,345        6,211        12,265        62,165        406,986   

Accumulated depreciation:

             

As at January 1, 2009

     —           (97,021     (2,914     (8,925     —          (108,860

Depreciation

     —           (20,263     (351     (809     —          (21,423

Exchange differences

     —           (767     (17     (97     —          (881

Disposals

     —           44        —          28        —          72   

Transfer

     —           66        —          —          —          66   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2009

     —           (117,941     (3,282     (9,803               (131,026
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2009

     —           208,404        2,929        2,462        62,165        275,960   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-30


Table of Contents

The Group leases certain data center equipment under a number of finance lease agreements. At December 31, 2011, the carrying amount of leased equipment classified in data centers was € 1,048,000 (2010: € 1,845,000 and 2009: € 2,112,000).

In 2011, the Group capitalized interest expenses for € 2,577,000 (2010: € 1,987,000 and 2009: € 2,041,000).

In 2011 the Group reversed the impairment of data center assets in Sweden, as recognised in 2007, for an amount of € 783,000 resulting from the improved current profitability and future potential of the Swedish company.

In 2011, the Group purchased land in Paris for a value of € 19,057,000, based on which the Group has added land as a category to the Property, plant and equipment disclosure. The 2010 balances have been adjusted for transparency. Land amounting to € 1,388,000 was previously recognised as part of data center equipment.

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment is disclosed as general and administrative cost in the consolidated income statement.

 

F-31


Table of Contents
10 Intangible assets

The components of intangible assets are as follows:

 

     Power
grid
rights
    Software     Other     Total  
           (€’000)              

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2011

     1,711        4,220        1,835        7,766   

Additions

     5,653        2,026        —          7,679   

Exchange differences

     14        —          —          14   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     7,378        6,246        1,835        15,459   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2011

     (198     (980     (583     (1,761

Amortization

     (138     (840     (164     (1,142

Exchange differences

     (14     —          —          (14
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     (350     (1,820     (747     (2,917
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2011

     7,028        4,426        1,088        12,542   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2010

     304        2,494        1,835        4,633   

Additions

     1,407        1,726        0        3,133   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     1,711        4,220        1,835        7,766   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2010

     (66     (454     (471     (991

Amortization

     (132     (526     (112     (770
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2010

     (198     (980     (583     (1,761
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2010

     1,513        3,240        1,252        6,005   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2009

     —          1,380        1,809        3,189   

Additions

     —          1,114        26        1,140   

Transfers

     304        —          —          304   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2009

     304        2,494        1,835        4,633   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2009

     —          (73     (315     (388

Amortization

     —          (381     (156     (537

Transfers

     (66     —          —          (66
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2009

     (66     (454     (471     (991
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2009

     238        2,040        1,364        3,642   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amortisation of intangible assets is disclosed as general and administrative cost in the consolidated income statement.

 

F-32


Table of Contents
11 Trade and other (non-) current assets

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Rental and other supplier deposits

     2,536         1,886         1,220   

Deferred financing costs

     667         1,281         —     

Deferred rent related stamp duties

     638         542         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     3,841         3,709         1,220   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current

        

Trade receivables—net (Note 18)

     43,350         38,370         37,261   

Taxes

     7,474         219         1,420   

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

     17,050         17,083         16,929   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     67,874         55,672         55,610   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The deferred financing costs relate to the costs incurred for the € 50 million Revolving Credit Facility. The costs are amortized over the three-year duration period of the facility agreement.

Prepaid expenses and other current assets principally comprise prepaid insurances, rental and other related operational data center, and construction-related prepayments.

 

12 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents include € 4,813,000 (2010: € 4,235,000 and 2009: € 3,874,000) that is restricted and held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies.

 

13 Shareholders’ equity

Share capital and share premium

 

     Ordinary shares      2002 Series A preference shares  
     2011      2010      2009      2011     2010      2009  
     (In thousands of shares, post-reverse stock split)  

On issue at January 1

     9,546         9,543         8,838         34,808        34,808         34,808   

Issue/conversion of shares

     56,583         3         705         (34,808     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

On issue at December 31

     66,129         9,546         9,543                   34,808         34,808   

On January 28, 2011, the Company issued 16,250 thousand new shares (post reverse stock split) at the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. Upon completion of the offering, the Company did a reverse stock split 5:1, which resulted in nominal value of € 0.10 per ordinary shares. The 34,808 thousand Preferred shares were converted into ordinary shares and the liquidation price of € 1.00 (post reverse stock split) per Preferred A share was either paid out in cash or converted in ordinary shares (3.3 million ordinary shares). In 2011, approximately 2.2 million of options (post reverse stock split) have been exercised.

At December 31, 2011, the authorized share capital comprised 200,000,000 (post reverse stock split as at January 28, 2011) ordinary shares at par value of € 0.10. At December 31, 2010 and 2009, prior to the reversed stock split, the authorized share capital amounted to 575,000,000 ordinary shares and 175,000,000 2002 Series A preference shares. All issued shares are fully paid. Prior to the IPO and the reverse stock split, all the shares had a par value of € 0.02.

 

F-33


Table of Contents

The net proceeds of the Initial Public Offering amounted to € 138.6 million, which is used for general corporate purposes including, without limitation, capital expenditures relating to expansion of existing data center and construction of new data center.

Voting

Upon completion of the initial public offering in January 2011, the Company entered into a shareholders’ agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our board of directors, including the right to nominate the chairman of our board of directors. As a result, these shareholders have, and will continue to have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day-to-day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve other changes to our operation. The interests of Baker Capital and its affiliates could conflict with your interests, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Affiliates of Baker Capital also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments, although such transactions might involve risks to you as a holder of ordinary shares. In addition, Baker Capital or its affiliates may, in the future, own businesses that directly compete with ours or do business with us. The concentration of ownership may further have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change of control of our company, could deprive our shareholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their ordinary shares as part of a sale of our company and might ultimately affect the market price of our ordinary shares.

Prior to the initial public offering in January 2011, the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to vote, together with holders of the Company’s ordinary shares, on all matters submitted to shareholders for vote. Each share equals one vote. In addition to voting privileges, holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to certain prior-consent rights against certain actions proposed by the Board of Directors.

Dividends

Prior to the IPO, dividends that are paid from the profits of the Company and, if permitted under Dutch law, as a result of a sale by the Company of shares or assets of the Company or a subsidiary other than pursuant to an IPO, sale or liquidation event shall be distributed in the following priority: first to holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares in an amount equal to the purchase price of the 2002 Series A preference shares (reduced by any dividend previously received on the 2002 Series A preference shares) and second to the extent any residual amount exits thereafter, pro rata amongst all holders of ordinary shares and 2002 Series A preference shares. Upon the completion of an IPO or a sale, the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to receive the 2002 Series A Share Purchase Price of € 0.20 per share (pre-reverse stock split) less any dividends exclusively paid to the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares in cash or in ordinary shares.

Foreign currency translation reserve

The foreign currency translation reserve comprises of all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations as well as from the translation of intergroup balances with a permanent nature.

 

F-34


Table of Contents
14 Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

The calculation of basic earnings per share at December 31, 2011, was based on the profit of € 25,572,000 attributable to ordinary shareholders and pre-IPO the preference shareholders (2010: € 14,682,000 and 2009: € 26,452,000) and a weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding during the year ended December 31, 2011 of 66,052,000 (2010: 44,352,000 and 2009: 43,999,000). Profit is attributable to ordinary and preference shares (pre-IPO) on an equal basis.

Diluted earnings per share

The calculation of diluted earnings per share at December 31, 2011 was based on the profit of € 25,572,000 attributable to ordinary shareholders and pre-IPO the preference shareholders (2010: € 14,682,000 and 2009: € 26,452,000) and a weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding during the year ended December 31, 2011 of 67,449,000 (2010: 47,707,000 and 2009: 46,792,000) post reverse stock split.

In January 2011, the Company issued new shares at the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. Upon completion of the offering, the Company did a reverse stock split 5:1, which resulted in nominal value of € 0.10 per ordinary shares. The 5:1 reverse stock split effectuated is presented in the basic earnings per share calculation and the diluted earnings per share calculation.

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders (basic)

     25,572         14,682         26,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders

     25,572         14,682         26,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares and preference shares

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (in thousands of shares, post
reverse stock split)
 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares (basic)

     61,506         9,544         9,191   

Weighted average number of preference shares

     2,670         34,808         34,808   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares at December 31

     64,176         44,352         43,999   

Dilution effect of share options on issue

     1,720         3,355         2,793   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares (diluted) at December 31

     65,896         47,707         46,792   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-35


Table of Contents
15 Trade payables and other liabilities

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Deferred revenue

     4,801         6,093         6,815   

Other non-current liabilities

     5,493         1,702         1,412   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     10,294         7,795         8,227   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current

        

Trade payables

     34,090         20,504         25,032   

Tax and social security

     4,180         2,725         3,607   

Customer deposits

     16,942         15,487         12,941   

Deferred revenue

     38,110         33,152         30,437   

Accrued expenses

     34,317         34,170         19,012   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     127,639         106,038         91,029   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Trade payables include € 20,877,000 (2010: € 8,027,000 and 2009 € 15,147,000) accounts payable in respect of purchases of property, plant and equipment.

Accrued expenses are analysed as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Data center related costs

     7,951         9,243         6,200   

Personnel and related costs

     7,973         7,895         7,027   

Professional services

     2,476         1,876         1,315   

Customer implementation and related costs

     2,237         1,586         678   

Financing related costs

     9,650         10,236         87   

Other

     4,030         3,334         3,705   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     34,317         34,170         19,012   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011, the accrued Financing related costs principally relate to interest expenses on the Senior Secured Notes.

 

F-36


Table of Contents
16 Provision for onerous lease contracts

As at December 31, 2011, the provision for onerous lease contracts relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

The provision is calculated based on the discounted future contracted payments net of any sublease revenues.

 

     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

As at 1 January

     16,333        18,912        22,912   

Increase in provision

     —          —          3,282   

Settlement

     —          —          (4,950

Unwinding of discount

     518        578        708   

Utilisation of provision

     (3,125     (3,157     (3,040
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31

     13,726        16,333        18,912   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-current

     10,618        13,260        15,844   

Current

     3,108        3,073        3,068   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     13,726        16,333        18,912   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Discounted estimated future losses are calculated using a discount rate based on the 5-year Euro-area government benchmark bond yield prevailing at the balance sheet date.

 

17 Borrowings

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Senior Secured Notes 9.5%, due 2017

     255,560         254,924         —     

Bank borrowings

     —           —           124,777   

Finance lease liabilities

     102         336         889   

Other loans

     1,605         2,143         3,012   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     257,267         257,403         128,678   

Current

        

Bank borrowings

     —           —           24,168   

Finance lease liabilities

     235         429         347   

Other loans

     568         1,967         1,906   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     803         2,396         26,421   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total borrowings

     258,070         259,799         155,099   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s borrowings are principally denominated in Euros. The face value of the Senior Secured Notes as at December 31, 2011 respectively 2010 is € 260,000,000.

Senior Secured Notes and Bank borrowings

In February 2010, the Company issued, at par, € 200,000,000 of 9.5% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 (the “Original Notes”), which are guaranteed by some of its subsidiaries. The notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange’s Euro MTF Market. A portion of the proceeds were used to repay in full the Company’s bank borrowings outstanding under the € 180,000,000 bank credit facilities and to pay transaction fees and expenses. On February 18, 2010, the Group closed out its interest-rate swap contracts.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

In 2009, the Company also entered into a new € 60 million revolving credit facility with a syndicate of banks. The revolving credit facility was reduced to € 50 million before year-end 2010. As at December 31, 2011, the revolving credit facility was undrawn.

In November 2010, the Company issued, above par at 106.5, € 60 million 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 as additional notes (the “Additional Notes”) under the indenture pursuant to which we issued the Original Notes.

The proceeds of the Senior Secured Notes and the former Bank borrowings were used to finance investments in capital expansion projects in order to increase equipped space within new and existing data centers.

The maturity profile of the gross amounts of Senior Secured Notes and bank borrowings is set out below:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Within one year

     —           —           24,843   

Between 1 and 5 years

     —           —           127,659   

Over 5 years

     260,000         260,000         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     260,000         260,000         152,502   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group has the following undrawn bank borrowing facilities:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Expiring within one year

     —           —           27,613   

Expiring between 1 and 5 years

     50,000         50,000         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     50,000         50,000         27,613   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at the year-end, the Group was in compliance with all covenants associated with its bank and Senior Secured Notes borrowings.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Financial lease liabilities

Financial lease liabilities relate to the acquisition of property, plant and equipment with the following repayment schedule:

 

     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Gross lease liabilities:

      

Within one year

     236        459        526   

Between 1 and 5 years

     132        351        807   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     368        810        1,333   

Future interest payments

     (31     (45     (97
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Present Value of Minimum Lease Payments

     337        765        1,236   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other loans

The Company has a loan facility with the landlord of one of its unused data center sites in Germany to allow the Company to invest in improvements to the building to meet the requirements of sub-lessees. The non-current loan bears interest at 6% per annum and is repayable at the end of the lease term. As at December 31, 2011, the balance of the landlord loan was € 1,605,000 (2010: € 1,605,000 and 2009: € 1,605,000).

During 2009, the Company entered into a loan facility with the landlord of its unused data center site in Switzerland to fund the settlement of the lease of that site. The loan has been fully repaid as at December 31, 2011 (2010: € 1,673,000 and 2009: € 3,205,000).

In 2010, the Company entered into a supplier loan amounting to approximately € 800,000, which bears an interest at 7%. As at December 31, 2011, the balance of the supplier loan was € 568,000.

 

18 Financial instruments

Credit risk

Exposure to credit risk

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Trade receivables

     43,350         38,370         37,261   

Rental and other supplier deposits

     2,536         1,886         1,220   

Cash and cash equivalents

     142,669         99,115         32,003   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     188,555         139,371         70,484   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-39


Table of Contents

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by geographic region was:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

UK, France, Germany and the Netherlands

     31,336         27,162         26,953   

Rest of Europe

     12,014         11,208         10,308   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     43,350         38,370         37,261   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group’s most significant customer accounts for less than 5% of the trade receivables carrying amount as at December 31, 2011, as at December 31, 2010, and as at December 31, 2009.

The Group seeks to minimize the risk that this constraint imposes by holding cash as widely as possible across multiple bank institutions. Term risk is limited to deposits of no more than two weeks. The Group monitors its cash position, including counterparty and term risk, daily.

The aging of trade receivables as at the reporting date was:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     Gross      Allowance      Gross      Allowance      Gross      Allowance  
     (€’000)  

Not past due

     36,533         —           28,129         —           30,031         —     

Past due 0-30 days

     3,549         —           6,546         —           4,708         —     

Past due 31-120 days

     3,009         35         3,884         235         2,437         56   

Past due 120 days—1 year

     609         358         177         150         274         206   

More than 1 year

     267         224         114         95         113         40   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     43,967         617         38,850         480         37,563         302   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:

 

     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Balance as at January 1

     480        302        144   

Impairment loss recognized

     281        192        176   

Write-offs

     (144     (14     (18
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as at December 31

     617        480        302   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Based on historic default rates, the Group believes that no impairment allowance is necessary in respect of trade receivables other than those that have been specifically provided for.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Liquidity risk

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including interest payments and excluding the impact of netting agreements.

December 31, 2011

 

Contractual Contractual Contractual Contractual Contractual
     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash flows
     Less
than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5
years
     More
than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     255,560         395,850         24,700         98,800         272,350   

Finance lease liabilities

     337         368         263         105         —     

Other loans

     2,173         2,623         729         1,894         —     

Trade and other payables (2 )

     89,529         89,529         89,529         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     347,599         488,370         115,221         100,799         272,350   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

 

Contractual Contractual Contractual Contractual Contractual
     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash flows
     Less
than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5
years
     More
than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     254,924         411,110         24,700         98,800         287,610   

Finance lease liabilities

     765         810         459         351         —     

Other loans

     4,110         4,759         2,753         385         1,621   

Trade and other payables (2 )

     74,595         74,595         74,595         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     334,394         491,274         102,507         99,536         289,231   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2009

 

Contractual Contractual Contractual Contractual Contractual
     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash flows
     Less
than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5
years
     More
than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Bank borrowings (1)

     148,945         174,178         35,703         138,465         10   

Finance lease liabilities

     1,236         1,333         499         834         —     

Other loans

     4,918         5,029         2,005         1,419         1,605   

Trade and other payables (2 )

     62,004         62,004         60,592         1,412         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     217,103         242,544         98,799         142,130         1,615   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

 

(14) Cash flows for bank borrowings include the estimated cash flows from the interest rate swaps.
(15) Excludes deferred revenues and rental holidays.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Market Risk

Exposure to currency risk

The following significant exchange rates applied during the year:

 

     Average rate      Report date
mid-spot rate
 
     2011      2010      2009      2011      2010      2009  

Euro

                 

GBP 1

     1.152         1.179         1.122         1.193         1.161         1.117   

CHF 1

     0.812         0.780         0.662         0.822         0.802         0.674   

DKK 1

     0.134         0.134         0.134         0.135         0.134         0.134   

SEK 1

     0.111         0.110         0.094         0.112         0.111         0.098   

Sensitivity analysis

A 10% strengthening of the Euro against the following currencies at December 31 would have increased (decreased) equity and profit or loss by approximately the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remain constant and is performed on the same basis for 2010 and 2009.

 

     Equity     Profit or
loss
 
     (€’000)  

December 31, 2011

    

GBP

     (219     (561

CHF

     (1,321     71   

DKK

     (1,279     (149

SEK

     (416     (384

December 31, 2010

    

GBP

     344        (805

CHF

     (1,356     (88

DKK

     (1,122     (112

SEK

     (27     (26

December 31, 2009

    

GBP

     1,100        (358

CHF

     (1,058     (289

DKK

     (1,007     (134

SEK

     (1     10   

A 10% weakening of the Euro against the above currencies at December 31 would have had the equal but opposite effect on the above currencies to the amounts shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

Interest rate risk

Profile

At the reporting date, the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

 

     Carrying amount  
     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Fixed rate instrument

        

Senior Secured Notes

     255,560         254,924         —     

Finance lease liabilities

     337         765         1,236   

Other loans

     2,173         4,110         4,918   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     258,070         259,799         6,154   

Variable rate instruments

        

Bank borrowings

                —           148,945   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     258,070         259,799         155,099   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In November 2009, the Group entered into an interest rate swap to fix interest rates on variable rates borrowings. The amount hedged via an interest rate swap was € 45.9 million. The hedge is not effective as the hedged financial instrument is extinguished by the Senior Secured Notes issued in 2010. Unrealized hedging results were booked to net finance expenses in the income statement. On February 18, 2010, the Group closed out its interest-rate swap contracts. The below schedule summarizes the open interest swap transactions and their valuation as at December 31.

Fair values of interest rate swaps as at 31 December

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Interest swaps

     —           —           (99
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total fair value

     —           —           (99
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash flow sensitivity analysis for variable rate instruments

A change of 100 basis points in interest rates payable at the reporting date would have increased (decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain constant. The analysis is performed on the same basis for 2010 and 2009.

 

     Profit or loss      Equity  
     100 bp
increase
    100 bp
decrease
     100 bp
increase
    100 bp
decrease
 
     (€’000)  

December 31, 2011

         

Variable rate instruments

     —          —           —          —     

December 31, 2010

         

Variable rate instruments

     —          —           —          —     

December 31, 2009

         

Variable rate instruments

     (1,458     1,458         (1,458     1,458   

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Fair values and hierarchy

Fair values versus carrying amounts

The market price of the Senior Secured Notes as of December 31, 2011 was 108.75. Using this premium the fair value of the Senior Secured Notes would have been approximately € 282.8 million compared to its nominal value of € 260 million. The carrying amounts of other financial assets and liabilities approximate their fair value.

Fair value hierarchy

As at December 31, 2011, there are no liabilities related to financial instruments which are carried at fair value. The company uses three levels of valuation method as defined below:

 

Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities

 

Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e., as prices) or indirectly (i.e., derived from prices)

 

Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The Group had no financial instruments carried at fair value at December 31, 2011 (2010: nil and 2009: (99)):

 

       Level 1      Level 2     Level 3  

December 31, 2011

       

Interest rate swaps

     —           —          —     

December 31, 2010

       

Interest rate swaps

     —           —          —     

December 31, 2009

       

Interest rate swaps

     —           (99     —     

Capital Management

The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to sustain future development of the business. The Board of Directors monitors the return on capital.

The Group’s net debt to adjusted equity ratio at the reporting date was as follows:

 

     2011     2010     2009  
     (€’000)  

Net Debt

      

Total liabilities

     413,720        391,493        273,643   

Less: Cash

     (142,669     (99,115     (32,003
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     271,051        292,378        241,640   

Equity

      

Total equity

     330,561        155,269        134,377   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net debt to adjusted equity ratio

     0.82        1.88        1.80   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-44


Table of Contents
19 Share-based payments

Summary of outstanding options

Share options to acquire a fixed number of shares are granted to employees and others based on a number of factors. The exercise price is fixed at the date of the grant. The numbers of options listed below are post the reverse stock split 5:1, which was effectuated upon completion of the initial public offering on January 28, 2011.

The terms and conditions of the grants, post reverse stock split, under the 2008 Option Plan with an exercise price, are as follows:

 

Grant date

  

Employees entitled

   Exercise
price in €
     Options
granted
outstanding
     Options
granted
outstanding,
vested
 
          (In thousands)  

2003-2005

  

Key management

     2.00         54         54   
  

Key management

     1.00         8         8   
  

Senior employees

     1.00         48         48   
  

Senior employees

     2.00         28         28   

2007

  

Key management

     3.50         1,496         1,496   
  

Key management

     4.45         100         100   

2008

  

Senior employees

     1.00         10         10   
  

Senior employees

     2.00         1         1   
  

Senior employees

     4.45         239         223   
  

Senior employees

     5.00         71         51   

2009

  

Key management

     5.00         100         50   
  

Senior employees

     5.00         56         25   

2010

  

Key management

     5.00         40         18   
  

Senior employees

     5.00         168         74   
  

Key management

     6.50         60         19   
  

Senior employees

     6.50         47         18   
  

Senior employees

     7.50         28         8   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 
  

Total share options

        2,554         2,231   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 

The terms and conditions of the grants, post reverse stock split, under the 2011 Option Plan with an USD exercise price, are as follows:

 

Grant date

  

Employees entitled

   Exercise
price in $
     Outstanding      Exercisable  
          (In thousands)  

2011

  

Key management (Executive Director)

     14.74        600         200   
  

Non-Executive Directors

     13.00-14.74         30         —     
  

Senior employees

     13.00-14.65         706         47   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 
  

Total share options

        1,336         247   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 

Share options granted before the year 2011, under the 2008 Option Plan, vest over 4 years and can be exercised up to 5 years after the date of grant. In 2010, the exercise periods of some options granted in 2003 and 2005 but not yet exercised were extended to March 31, 2012. Share options granted in the year 2011, under the 2011 Option Plan generally, vest over 4 years and can be exercised up to 8 years after the date of grant. The options granted in 2011 to the Company’s Executive Director, Non-Executive Directors and certain employees have an accelerated vesting term.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

The number and weighted average exercise prices of outstanding share options, post reverse stock split, under the 2008 Option Plan with euro exercise prices are as follows:

 

     Weighted average
exercise price in €
     Number of options in
thousands
 
     2011      2010      2009      2011     2010     2009  

Outstanding at January 1

     2.91         2.65         2.45         4,733        4,366        5,078   

Granted

     —           5.64         5.00         —          415        197   

Exercised

     1.61         1.50         1.00         (2,156     (4     (704

Expired

     —           1.00         —           —          (6     —     

Forfeited

     5.76         5.62         4.20         (23     (38     (205
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding—December 31

     3.94         2.91         2.65         2,554        4,733        4,366   

Exercisable—December 31

     3.72         2.36         2.05         2,231        3,997        3,453   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The number and weighted average exercise prices of outstanding share options, post reverse stock split, under the 2011 Option Plan with US dollar exercise prices are as follows:

 

     Weighted average
exercise price in $
     Number of options in
thousands
 
     2011      2010      2009      2011      2010      2009  

Outstanding at January 1

     —           —           —           —           —           —     

Granted

     13.65         —           —           1,336         —           —     

Exercised

     —           —           —           —           —           —     

Expired

     —           —           —           —           —           —     

Forfeited

     —           —           —           —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Outstanding—December 31

     13.65         —           —           1,336         —           —     

Exercisable—December 31

     14.41         —           —           247         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The options outstanding at December 31, 2011 have a weighted average remaining contractual life of 3.2 years (2010: 4.3 years and 2009: 3.6 years).

Employee expenses

In 2011, the Company recorded employee expenses of € 2,736,000 related to share-based payments (2010: € 1,684,000 and 2009: € 950,000).

The weighted average fair value at grant date of options granted during the period has been determined using the Black-Scholes valuation model. The following inputs have been used:

 

     2011     2010     2009  

Share price in € at grant date (post reverse stock split)

     8.02-9.71        10.20-14.10        6.70 to 8.60   

Exercise price in € (post reverse stock split)

     9.01  to 10.95        5.00 to 7.50        5.00   

Dividend yield

     0     0     0

Expected volatility

     40     35     35

Risk free interest rate

     2.0     4.0     4.1

Expected life weighted average

     5.1 years        3.5 years        3.5 years   

The significant inputs into the model were:

Expected volatility based on the performance of companies that are considered to be comparable to the Group.

 

F-46


Table of Contents

A risk-free interest rate based on the yield on zero coupon bonds issued by the Netherlands government with a maturity similar to the expected life of the options.

Expected life is considered to be equal to the average of the share option exercise and vesting periods.

 

20 Financial commitments

Non-cancellable operating lease commitments

At December 31, the Group has future minimum commitments for non-cancellable operating leases with terms in excess of one year as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     25,529         23,280         22,717   

Between 1 to 5 years

     102,741         92,269         84,439   

After 5 years

     167,428         124,488         75,728   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     295,698         240,037         182,884   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011, of the non-cancellable operating leases an amount of € 13,668,000 relates to the lease contracts, which are provided for as part of the provision for onerous lease contracts.

The total gross operating lease expense for the year 2011 was € 22,000,000 (2010: € 21,082,000 and 2009: € 20,483,000).

Future committed revenues receivable

The Group enters into initial contracts with its customers for periods of at least 1 year and generally between 3 and 5 years resulting in future committed revenues from customers. At December 31, the Group had contracts with customers for future committed revenues receivable as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     139,475         154,634         101,235   

Between 1 to 5 years

     201,620         149,900         96,392   

After 5 years

     103,934         18,606         16,093   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     445,029         323,140         213,720   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Commitments to purchase power

The Group, where possible and for its own use, seeks to purchase power on fixed-price term agreements with local power supply companies within the cities in which it operates. In some cases the Group also commits to purchase certain minimum volumes of power at fixed prices. At December 31, the Group had entered into non-cancellable power purchase commitments as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     15,800         13,900         9,800   

Between 1 to 5 years

     —           14,700         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     15,800         28,600         9,800   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

21 Capital commitments

At December 31, 2011, the Group had outstanding capital commitments totalling € 102,000,000 (2010: € 19,855,000 and 2009: € 33,539,000). These commitments are expected to be settled in the following financial year. The increase results from ongoing expansion projects.

 

22 Contingencies

Guarantees

Certain of our subsidiaries have granted guarantees to our lending banks in relation to our borrowings. The Company has granted rent guarantees to landlords of certain of the Group’s property leases. Financial guarantees granted by the Group’s banks in respect of operating leases amount to € 6,350,000 (2010: € 3,920,000 and 2009: € 3,828,000) and other supplier guarantees amounting to € 1,027,000.

Costs of sites restoration

As at December 31, 2011, the estimated discounted cost relating to the restoration of data center leasehold premises was € 17,000,000 (2010: € 15,400,000 and 2009: € 14,481,000), of which € 701,000 (2010: € 695,000 and 2009: € 633,000) was recognized. Remaining lease terms are over a range of 1 to 23 years and, in accordance with the Group’s accounting policy, amounts have only been provided in the financial statements in respect of premises where it is probable that the lease will not be renewed. The Group expects to exercise its right to renew its leases when they expire and continue to use the sites as data centers. It is therefore not expected that other site restoration liabilities will be incurred.

Other obligations pertaining to the Company, not appearing on the statement of financial position have been disclosed in Note 34 below.

 

23 Related-party transactions

There are no material transactions with related parties, other than as disclosed below, and all transactions are conducted at arm’s length.

Shareholders Agreement

Upon completion of the Initial Public Offering, the company entered into a shareholders’ agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of Interxion’s outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of the board of directors, including the right to nominate the chairman of our board of directors

 

F-48


Table of Contents

If Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 25% but more than 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination three of the seven members of the Board, at least one of whom shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 15% but more than 10% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination two of the seven members of our Board, none of whom shall be required to be independent. At such time that the ownership of Baker Capital or its affiliates is less than or equal to 10% but more than 5% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination one of the seven members of our Board, who shall not be required to be independent.

Furthermore, for so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right, but not the obligation, to nominate the Chairman of our Board.

As long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares, at least one of Baker Capital’s director nominees shall be appointed to each of our standing committees, provided that such Baker Capital nominees shall meet any independence or other requirements of the applicable listing standards.

As at April 1, 2012, private equity investment funds affiliated with Baker Capital indirectly own 30.88%, on a fully diluted basis, of Interxion’s equity.

Key management compensation

The total compensation of key management is as follows:

 

     2011      2010      2009  
     (€’000)  

Short-term employee benefits (salaries and bonuses)

     3,406         3,937         3,505   

Post-employment benefits

     44         88         66   

Share-based payments

     1,263         635         504   

Termination benefits

     115         —           83   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     4,828         4,660         4,158   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Key management’s share-based payment compensation is disclosed in Note 19, and the compensation of the Executive Director and Non-Executive Directors of the Board is disclosed on individual basis in Note 32.

France IX loan

Interxion France is a member and co-founder of the France IX association, founded in 2010, the mission of which is to reinforce Paris as a global peering point by developing a panel of services that meets the various, and current, needs of the market, and by gathering together French and foreign ISPs and internet services, and content providers. To date Interxion France has incurred aggregate cost of € 574,000, which have been recharged to France IX association, receipt of which has been formalised in a loan agreement.

 

F-49


Table of Contents
24 Events subsequent to the balance sheet date

Change in ownership of shares

On Wednesday March 14, 2012, Chianna Investment N.V. requested that Interxion instruct its Transfer Agent, American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, to remove the restrictive legend on the 10,143,599 Interxion shares that Chianna Investment N.V. holds. Baker Capital informed Interxion that it intended to make a pro rata distribution-in-kind of these shares immediately to the partners of Baker Communications Fund (Cayman) LP, Baker Capital holds an additional 20,657,892 Interxion shares through a successor fund, Baker Communications Fund II (Cayman) LP.

This distribution did not have any effect upon the total number of shares outstanding.

 

F-50

Exhibit 4.18

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

DATED                      2011

(1) AMIRA ZELOOF OFER ZELOOF AND OREN ZELOOF

and

(2) INTERXION CARRIER HOTEL LIMITED

 

 

LEASE

relating to:

Part Ground Floor, First Floor,

Second Floor, Third Floor, Fourth Floor (to be built)

and Fifth Floor (to be built), Block D

The Old Truman Brewery

91 Brick Lane, London E1

 

 

Bird & Bird LLP

15 Fetter Lane

London EC4A 1JP

England

Tel: 020 7415 6000

Fax: 020 7415 6111

www.twobirds.com

Ref: AJS\INTHO\021\Documents\D Block Lease – 9 September


PRESCRIBED CLAUSES

LR1. Date of lease

1 November 2011

LR2. Title number(s)

LR2.1 Landlord’s title number(s)

86608

LR2.2 Other title numbers

EGL487307, NGL291450

LR3. Parties to this lease

Landlord

AMIRA ZELOOF, OFER ZELOOF AND OREN ZELOOF all care of 91 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL

Tenant

INTERXION CARRIER HOTEL LIMITED a company registered with number 03753969 whose registered office is at 5 th Floor, 91-95 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL.

Other parties

LR4. Property

In the case of a conflict between this clause and the remainder of this lease then, for the purposes of registration, this clause shall prevail.

See the definition of “Premises” in Clause 1 of this lease.

LR5. Prescribed statements etc.

None.

LR6. Term for which the Property is leased

The term as specified in the definition of “Term” in Clause 1 of this lease, subject to the terms of the Lease.

LR7. Premium

None.

LR8. Prohibitions or restrictions on disposing of this lease

This lease contains provisions that prohibit or restrict dispositions.


LR9. Rights of acquisition etc.

LR9.1 Tenant’s contractual rights to renew this lease, to acquire the reversion or another lease of the Property, or to acquire an interest in other land

None.

LR9.2 Tenant’s covenant to (or offer to) surrender this lease

None.

LR9.3 Landlord’s contractual rights to acquire this lease

None.

LR10. Restrictive covenants given in this lease by the Landlord in respect of land other than the Property

None.

LR11. Easements

LR11.1 Easements granted by this lease for the benefit of the Property

The easements as specified in Schedule 1 of this lease.

LR11.2 Easements granted or reserved by this lease over the Property for the benefit of other property

The easements as specified in Schedule 2 of this lease.

LR12. Estate rent charge burdening the Property

None.

LR13. Application for standard form of restriction

None.

LR14. Declaration of trust where there is more than one person comprising the Tenant

None.


THIS LEASE is made the      day of              2011

BETWEEN:

 

(1) AMIRA ZELOOF OFER ZELOOF and OREN ZELOOF all care of 91 Brick Lane London E1 6QL (together the “ Landlord ” which expression shall where the context so admits includes the reversioner for the time being); and

 

(2)

INTERXION CARRIER HOTEL LIMITED a company registered with number 03753969 whose registered office is at 5 th Floor, 91-95 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL (the “ Tenant ”).

WHEREAS:

 

  (A) The Landlord owns part of the Old Truman Brewery (as defined below).

 

  (B) The Parties have agreed that the Landlord will grant a lease of the Premises to the Tenant for the period from and including the date hereof to and including 5 April 2025 on the terms set out herein.

NOW THIS DEED WITNESSES as follows:

PART ONE: DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1. DEFINITIONS

Where in this deed the following words in bold type commence with capital letters they have the following meanings unless the context otherwise requires:

Approvals means all necessary approvals consents permissions and licensees of any local or other competent authority which may from time to time be necessary to enable the Tenant lawfully to commence and carry out the Tenant’s Works including Planning Permission number PA/11/01168 dated 13 October 2011;

Authority means any statutory, public, local, planning, fire regulations, building regulations or other competent authority or a court of competent jurisdiction;

Block B means the building and land known as Block B, Old Truman Brewery, 91 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL as shown edged in pink on the Plan titled ‘Block B Plan’;

Block C means the building known as Block C, Old Truman Brewery, 91 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL as shown edged in pink on the Plan titled ‘Block C Plan’;

Building means the building known as Block D, Old Truman Brewery, 91 Brick Lane, London E1 6QL as shown edged green on the Plan titled ‘Building Plan’ of which the Premises form part;

Clause means a clause of this deed;

Common Parts means such entrances, passages, staircases, circulation areas, lifts, service roads, service yards, loading bays, forecourts, lavatories, and other areas from time to time provided for the common use of tenants, occupiers, visitors or any of them;

 

1


Conduit means any pipe, drain, watercourse, culvert, sewer, flue, duct, gutter, wire, cable, optic fibre, conduit, channel and other medium for the passage or transmission of water, soil, gas, air, smoke, electricity, light, information or other matter and all ancillary equipment or structures;

End of the Term means the determination of the Term by expiry, forfeiture, notice, surrender or otherwise;

Existing Premises means that part of the Premises existing and built as at the date hereof, comprising part Ground Floor, First Floor, Second Floor and part Third Floor as the same is shown edged in red on the Plans titled ‘Existing Premises’;

External Repair means an item of repair and/or maintenance and/or similar relating to a part of the Premises which lies on the exterior of the Building and which constitutes a danger to members of the public and/or to the Retained Property;

Facilities means such systems and facilities as may from time to time be provided for the amenity of the Building and/or the Retained Property such as security and surveillance systems; fire alarm and prevention equipment; sprinklers; heating, ventilation and air conditioning plant; public address and other communication facilities;

Force Majeure: means any causes not within the reasonable control of the Landlord or the Tenant as the case may be including but not limited to strike or labour disputes save for those involving a party’s own work force, strike of lightning direct or indirect, fire, flood, war, mobilisation or military call-ups of greater extent, nuclear calamities, requisition, embargo, currency restriction, authority directives, any act of government, regulatory or other legal restrictions in force as at the date hereof and/or which come in force after the date hereof, riot or uprising, legal restriction in the use of power, delays on the part of any local or statutory authority and the default of any third party beyond the reasonable control of the defaulting party or causes related to sub-suppliers when the sub-supplier’s default is caused by any of the above mentioned causes;

Interest means interest at the Interest Rate (both before and after any judgment) calculated on a daily basis from the date on which interest becomes chargeable on any payment pursuant to any provision of the Lease to the date upon which such payment is made such interest to be compounded with rests on the quarter days being specifically 1 January, 1 April, 1 July and 1 October in every year;

Interest Rate means 3.5% p.a. above the base lending rate from time to time of Bank of Scotland Bank (or such other UK bank as the Landlord may give notice of from time to time);

Internal Alteration means an alteration to the interior of the Premises which does not affect any load bearing part of the Building and/or the erection of non-structural demountable partitioning within the Premises;

Lease means this lease as from time to time varied or supplemented whether by deed, licence or otherwise;

 

2


Legal Obligation means any obligation relating to the Premises or their occupation or use imposed by any present or future statute or any statutory instrument, EC directive with direct effect, common law, mandatory code of practice, regulation, order, notice, direction or requirement of any Authority, irrespective of the person on whom such obligation is imposed;

New Premises means that part of the Premises to be built as part of the Tenant’s Works, comprising part (infill) Third Floor, Fourth Floor, Fifth Floor/Plant Deck, and new stairwell and goods lift and enclosures at the rear (North) of the Premises, as the same is shown edged in red on the Plans titled ‘New Premises’;

Old Truman Brewery means the Old Truman Brewery site, 91 Brick Lane, London E1, as the same is shown edged blue on the Plan titled Old Truman Brewery Plan;

Party means the Landlord or the Tenant;

Party Wall means the party wall between the Building and Block C as the same is shown identified by a red line on the Plan titled ‘Party Wall Plan’;

Permitted User means data centre with ancillary offices and all uses ancillary thereto but not further or otherwise;

Plan means a plan attached to this Lease;

Planning Acts means the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 and all other statutes containing provisions relating to town and country planning when from time to time in force and all other statutes, statutory instruments, regulations and orders included by virtue of Clause 2.5;

Practical Completion means the point at which the Tenant’s Works are in a state of being complete in all respects and free from apparent defects (save for any minor items of incomplete work or minor defects the existence completion or rectification of which would not in the reasonable opinion of the Tenant materially prevent or interfere with the use of the Tenant’s Works by the Tenant), provided always that the Landlord shall be consulted as to the progress of the Tenant’s Works and shall be allowed to offer its opinion as to the date of Practical Completion, and in the event that there is a dispute between the Tenant and the Landlord as to the date of Practical Completion, it is to be determined by a Chartered Surveyor having at least ten years’ experience in assessing the date of practical completion of such works nominated by agreement of the Landlord and the Tenant and failing such agreement by the President or other chief officer or acting chief officer for the time being of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, and the surveyor shall act as an expert and not as an arbitrator and the surveyor’s costs shall be in the surveyor’s award;

Premises means all that land and premises situated at and known as Part Ground Floor, First Floor, Second Floor and Third Floor, Block D, Old Truman Brewery, 91 Brick Lane, London E1 as shown edged red on the Plans titled ‘Premises Plan – Ground Floor, First Floor, Second Floor, and Third Floor’, and in relation to the area shown edged red on the Plan titled ‘Premises Plan – Fourth Floor’ the airspace to a level of 12 metres above the level of the existing roof of the Existing Premises (but excluding to the extent relevant any airspace currently occupied by the Telecoms Equipment used by Vodafone in connection with the Telecoms Agreements currently attached to Block C for the period during which such Telecoms Equipment remains in situ),

 

3


and all and any part of such property and any additions thereto including:

 

  1) in respect of the Existing Premises:

 

  (a) the internal surfaces of the walls and of the floor and ceiling slabs dividing the Premises from other parts of the Building but not those walls or slabs themselves;

 

  (b) internal walls which are not loadbearing;

 

  (c) the internal surfaces of loadbearing walls, columns or floors or ceiling slabs within the Premises but not those walls, columns or slabs themselves;

 

  (d) the doors, door frames, windows and window frames (including for the avoidance of doubt the glazed frontage) of the Premises;

 

  (e) Conduits and Facilities to the extent that they are within and exclusively serve the Premises (but not other Conduits or Facilities)

 

  (f) plant and machinery forming part of and exclusively serving the Premises; and

 

  2) in respect of the New Premises the Premises includes the whole of the Tenant’s Works including the walls (both load bearing and non-load bearing), columns, ceiling slabs and roof, but for the avoidance of doubt not the Party Wall which shall be the property of the Landlord and shall form part of the Retained Property;

Prohibited Material means materials, substances, practices or techniques which are generally accepted or generally suspected in the construction industry at the relevant time as:

 

  (a) posing a hazard to the health of any person;

 

  (b) posing a threat to the structural stability, performance, physical integrity of the normal life expectancy of buildings or structures or any part or component thereof as a result of sole use or use in a particular situation or in combination with other materials or substances; or

 

  (c) not being in accordance with any British or European Standards and Codes of Practice and/or the requirement of the Guidance “Good Practice in the Selection of Construction Materials” dated 16 May 1997 sponsored by the British Property Federation and British Council of Offices and the BRE Digest (or any updated versions of the Guidance or Digest);

Regulations means any regulations from time to time published by the Landlord or other relevant person acting reasonably in relation to the Premises and/or the Retained Property in the interests of good estate management;

Rent means the rent amounts as detailed in Schedule 3, comprising rent in respect of:

 

  (i) the Existing Premises, as set out in Part 1 of Schedule 3; and

 

4


  (ii) the New Premises, as set out in Part 2 of Schedule 3,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT that the Landlord may if it so wishes invoice the Rent for the Existing Premises and the New Premises together in the same invoice from time to time;

Rent Commencement Date means

 

  (i) in respect of the Existing Premises, 1 May 2012; and

 

  (ii) in respect of the New Premises, 19 March 2014;

Retained Property means the Old Truman Brewery excluding the Premises;

Schedule of Condition means the narrative and photographic schedules of condition of the Premises, being:

 

  (i) one schedule of condition of the Existing Premises attached at Part 1 of Schedule 5; and

 

  (ii) one schedule of condition of the New Premises to be completed on or after Practical Completion at the joint cost of the Landlord and the Tenant pursuant to Clause 7.2 and thereafter to be kept with this Lease;

Service Charge means the service charge amounts as set out in Schedule 4;

Services means the services to be provided by the Landlord pursuant to Clause 27;

Telecoms Agreements means:

 

  (i) the agreement between Eliahou Zeloof, Amira Zeloof, Oren Zeloof and Ofer Zeloof (1) and Vodafone Limited (2) dated 3 June 1999; and

 

  (ii) the agreement for installation of telecommunications equipment between Eliahou Zeloof, Amira Zeloof, Oren Zeloof and Ofer Zeloof (1) and Orange Personal Communications Services Limited (2) dated 29 June 1999;

Telecoms Equipment means the telecommunications equipment used by Vodafone and Orange as the case may be which is located in or on Block C pursuant to the Telecoms Agreements;

Tenant’s Works means those works detailed in Schedule 6;

Term means a term commencing on the Term Commencement Date and expiring on 5 April 2025, subject always to the provisions of this Lease;

Term Commencement Date means the date hereof;

VAT means Value Added Tax or other tax of a similar nature (and unless otherwise expressly stated all references to Rent or other monies payable by the Tenant are exclusive of any VAT charged or chargeable thereon).

 

5


2. INTERPRETATION

The provisions of the Lease shall unless the context otherwise requires be construed as follows:

 

2.1 Obligations and liabilities of a Party comprising more than one person are obligations and liabilities of such persons jointly and severally;

 

2.2 Words importing one gender include all other genders;

 

2.3 The singular includes the plural and vice versa;

 

2.4 A covenant by the Tenant not to do something shall be construed as including a covenant not to permit or knowingly to suffer it to be done by a third party;

 

2.5 Reference to a statute includes any amendment, modification, extension, consolidation or re-enactment of it and any statutory instrument, regulation or order made under it which is for the time being in force;

 

2.6 Headings to Clauses, Schedules or parts of the Lease do not affect the interpretation or construction of the Lease.

PART TWO: DEMISE

 

3. DEMISE

In consideration of the rents hereby reserved and the covenants by the Tenant hereinafter contained the Landlord demises the Premises to the Tenant:

 

3.1 together with the rights set out in Schedule 1;

 

3.2 except and reserving to the Landlord and all those authorised by it as set out in Schedule 2;

 

3.3 to hold the same to the Tenant for the Term;

 

3.4 subject to all rights, easements, quasi-easements, restrictions, covenants and liabilities affecting the Premises;

 

3.5 yielding and paying to the Landlord the Rent, Service Charge and other sums payable under the Lease without any deduction by equal quarterly payments in advance on the quarter days being specifically 1 January, 1 April, 1 July, and 1 October in every year and proportionately for any period of less than a year the first payment of the Rent to be made on the Rent Commencement Date and the first payment of the Service Charge to be made on the date hereof;

PART THREE: TENANT’S COVENANTS

 

4. INTRODUCTION

The Tenant covenants with the Landlord as set out in this part of the Lease.

 

6


5. RENT AND SERVICE CHARGE

 

5.1 The Tenant shall pay the Rent as provided in part two of the Lease without deduction or set-off.

 

5.2 The Tenant shall pay the Service Charge as provided in part two of the Lease without deduction or set-off.

 

6. OUTGOINGS

 

6.1 The Tenant shall pay and indemnify the Landlord against all rates, taxes, assessments, impositions, duties, charges and outgoings now or at any time during the Term payable by the owner or occupier of or otherwise due in respect of the Premises or any part thereof (except any tax assessed on the Landlord in respect of its ownership of, rental income from or any dealing with its reversionary interest).

 

6.2 The Tenant shall pay and indemnify the Landlord against all reasonable and proper charges for electricity, water, gas, telephone and other services at the Premises.

 

6.3 For the avoidance of doubt the Tenant shall be responsible for obtaining and maintaining its own supply of electricity, gas, water, and any other utilities and/or services directly from the appropriate utility company, but shall at the End of the Term give the Landlord the opportunity at no cost of taking over any such supplies.

 

6.4 The Tenant shall pay by way of further rent and keep the Landlord indemnified against all VAT which may from time to time be charged on the Rent, Service Charge and/or on any other monies payable by the Tenant under the Lease within 14 days of receipt of a valid VAT invoice therefor.

 

6.5 The Tenant shall pay by way of further rent and keep the Landlord indemnified against all VAT paid or payable by the Landlord in respect of any costs, fees, disbursements, expenses or other sums which the Landlord is entitled to recover under the terms of this Lease.

 

6.6 The Tenant shall pay to the Landlord on demand a fair and proper proportion of the costs of the maintenance, repair and renewal of all roads, accessways and/or Conduits and/or Facilities running over or under the Retained Property and which serve or benefit the Premises.

 

7. REPAIR AND DECORATION

 

7.1 The Tenant shall (subject to the provisions relating to insurance set out in part four of the Lease):

 

  7.1.1 from time to time and at all times during the Term keep the Premises and every part thereof and all additions and improvements thereto in good and substantial repair and condition and good decorative order providing that the yielding up obligations are those as set out in Clause 20;

 

7


  7.1.2 clean the Premises regularly and maintain them at all times in a clean and tidy condition but in no better condition than shown on the Schedule of Condition;

 

  7.1.3 within three months (or sooner in emergency) of receipt of notice from the Landlord of any breach of this Clause carry out the repair, maintenance, cleaning, servicing and/or decoration required to remedy the breach;

 

  7.1.4 decorate and keep the Premises decorated to a good standard;

 

  7.1.5 in respect of any notice served by the Landlord pursuant to Clause 7.1.3 which relates to an External Repair, if the Tenant fails diligently to comply or seek to comply with such notice within the three months set out in the notice in accordance with Clause 7.1.3 (or such reasonable shorter period in emergency) the Landlord may enter the external parts (accompanied by an employee of the Tenant (which the Tenant covenants to make available) except in the case of emergency) but not for the avoidance of doubt any internal parts of the Premises to carry out such work necessary to comply with the notice, and the Tenant shall upon demand pay to the Landlord as a debt all costs which the Landlord reasonably and properly so incurs;

 

  7.1.6 in the event that the Tenant does not permit the Landlord access to the Premises to carry out any of the Services, then the Tenant shall if the Landlord so requires be required at its own cost to carry out and complete such Services forthwith, provided that the Landlord shall in such instance pay the Tenant the cost that the Landlord would reasonably and properly have incurred in carrying out such Services.

 

7.2 A narrative and photographic schedule of condition of the New Premises will be prepared and completed on or after Practical Completion at the joint cost of the Landlord and the Tenant, and on completion shall be kept with this Lease. In the event that the Parties are unable to agree the content of the Schedule of Condition relating to the New Premises, then the matter shall be resolved by a surveyor appointed jointly by the parties or in the absence of agreement appointed by the President for the time being of the Royal Institute of Chartered Surveyors upon the application of either party and the surveyor shall act as an expert and not as an arbitrator and the surveyor’s costs shall be in the surveyor’s award.

 

8. ALTERATIONS

 

8.1 Save as set out below the Tenant shall not, other than in relation to the Tenant’s Works:

 

  8.1.1 alter or interfere with any part of the Building and/or the Retained Property;

 

  8.1.2 make any addition or alteration to the Premises unless permitted by this Clause;

 

  8.1.3 alter or interfere with the operation of any Conduits and/or Facilities which serve any part of the Retained Property without the prior written consent of the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion.

 

8.2 The Tenant shall not other than in relation to the Tenant’s Works:

 

  8.2.1 erect any new building or structure on the Premises; and/or

 

8


  8.2.2 make structural alterations or additions to the Building;

 

  8.2.3 make an Internal Alteration which is not permitted without the Landlord’s consent pursuant to Clause 8.3

without in each such case the Landlord’s prior written consent in the Landlord’s absolute discretion.

 

8.3 The Tenant may without the consent of the Landlord make an Internal Alteration without requiring the Landlord’s consent provided that:

 

  8.3.1 the Tenant shall provide full details in writing to the Landlord of such internal non-structural alterations and/or non-structural demountable partitioning prior to commencing such work or internal demountable partitioning; and

 

  8.3.2 it does not interfere with the operation of any Conduits and/or Facilities (if any) which serve any part of the Retained Property,

and for the avoidance of doubt any partitioning installed by the Tenant shall be and remain a tenant’s fixture for all purposes of the Lease.

 

8.4 The Landlord may before giving any consent under this Clause require:

 

  8.4.1 the submission to the Landlord of drawings and specifications showing the proposed alteration; and

 

  8.4.2 the execution of such licence to carry out the proposed alteration as the Landlord may reasonably require.

 

8.5 For the avoidance of doubt the Tenant is not permitted to place any satellite dishes on any part of the Building, other than a maximum of seven satellite dishes each with a maximum diameter of 90 cm, provided always that any such satellite dishes must be located on the fifth floor of the Building to be built as part of the Tenant’s Works, and must not be visible from ground level, and provided always that the Landlord may if reasonable in connection with the Retained Property (whether related to development or any other matter) on giving the Tenant not less than 3 months’ notice require the removal of all and any of such satellite dishes from the Building and the relocation of the same to Block B.

 

9. SIGNS

The Tenant shall not erect any signs, boards, posters or other matters of like nature upon the exterior wall bounding the Premises without the Landlord’s consent provided that the Tenant shall, subject to obtaining the Landlord’s prior written consent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), be permitted to erect a single sign in such position to be agreed in writing by the Landlord (such agreement not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) of a size and nature consistent with other such signs of other occupiers in the Old Truman Brewery which can stipulate the name address and/or trade of the Tenant provided that the Tenant shall not be permitted to erect and/or place any signs, boards, posters or other matters of a like nature on the perimeter windows of the Premises and provided that any flashing and/or moving sign requires the Landlord’s prior consent in writing in the Landlord’s absolute discretion.

 

9


10. USER

 

10.1 The Tenant shall not use the Premises otherwise than for the Permitted User.

 

10.2 The Tenant shall not use the Premises or permit the Premises to be used in a manner which may be or become or cause a nuisance, disturbance, injury or damage to the Landlord or any other person.

 

10.3 The Tenant shall not reside or sleep on the Premises, nor use them for any sale by auction or for any dangerous, noisy or offensive purpose or for any illegal or immoral activity.

 

10.4 The Tenant shall not impose or permit to be imposed on the floors or walls of the Premises and/or the Building any load in excess of that which they are designed to bear and not suspend or permit to be suspended from the ceiling slabs and/or beams of any part of the Premises and/or the Building any load in excess of that which they are designed to bear and without prejudice to the foregoing not to do anything which may subject the Premises and/or the Building to any strain beyond that which they are designed to bear with due margin for safety.

 

11. ALIENATION

 

11.1 Unless otherwise permitted under this Clause the Tenant shall not:

 

  11.1.1 hold the Premises expressly or impliedly on trust for another person;

 

  11.1.2 part with possession of the Premises;

 

  11.1.3 share possession of the Premises with another person;

 

  11.1.4 allow anyone other than the Tenant any lawful subtenant or their respective officers and employees to occupy the Premises.

Assignment

 

11.2 The Tenant shall not assign a part (as distinct from the whole) of the Premises.

 

11.3 The Tenant shall not assign the whole of the Premises without the prior consent of the Landlord (which will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

 

11.4 It is agreed that for the purposes of Section 19(1A) of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1927 the Landlord may withhold its consent to an assignment if any of the following circumstances exist:

 

  11.4.1 there is a material breach of a covenant in the Lease by the Tenant;

 

  11.4.2 any Rent, Service Charge or other sums payable under the Lease are not paid on the date of application for consent to such assignment and/or on the date of the proposed assignment;

 

10


  11.4.3 the proposed assignee is a member of the same group of companies (as defined by Section 42 of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954) as the Tenant and cannot show average net assets and net profits over the previous three years greater than or equal to those of the Tenant over the previous three years;

 

  11.4.4 in the reasonable opinion of the Landlord the proposed assignment will have a materially detrimental effect on the value of the Landlord’s reversionary interest in the Building and/or the Retained Property.

 

11.5 It is agreed that for the purposes of Section 19(1A) of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1927 the Landlord may grant consent to an assignment subject to any of the conditions set out below:

 

  11.5.1 the proposed assignee has if reasonably required by the Landlord procured a covenant by deed with the Landlord from individuals who are or a company which is reasonably acceptable to the Landlord as surety for the assignee;

 

  11.5.2 the proposed assignee has if required by the Landlord deposited with the Landlord such sum as the Landlord reasonably requires as security for the performance by the assignee of its obligations under the Lease;

 

  11.5.3 the Tenant has, if reasonably so required by the Landlord, first entered into an authorised guarantee agreement as defined in Section 16 of the Landlord and Tenant (Covenants) Act 1995;

 

11.6 It is agreed that the Landlord may withhold consent to an assignment of the whole of the Premises on a ground which is not referred to in Clause 11.4 and that it may grant consent subject to a condition which is not specified in Clause 11.5 subject in each case to such withholding of consent or imposition of a condition being reasonable.

Charges

 

11.7 The Tenant may charge the Premises to a bank or similar financial institution for the purpose only of borrowing money on the security of the Lease subject to obtaining the Landlord’s consent, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed.

Underlettings

 

11.8 Save as set out at Clause 11.13 the Tenant shall not underlet a part (as distinct from the whole) of the Premises.

 

11.9 The Tenant shall not underlet the whole of the Premises:

 

  11.9.1 unless the proposed undertenant has first covenanted by deed with the Landlord in such form as the Landlord may reasonably require that with effect from the date of the underlease and during the term thereof the undertenant will observe and perform all the provisions of the underlease to be observed and performed by the undertenant; nor

 

  11.9.2 (where the proposed undertenant is a corporate body and the Landlord reasonably so requires) without first procuring a covenant by deed with the Landlord from two individuals who are or a company which is acceptable to the Landlord as surety for the undertenant; nor

 

11


  11.9.3 except by way of a permitted underlease ; nor

 

  11.9.4 without the prior written consent of the Landlord (which will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

 

11.10 A permitted underlease is an underlease which:

 

  11.10.1 is granted without any fine or premium;

 

  11.10.2 reserves a rent not less than the greater of:

 

  11.10.2.1 the open market rental value of the Premises being underlet; and

 

  11.10.2.2 the passing rent under this Lease;

 

  11.10.3 is (so far as is consistent with an underlease) in a form substantially the same as the Lease;

 

  11.10.4 is for a term no longer than the unexpired Term under this Lease, containing provisions to the effect that it will immediately determine upon the forfeiture or other determination of this Lease and that upon such forfeiture or other determination of this Lease the Tenant shall procure vacant possession of the Premises;

 

  11.10.5 contains provisions for re-entry by the underlessor on breach of any covenant by the undertenant;

 

  11.10.6 prohibits the commutation of rent;

 

  11.10.7 is excluded from the operation of sections 24-28 of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954;

 

11.11 The Tenant shall enforce in so far as is reasonable performance by every such undertenant of the covenants and conditions in its underlease and shall not release or waive any such covenants or conditions.

Associated Companies

 

11.12 The Tenant shall be permitted to share occupation of the whole or any part or parts of the Premises with any company which is a member of the same group of companies as the Tenant within the meaning of section 42 of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954 (as originally enacted) (a Group Company ) so long as such company remains a Group Company of the Tenant and provided that such occupation shall not create the relationship of landlord and tenant between the Tenant and the Group Company of the Tenant and provided that notice in writing of such occupation, the area to be occupied and the termination of any such occupation is given by the Tenant to the Landlord prior to the commencement of such occupation or termination of such occupation (as the case may be);

 

12


Customers of Interxion

 

11.13 Notwithstanding the provisions of Clauses 11.1 to 11.12 above the Tenant shall be permitted without the prior consent of the Landlord:

 

  11.13.1 to grant licences to third parties permitting them to install and keep information, communication technology and other ancillary equipment within the Premises along with ancillary rights to enter upon the Premises from time to time as shall be reasonably necessary for the purposes for which such licenses are granted provided that such third parties shall only be permitted to enter for the purpose of installing inspecting maintaining repairing and/or removing and/or replacing such information communications technology and other ancillary equipment but not further or otherwise and provided that in each such case the relationship of landlord and tenant shall not be created and provided that such licences shall contain provision to the effect that they should immediately determine upon the forfeiture or other determination of this Lease and provided that upon such forfeiture or other determination the Tenant shall procure vacant possession of the Premises; and/or

 

  11.13.2 to grant underleases of such part or parts of the Premises as shall be used as offices or for the installation of information communications technology and other ancillary equipment provided that every such lease shall contain provisions consistent with the Tenant’s due performance of its obligations under this Lease and shall be excluded from the provisions of section 24 to 28 of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954 and provided that such underleases should contain provisions to the effect that they should immediately determine upon the forfeiture or other determination of this Lease and provided that upon such forfeiture or other determination the Tenant shall procure vacant possession of the Premises.

Notification

 

11.14 The Tenant shall within 28 days of any assignment, charge, underlease or other devolution of the Lease or of any interest deriving from the Lease give notice thereof to the Landlord and produce for registration the original or a certified copy of the document effecting or evidencing such devolution and pay such reasonable registration fee as the Landlord may require being not less than £40 (plus VAT), provided that this shall not apply in respect of any dealing permitted pursuant to the provisions of Clause 11.13 (Customers of Interxion).

 

12. LEGAL OBLIGATIONS AND SCHEDULE 1

 

12.1 The Tenant shall observe and comply with all Legal Obligations.

 

12.2 If the Tenant receives from an Authority formal notice of a Legal Obligation it shall as soon as reasonably practicable produce a copy to the Landlord, and if such Legal Obligation is in the Landlord’s reasonable opinion contrary to the interests of the Landlord the Tenant shall at the cost of the Landlord make such objection or representation against it as the Landlord may reasonably require provided that the Tenant shall not be required to make any objection or representation that might prejudice the Tenant’s use of the Premises as a data centre.

 

12.3 Where a Legal Obligation requires the carrying out of works the Tenant shall so far as such Legal Obligation permits also comply with the provisions of the Lease in relation to such works.

 

13


12.4 Without prejudice to the generality of this Clause, the Tenant shall in particular observe and comply with all Legal Obligations of any appropriate Authority relating to health, safety, means of escape in case of fire, and the protection and preservation of life and property, carrying out such works of modification and improvement to the Premises as may from time to time be required by such Legal Obligations.

 

12.5 The Tenant shall carry out any works to the Premises not only in accordance with all Legal Obligations but also with good quality materials, and in a good and workmanlike manner, in keeping with the character of the Premises and the Retained Property.

 

12.6 If the Tenant does not comply with a Legal Obligation which relates to an External Repair the Landlord may enter onto the external areas of the Premises accompanied (except in the case of emergency) by an employee of the Tenant (which the Tenant covenants to make available) but not for the avoidance of doubt onto any internal areas of the Premises in order to carry out such works as are necessary to comply with the Legal Obligation and the Tenant shall upon demand indemnify and keep indemnified the Landlord against all reasonable and properly incurred costs charges, fees and expenses incurred incidental thereto.

 

12.7 The Tenant shall not to do or omit to be done in or near the Premises any act or thing by reason of which the Landlord may incur or have imposed on it or become liable to pay any penalty damages, compensation, costs, charges or expenses.

 

12.8 The Tenant shall not and shall not permit any other person to burn any materials or permit any noxious, hazardous or deleterious materials or smoke to be emitted, discharged or otherwise from the Premises and not to store on the Premises any noxious, deleterious, flammable, hazardous or dangerous materials and to store all items on the Premises in a neat tidy and sightly manner and not so as is likely to cause danger of fire or other save that the Tenant may (subject to the compliance with other relevant provisions of the Lease) store petroleum within the Premises for the specific purpose of running back up generators.

 

12.9 The Tenant covenants to comply with its obligations set out in Schedule 1.

 

13. PLANNING

 

13.1 The provisions of this Clause supplement the general obligations imposed by Clause 12.

 

13.2 The Tenant shall not without the consent in writing of the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion make promote or support any application for planning permission:

 

  13.2.1 in respect of the use of the Premises other than as a data centre; or

 

  13.2.2 which would increase the internal area of the Premises to be greater than that anticipated through the completion of the Tenant’s Works (as envisaged under Planning Permission number PA/11/01168 dated 13 October 2011),

provided that the Tenant may make promote or support other applications for planning permission in respect of the use of the Premises as a data centre with the Landlord’s prior consent in writing (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), and provided always that the restriction in this Clause shall not apply in relation to the Tenant’s yielding up obligations in Clause 20.1.4.

 

14


13.3 The Tenant shall not commit a breach of planning control (as defined in section 171A(1) of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990) in relation to the Premises.

 

13.4 The Tenant shall observe and comply with the Planning Acts in relation to the Premises.

 

13.5 The Tenant shall supply to the Landlord promptly and without further request copies of all applications, notices, decisions and other formal communications under the Planning Acts which relate in any way to the Premises.

 

13.6 The Tenant shall not implement a planning permission in relation to anything other than use as a data centre until the Landlord has given its consent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed where planning permission is granted pursuant to an application approved by the Landlord) and if such planning permission is implemented the Tenant shall:

 

  (a) comply with all conditions imposed by the planning permission and any related planning agreement; and

 

  (b) carry out all works with good quality materials with all due care and skill before the End of the Term.

 

13.7 The Tenant shall not without the consent in writing of the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion object to any application for planning permission nor to the implementation of any planning permission in relation to the Retained Property except where such planning permission if implemented would in the reasonable opinion of the Tenant (acting reasonably) interfere with, prevent and/or materially prejudice and/or endanger the Permitted User of the Premises by the Tenant.

 

14. DEFECTIVE PREMISES

The Tenant shall promptly give notice to the Landlord upon becoming aware of any defect in the Premises in respect of which the Landlord may have a liability or duty of care under the Lease, the Defective Premises Act 1972 or any other Legal Obligation.

 

15. ENCROACHMENTS

 

15.1 The Tenant shall inform the Landlord as soon as reasonably practicable if it becomes aware of any attempt by any third party for a new window, light, opening, doorway, pathway, Conduit or other encroachment or easement being made or acquired in, against, out of, or upon the Premises.

 

15.2 The Tenant shall co-operate with the Landlord in relation to any measures taken by the Landlord to prevent any new window, light, opening, doorway, pathway, Conduit or other encroachment or easement being made or acquired in, against, out of, or upon the Premises.

 

16. LANDLORD’S RIGHTS

The Tenant shall permit the Landlord and any persons authorised by the Landlord to exercise any right excepted and reserved by Schedule 2.

 

15


17. COSTS

The Tenant shall pay all reasonable and proper liability, costs, fees, charges, disbursements and expenses connected with, incidental to, consequent upon:

 

17.1 an application for the Landlord’s consent (whether or not the consent is given or the application is withdrawn except in circumstances where the consent has been unlawfully withheld or offered subject to an unlawful condition which condition has not within a reasonable time been withdrawn);

 

17.2 a schedule of dilapidations during the Term or after the End of the Term but served within 6 months of the End of the Term (including such costs referred to above as are incurred in proper contemplation of the service of such schedule);

 

17.3 notice pursuant to a provision of the Lease or under sections 146 or 147 of the Law of Property Act 1925 and proceedings under those sections even if forfeiture is avoided otherwise than by relief granted by the court;

 

17.4 the recovery of arrears of Rent or other sums payable under the Lease;

 

17.5 the enforcement of any covenant or obligation of the Tenant under the Lease; and/or

 

17.6 where the Landlord is permitted in this Lease to do so complying with a Legal Obligation and/or a repair other obligation in this Lease if the Tenant does not do so.

 

18. INTEREST

Without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Landlord, the Tenant shall pay to the Landlord Interest on any Rent and VAT (if applicable) which is not paid to the Landlord within seven days of the date it is due (whether payment is formally demanded or not) and Interest on any other sum which is not paid to the Landlord within seven days of the date it is due.

 

19. INDEMNITY

The Tenant shall indemnify and keep the Landlord indemnified from and against all actions proceedings costs claims and demands by third parties in respect of any damage and/or liability caused by or arising from the state or condition of the Premises or their use or occupation by the Tenant and/or the Tenant’s servants agents or invitees and/or arising as a result of the Tenant refusing the Landlord access to the Premises to carry out any of the Services and/or otherwise arising as a result of any breach of the Tenant’s obligations under this Lease.

 

20. YIELDING UP

At the End of the Term the Tenant shall if and to the extent required by the Landlord:

 

  20.1.1 remove all signs and tenant’s fixtures and fittings and furniture and effects making good any damage to the Premises so caused;

 

  20.1.2 remove and/or reinstate any alterations or additions to the Premises making good any damage to the Premises so caused;

 

16


  20.1.3 yield up the Premises in a state and condition consistent with due compliance by the Tenant with its covenants and obligations under the Lease and for the avoidance of doubt in no better condition than as evidenced by the Schedule of Condition, subject always to the additional obligations in Clauses 20.1.4 and 20.1.5;

 

  20.1.4 use all reasonable endeavours to obtain planning permission for the change of use of the Premises to office (B1) user, and to ensure that if such planning permission is obtained all laws, regulations, Legal Obligations and conditions related to such planning permission are satisfied and completed (as the case may be) with the intent that the Premises shall be ready for an office (B1) occupier to commence its fit out of the Premises and that immediately after such fit out the Premises shall be ready to lawfully be used as an office; and

 

  20.1.5 yield up the Premises as offices in a state and configuration:

 

  20.1.5.1 in respect of the Existing Premises in a configuration equivalent to and in no better condition than as evidenced by the Schedule of Condition; and

 

  20.1.5.2 in respect of the New Premises as open plan offices compliant with all laws, regulations and Legal Obligations, the design of which is to be approved in advance by the Landlord (whose approval is not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed),

compliant with all Legal Obligations of any relevant Authority including without limitation current building regulations (or equivalent regulations) so as to be ready for tenant fit out, including for the avoidance of doubt the enclosing of the fifth floor of the Premises with a wind and watertight roof, the design of which is to be approved in advance by the Landlord (whose approval is not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) such that for the avoidance of doubt that the fifth floor of the Premises shall be open plan offices, and provided also that the Tenant shall provide adequate disabled access to the fifth floor of the Premises,

provided that subject to the above provisions the Tenant shall not be obliged to remove the Tenant’s Works.

 

21. TENANT’S WORKS

 

21.1 Conditional upon having received all necessary Approvals, the Tenant shall carry out and complete the Tenant’s Works and shall take all reasonably practicable steps to procure that the Tenant’s Works are carried out:

 

  21.1.1 at the sole cost and charge of the Tenant in a good and workmanlike manner and in accordance with good building practice

 

  21.1.2 in accordance with the specifications and drawings referred to in Schedule 6 hereto;

 

  21.1.3 using good quality and suitable materials;

 

17


  21.1.4 with due diligence;

 

  21.1.5 in accordance with the Approvals;

 

  21.1.6 in compliance with all statutes, statutory orders and regulations made under them or deriving validity from them and any appropriate requirements of any relevant Authority and all Legal Obligations so far as relevant to the Building;

 

  21.1.7 in accordance with all relevant current British Standards and codes of practice;

 

  21.1.8 without the use of any Prohibited Materials;

 

  21.1.9 and completed to the reasonable satisfaction of the Landlord by August 2012.

 

21.2 The Tenant shall give written notice to the Landlord as soon as reasonably practicable once the Works have been completed so that the Landlord may make its final inspection and as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter to send for retention by the Landlord two hard copies and two electronic copies of the drawings showing the Tenant’s Works together with a written specification and narrative of the Works as carried out to the Premises and copies of all consents licences and permissions obtained by or on behalf of the Tenant in connection with the Works.

 

21.3 The Tenant covenants with the Landlord:

 

  21.3.1 in carrying out the Tenant’s Works not to cause any nuisance or disturbance to the Landlord or its tenants or the owners or occupiers of any adjacent or neighbouring premises and not to cause any physical damage to the same through the carrying out of the Works;

 

  21.3.2 during the course of the Tenant’s Works not to cause or knowingly permit the infringement or interruption of any right enjoyed by the owners or occupiers of any adjoining or proximate premises;

 

  21.3.3 as soon as practicable at the expense of the Tenant to make good all damage caused to any adjoining or proximate premises to the Premises or suffered by the owners or occupiers thereof or any one or more of them arising out of the Tenant’s Works;

 

  21.3.4 without prejudice to the rights of the Landlord hereunder, to permit the Landlord to enter upon the Premises at all reasonable times of the day and on no less than 48 hours’ prior notice accompanied by at least one of the Tenant’s employees (which the tenant covenants to provide within the 48 hour notice period) to inspect the state and progress of the Tenant’s Works and the materials used or intended for use therein, and to provide to the Landlord such information and documents in connection with the Tenant’s Works as may be reasonably required by the Landlord;

 

  21.3.5 to indemnify and keep indemnified the Landlord against all liability costs claims expenses and demands howsoever arising out of or in the course of the execution of the Tenant’s Works and in particular (but without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing) to indemnify and keep indemnified the Landlord against any charge that may be imposed under the Town and Country Planning Acts or any charge levy or tax which may become payable by the Landlord directly or indirectly arising as a result of the execution of the Tenant’s Works;

 

18


  21.3.6 unless the Landlord shall otherwise direct to carry out before the expiration or sooner determination of the Term any works stipulated or required to be carried out to the Premises by a date subsequent to such expiration or sooner determination as a condition of any consent licence permission or approval which may have been applied for by the Tenant and granted during the Term;

 

  21.3.7 to carry out any electrical works included in the Tenant’s Works only in accordance with the terms and conditions laid down by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and the regulations of the electricity supply authority and any works to the gas installation included in the Tenant’s Works in accordance with the regulations and requirements of the relevant gas company or gas authority;

 

  21.3.8 to use all reasonable endeavours to ensure that the principal contractor or other relevant person responds adequately, satisfactorily and within a reasonable time to any comment, complaint or representation of the Landlord in respect of the Tenant’s Works and/or any matter connected with or relating to the Tenant’s Works;

 

  21.3.9 to effect and maintain at all times throughout the Term with a well established insurance office of repute adequate public liability, employers’ liability and all risks insurance in respect of the carrying out of the Tenant’s Works, and to insure the Tenant’s Works themselves until Practical Completion, at which point the insurance provisions in Clause 22 shall apply. and to provide the Landlord on demand evidence of the existence of such insurance and its terms, and to provide the Landlord on demand evidence of the existence of such insurance and its terms;

 

  21.3.10 (if applicable) to comply with the provisions of the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2007 and any other relevant and appropriate regulations (the “ CDM Regulations ”) and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing:

 

  21.3.10.1 to appoint a principal contractor and where necessary a planning supervisor;

 

  21.3.10.2 to use all reasonable endeavours to procure that any person owing duties under the CDM Regulations in respect of the Tenant’s Works complies therewith;

 

  21.3.10.3 to compile a health and safety plan prior to the commencement of the Tenant’s Works in accordance with the requirements of the CDM Regulations;

 

19


  21.3.10.4 to procure that the health and safety file and any other file and documents relating to the Tenant’s Works (the “File”) is available for inspection;

 

  21.3.10.5 to supply such information relating to the File as the Landlord reasonably requires; and

 

  21.3.10.6 to supply to the Landlord without charge a copy of the File.

 

21.4 The Tenant covenants with the Landlord that in the event that the Tenant’s Works and/or any equipment which is placed on the fifth floor/plant deck of the Premises is proven to be interfering with the Telecoms Equipment (provided for the avoidance of doubt that the phrase “ interferes with ” shall include interference with any telecommunications signals related to the Telecoms Equipment as well as physical interference therewith) and/or cause the Landlord to breach either or both of the Telecoms Agreements, the Tenant shall:

 

  21.4.1 shall take all reasonable steps to:

 

  21.4.1.1 prevent interference with the Telecoms Equipment; and/or

 

  21.4.1.2 remedy any such aforementioned breach of the Telecoms Agreements,

Provided That the Tenant shall not be obliged to cease the operation of any of its equipment, remove or relocate any of its equipment from the fifth floor/plant deck of the Premises,

Provided That that the Tenant may in order to comply with its obligations in this Clause be required to remove the parapet wall, glazed plant screens, louvres, cladding and the like from the fifth floor/plant deck of the Premises, but not any other part of the Tenant’s Works;

 

  21.4.2 indemnify and keep the Landlord indemnified from and against all actions proceedings costs claims and demands by third parties in connection with any such interference and/or breach; and

 

  21.4.3 comply with the terms of its correspondence on the matter between the tenant and each of Vodafone and Orange,

Provided always that in relation to such indemnity the Landlord shall use all reasonable endeavours to mitigate any claim or loss suffered as a result of any claim in relation to the Telecoms Equipment, shall not settle any claim in relation to the Telecoms Equipment without the prior written consent of the Tenant such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed, and shall permit the Tenant to defend (in the name of the Landlord if necessary and providing a costs indemnity to the Landlord) any claim made in relation to the Telecom’s Equipment and shall provide the Tenant with all reasonable assistance and information in this respect.

 

21.5 Nothing in this Lease constitutes a representation by or on behalf of the Landlord as to the suitability of the Tenant’s Works or as to the quality or fitness for their purpose of the Tenant’s Works.

 

20


21.6 Neither this Lease nor any of the correspondence which the Tenant may have had with the Landlord or its respective advisers concerning the Tenant’s Works constitutes notice under the Landlord and Tenant Act 1927 or the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954 of an intention to make improvements and the Undertenant shall have no entitlement to compensation in respect of the Works.

 

21.7 The Tenant shall pay on demand the reasonable fees and costs of the Landlord (including without limitation architects, building surveyors and structural engineers fees) as may be properly incurred by the Landlord in connection with the consideration, inspection and approval of the Tenant’s Works and in respect of the yielding up of the Premises upon the expiration or sooner determination of the Term.

 

21.8 In carrying out the Tenant’s Works the Tenant must ensure that the parts of the Party Wall being constructed by the Tenant comply with the required ‘load take down’ in relation to those parts of the Party Wall as shown on the Plan titled ‘Proposed Loads Along Party Wall with Block D’.

 

21.9 The Tenant shall not be liable for any delay in carrying out the Tenant’s Works resulting from Force Majeure.

 

21.10 The Tenant shall use all reasonable endeavours to procure that a collateral warranty substantially in the form attached at Schedule 7 is provided by the Tenant’s main building contractors to the Landlord within 45 days of the date of this Lease.

PART FOUR: INSURANCE

 

22. DEFINITIONS

Where in this part the following words in bold type commence with capital letters they have the following meanings unless the context otherwise requires:

Insurance means insurance effected in such insurance office of repute, or with such underwriters, and through such agency as the Landlord may decide, and subject to such excesses, exclusions, limitations and conditions as the insurer may require or the Landlord may properly negotiate and covering:

 

  22.1.1 the Building (but specifically excluding tenant’s and trade fixtures and fittings and also excluding any plant and machinery at the Premises) against the Insured Risks for such sum as the Landlord shall reasonably consider to be sufficient to cover the cost of reinstatement assuming total loss, including all applicable VAT and ancillary costs (such as site clearance and professional fees) and appropriate allowance for inflation;

 

  22.1.2 Loss of Rent;

 

  22.1.3 third party and property owner’s liability insurance at the Building for such sum as the Landlord may from time to time consider prudent; and/or

 

  22.1.4 such matters in relation to the Building not otherwise specifically mentioned in the Lease as the Landlord from time to time reasonably considers prudent in accordance with the principles of good estate management;

Insured Risks means risks of loss or damage by fire, storm, tempest, flood, lightning, explosion, aircraft, articles dropped from aircraft, riot, civil commotion, terrorism (subject to such cover against terrorism being available at a proper and reasonable commercial cost in the UK insurance market), malicious damage, impact, bursting and overflowing of water tanks, apparatus and pipes (but excluding such risks as the Landlord in its reasonable discretion considers cannot be insured against in the UK market at a reasonable rate) and risks of loss or damage by such other perils against which the Landlord may acting reasonably insure ;

 

21


Loss of Rent means the loss of all Rent and other sums payable under the Lease for such period (being not more than three years) as the Landlord may from time to time reasonably consider sufficient to complete reinstatement of the Premises following a total loss and for such sum as takes into account any likely rent review during that period.

 

23. LANDLORD’S INSURANCE COVENANTS

The Landlord covenants with the Tenant that the Landlord shall:

 

23.1 effect and maintain Insurance (but in respect of the Premises only so far as it is not vitiated by any act, neglect or default of the Tenant, anyone deriving title through the Tenant or anyone at the Premises with the express or implied authority of either of them);

 

23.2 upon reasonable request from time to time produce to the Tenant a copy or full details of the policies of Insurance and evidence that they are in force;

 

23.3 in the event of any loss or damage against which it has covenanted to effect Insurance, apply all monies received from the insurer (other than in relation to Loss of Rent, legal and other costs and expenses) and from the Tenant pursuant to Clause 24 in making good such loss or damage carrying out any necessary works of reinstatement as soon as reasonably practicable; and

 

23.4 use its reasonable endeavours to obtain reasonable rates of insurance premiums in the insurance market.

 

24. ABATEMENT OF RENT

 

24.1 If the Building or any access to it is destroyed or so damaged by an Insured Risk so that the Premises are wholly or partially unfit for or incapable of occupation and use and Insurance has not been vitiated nor any payment refused by reason of some act, neglect or default of the Tenant, someone deriving title through the Tenant, or some person with the express or implied authority of either of them, then the Rent, or a fair proportion thereof according to the nature and extent of the damage sustained, shall cease to be payable until:

 

  24.1.1 the Premises or access thereto are again fit for occupation and use; or

 

  24.1.2 the expiry of three years from the date of such damage,

(whichever is the earlier), provided that if at the expiry of the period of three years from such damage the Premises or means of access thereto have not been rendered fit for occupation and use then the Tenant shall be permitted on giving no less than one month’s prior written notice to the Landlord to determine this Lease Provided that such determination shall be without prejudice to the rights and remedies of either party in respect of any antecedent breaches of this Lease by the other.

 

22


24.2 A dispute as to the amount or duration of such cesser of Rent shall be referred to arbitration under the Arbitration Act 1996, the arbitrator to be appointed (failing agreement between the Parties) by the President of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors upon the application of either Landlord or Tenant.

 

25. TENANT’S INSURANCE COVENANTS

The Tenant covenants with the Landlord that the Tenant will:

 

25.1 pay to the Landlord upon demand the whole (or a fair proportion where applicable) of all premiums and other expenses (including without limitation valuation fees) incurred by the Landlord in effecting and maintaining Insurance (including without limitation for Loss of Rent), any such proportion to be determined by the Landlord acting reasonably;

 

25.2 effect and maintain at all times throughout the Term with a well established insurance office of repute insurance for any damage or loss in respect of usual third party and property owners risks (including for the avoidance of doubt in relation to the Tenant’s fixtures and fittings and any plant and machinery in the Premises) in the sum of Ten Million Pounds (£10,000,000) or such greater amount as the Landlord from time to time reasonably requires and to provide the Landlord on demand evidence of the existence of such insurance and its terms;

 

25.3 comply with the insurers’ requirements in relation to the Premises, and will not do or omit to do anything which may make any policy of Insurance in respect of the Building and/or any adjoining or proximate building void or voidable in whole or in part or increase the premium for any such policy, but if as a result of a breach of this covenant a premium is increased or a renewal of any policy is required then the Tenant will forthwith upon demand pay to the Landlord the whole of the cost of such increase or renewal;

 

25.4 as soon as reasonably practicable notify the Landlord of any loss, damage or destruction of or relating to the Premises and of any other event which comes to the attention of the Tenant and which may affect, or give rise to a claim under, a policy of Insurance;

 

25.5 forthwith upon demand pay to the Landlord an amount equal to all monies which the Landlord is unable to recover under a policy of Insurance by reason of an act, default or omission of the Tenant; and

 

25.6 not effect any insurance equivalent to the Insurance, but if in breach of this covenant it does so, it shall pay to the Landlord all monies received under such insurance.

PART FIVE: LANDLORD’S COVENANTS

 

26. QUIET ENJOYMENT

The Landlord covenants with the Tenant:

 

26.1 that, the Tenant paying the rents and other sums hereby reserved and performing and observing the covenants and obligations imposed on it hereunder, it will (subject to the terms of this Lease) permit the Tenant peaceably to hold and enjoy the Premises without any interruption from or by the Landlord or any person claiming under or in trust for the Landlord; and

 

23


26.2 to use reasonable endeavours to ensure that no activity or other thing takes place on the adjoining land of the Landlord comprised in freehold title number 86608 where the same shall prevent and/or materially prejudice and/or endanger the Permitted User of the Premises by the Tenant, provided always that nothing in this Clause shall prevent the carrying out of works to the Party Wall and/or to the foundations of Block C in connection with redevelopment works to Block C, but without prejudice to a claim by the Tenant in respect of direct losses caused by such works.

 

27. SERVICES

Subject to the payment by the Tenant of the Rent and Service Charge the Landlord will provide services appropriate to the management and maintenance of the Building including in particular:

 

27.1 the repair of the structure, walls, foundations and roofs of the Building in so far as not comprised in the Premises insofar as shall be necessary to procure that the Premises are fit for tenant fit out, occupation and use as a data centre, and are accessible. For the avoidance of doubt this Landlord repair obligation shall not include repair of any part of the New Premises;

 

27.2 the cleaning, lighting, maintenance and decoration of the Common Parts of the Building, including maintenance of plant and machinery within the Building, and the fire alarm system (if any) within the Building but not within the Premises;

 

27.3 the provision of a drainage and waste supply for the Premises to use for general (non-industrial purpose) drainage purposes;

 

27.4 the cleaning lighting and maintenance of appropriate external Common Parts of the Retained Property leading to the Premises;

 

27.5 the provision and/or contracting in the ordinary course of the Landlord’s business from time to time of a method (whether that be the provision of staff and/or machinery and/or other systems) to control the entry and egress of vehicles to and from the Old Truman Brewery;

 

27.6 any other services which in the ordinary course of the Landlord’s business from time to time the Landlord considers to be reasonable to implement in the interests of good estate management,

but the Landlord will have no liability to the Tenant:

 

  (a) for failure to provide a service due to damage, breakdown, inclement weather, shortage of fuel or water, Force Majeure, or any other cause beyond the Landlord’s reasonable control but in the case of such service not being available to the Tenant the Landlord will endeavour to notify the Tenant of the nature and likely duration of the service disruption and use all reasonable endeavours to rectify any problems with the services as soon as reasonably practicable;

 

24


  (b) for withdrawal of a service if the Landlord reasonably considers it is no longer appropriate in accordance with the principles of good estate management and the Tenant’s ability to carry on its normal trade and business from the Premises is not thereby materially affected;

 

  (c) for failure to provide any of the Services in the event that the Tenant refuses the Landlord entry onto the Premises.

COVENANTS IN SCHEDULE 2

 

27.7 The Landlord covenants comply with its obligations set out in Schedules 1 and 2.

PART SIX: RENT REVIEW

 

28. DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

28.1 Where in this part of the Lease the following words in bold type commence with capital letters they have the following meanings unless the context otherwise requires:

Open Market Rent is as defined in Clause 30;

First Review Date means 1 November 2016;

Second Review Date means 1 November 2021;

Relevant Review Date shall mean the First Review Date or the Second Review Date as the context allows.

 

28.2 Time is not of the essence.

 

29. REVIEW OF RENT

 

29.1 From and including the First Review Date to and including 30 October 2017 the Rent shall be the higher of:

 

  29.1.1 * * * per annum in respect of the Existing Premises and * * * per annum in respect of the New Premises; and

 

  29.1.2 the Open market Rent as agreed or determined under this part of the Lease.

 

29.2 From and including the Second Review Date to and including 30 October 2022 the Rent shall be the higher of:

 

  29.2.1 * * * per annum in respect of the Existing Premises and * * * per annum in respect of the New Premises;

 

  29.2.2 the Open market Rent as agreed or determined under this part of the Lease; and

 

  29.2.3 the amount payable (but for any abatement of Rent) immediately prior to the Second Review Date increased by four per cent (4%).

 

29.3 For other periods during the Term the Rent is subject to further review in accordance with the provisions of Schedule 3 and this Part 6 of the Lease.

 

25


30. OPEN MARKET RENT

Open Market Rent means the full yearly rent which would reasonably be expected to become payable in respect of the Premises on the Relevant Review Date:

 

30.1 upon a letting of the Premises:

 

  30.1.1 as a whole;

 

  30.1.2 by a willing landlord to a willing tenant;

 

  30.1.3 with vacant possession;

 

  30.1.4 on the open market;

 

  30.1.5 without a fine or premium;

 

  30.1.6 for a term of thirteen years five months and five days commencing on the Review Date;

 

  30.1.7 including provisions for review of rent equivalent to those in this Lease, which for the avoidance of doubt provides for:

 

  (i) annual increases in rent of 4.5% from the previous year’s rent on the anniversary of the date of commencement of the term at the commencement of the second third fourth and fifth years of the term, and annual increases in rent of 4% on the anniversary of the date of the commencement of the term at the commencement of each year during the remainder of the term; and

 

  (ii) in addition to the annual increases in rent referred to in Clause 30.1.7 (i) above, an open market rent review at the commencement of the sixth year of the term and at the commencement of the eleventh year of the term of the hypothetical lease; and

 

  30.1.8 with the Service Charge at commencement of the hypothetical lease being:

 

  (i) on the First Review Date a sum equivalent to the Service Charge per annum payable by the Tenant for Year Six (as defined in Schedule 4) of the Term; and

 

  (ii) on the Second Review Date a sum equivalent to the Service Charge per annum payable by the Tenant for Year Eleven (as defined in Schedule 4) of the Term; and

 

  (iii) with the Service Charge not increasing during the first year of the term and thereafter increasing annually by 4.5% at the commencement of the second third fourth and fifth years of the term, and increasing annually by 4% at the commencement of each year during the remainder of the term (but also subject to potential increase in accordance with the further provisions set out at Schedule 4);

 

  30.1.9 otherwise on the same terms as the Lease (except as to Clause 21) and the amount of the Rent and Service Charge);

 

26


30.2 assuming that:

 

  30.2.1 the covenants and provisions of the Lease on the part of the Tenant have been fully performed and observed;

 

  30.2.2 the Premises may be used for the Permitted User or as offices;

 

  30.2.3 if the Premises have been destroyed or damaged they have been fully restored;

 

  30.2.4 if the Premises or any means of access to it or any services serving the Premises have been destroyed or damaged they have been fully restored;

 

  30.2.5 the willing tenant has had the benefit of any rent free period as would be negotiated in the open market between a willing landlord and a willing tenant for fitting out the Premises;

 

  30.2.6 the Premises are fit for occupation and use;

 

  30.2.7 no work has been carried out to the Premises which has diminished their rental value save for those required by statute;

 

  30.2.8 the willing tenant and its potential assignees and undertenants shall not be disadvantaged by any actual or potential election to waive exemption from VAT in relation to the Premises;

 

  30.2.9 any fixtures, fittings, machinery or equipment supplied to the Premises by the Landlord that have been removed by or at the request of the Tenant or any undertenant or their respective predecessors in title (otherwise than to comply with any law) remain at the Premises;

 

  30.2.10 any licence or permission required by law for the use of the Premises for the Permitted User and/or office user (in the event that it is assumed pursuant to Clause 30.2.2 that the Premises are used as offices) and/or any other use which has at the Relevant Review Date been granted by the relevant Authority has been obtained and is available for the benefit of any willing tenant;

 

  30.2.11 the Tenant’s Works have been completed in accordance with the Approvals;

 

  30.2.12 the Existing Premises are in configuration consistent with the yielding up obligations of the Tenant at the End of the Term; and

 

  30.2.13 the New Premises are in a configuration consistent with either:

 

  30.2.13.1 their configuration on the Relevant Review Date (but subject to the disregard set out at Clause 30.3.5) if it is being assumed that the Premises may be used for the Permitted User; or

 

  30.2.13.2 the yielding up obligations of the Tenant at the End of the Term if it is being assumed that the Premises may be used as offices,

 

27


30.3 but disregarding:

 

  30.3.1 any effect on rent of the fact that the Tenant, any undertenant or any of their respective predecessors in title have been in occupation of the Premises;

 

  30.3.2 any adverse effect upon rent of any temporary works, operations or other activities on any adjoining or neighbouring property;

 

  30.3.3 any goodwill attached to the Premises as a result of any business carried on at the Premises by the Tenant, any undertenant, or any of their respective predecessors in title;

 

  30.3.4 any statutory restriction on rents or the right to recover them;

 

  30.3.5 any effect upon rent attributable to any alteration carried out to the Premises by the Tenant or any permitted undertenant at the Tenant’s own cost and not pursuant to an obligation to the Landlord, provided for the avoidance of doubt that this ‘disregard’ shall not apply to the Tenant Works; and

 

  30.3.6 any statutory restriction on rents or the right to recover them.

 

31. PROCEDURE

 

31.1 The Landlord may serve upon the Tenant notice during the period of nine months before, or at any time after, the Relevant Review Date requiring the Rent to be increased with effect from the Relevant Review Date, or stating that the Rent is not to be increased.

 

31.2 If the Landlord serves notice requiring the Rent to be increased ( Review Notice ), the Landlord and the Tenant shall endeavour to agree the Open Market Rent as at the Relevant Review Date.

 

31.3 If the Landlord and the Tenant do not agree the Open Market Rent within three months after service of a Review Notice, or by the date three months before the Relevant Review Date (whichever is the later), either may by notice to the other require the Open Market Rent as at the Relevant Review Date to be determined by a Chartered Surveyor having at least ten years’ experience in assessing the rental value of premises similar to the Premises and acting as a single expert or as a single arbitrator as the Landlord shall direct (the “ Surveyor ”), and for the avoidance of doubt the Parties agree that each Party shall have the right to make representations to the Surveyor.

 

31.4 If the Landlord and the Tenant do not agree on the joint appointment of a Surveyor, the Surveyor shall be nominated on the joint application of the Landlord and the Tenant (or if either of them neglects to concur in such application then on the sole application of the other) by the President or other chief officer or acting chief officer for the time being of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors.

 

31.5 The Surveyor shall, within three months of his appointment or within such extended period as the Landlord may agree, give to the Landlord and the Tenant written notice of the amount of the Open Market Rent as determined by him, but if he does not, or if for any reason it becomes apparent that he will not be able to, complete his duties in accordance with his appointment, the Landlord and the Tenant may agree upon, or either of them may apply for, the appointment of another Surveyor (which procedure may be repeated as often as necessary) pursuant to the provisions of this Clause.

 

28


31.6 If the Surveyor acts as an arbitrator he shall act in accordance with the Arbitration Act 1996.

 

31.7 The Landlord and the Tenant shall each be responsible for their own costs in relation to the review of the Rent pursuant to Part 6 of the Lease, and the costs of the Surveyor shall be paid as determined by the Surveyor but failing such determination by the Landlord and the Tenant in equal shares.

 

32. DELAYED REVIEW

Where the Rent payable with effect from the Relevant Review Date is not ascertained prior to the Relevant Review Date the Tenant shall:

 

32.1 with effect from the

 

  32.1.1 First Review Date pay an Interim Rent at the rate of * * * per annum in respect of the Existing Premises and * * * per annum in respect of the New Premises; and

 

  32.1.2 Second Review Date pay an Interim Rent at the rate being the higher of

 

  32.1.2.1 * * * per annum in respect of the Existing Premises and * * * in respect of the New Premises; and

 

  32.1.2.2 the rate at which Rent was payable (ignoring any abatement) immediately prior to the Second Review Date increased by four per cent (4%); and

 

32.2 if the Rent when ascertained exceeds the Interim Rent, then within fourteen days of the Rent being ascertained (the Payment Date ) pay to the Landlord an amount equal to the aggregate of the sums by which each quarterly installment of Rent would have exceeded each installment of Interim Rent had the Rent been ascertained by the Relevant Review Date together with Interest on each of those sums from the date it would have been due to the Payment Date at a rate 3% below the Interest Rate.

 

33. MEMORANDA

Where Rent is increased with effect from the Relevant Review Date the Landlord and Tenant shall (at their own cost) sign memoranda thereof in such form as the Landlord may reasonably require for annexation to both the original and counterpart of the Lease.

PART SEVEN: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

 

34. RECOVERY OF MONEY

In addition to any other remedy available to the Landlord all moneys due from the Tenant to the Landlord under the Lease may be recovered as if such moneys were reserved as rent.

 

29


35. USER

The Landlord does not warrant that the Premises may lawfully be used for any purpose authorised under the Lease.

 

36. EASEMENTS

 

36.1 The Tenant is not entitled to, and the Premises do not enjoy any right of light or air which might restrict or interfere with the free use of any other property for building or any other purpose.

 

36.2 The operation of Section 62 of the Law of Property Act 1925 is excluded from the Lease and the only rights granted with the Premises are those expressly granted in the Lease.

 

37. EXERCISE OF RIGHTS OF ENTRY

A person exercising any right of entry to the Premises granted or reserved under the Lease must:

 

  37.1.1 not exercise such right unless accompanied by an employee of the Tenant, and in this respect the Tenant covenants to make an employee available within the relevant period;

 

  37.1.2 exercise the right in a manner which causes as little damage and inconvenience as is reasonably practicable in the circumstances; and

 

  37.1.3 make good any physical damage caused as soon as is reasonably practicable.

 

38. LIABILITY

The Landlord shall not be liable for any injury or damage to any person or property by the state or condition of the Premises or the fixtures and fittings in or about the same or the user thereof whether arising by accident or by reason of any negligence or other acts of the Tenant or of any person or persons employed by it and shall be indemnified by the Tenant against all liability in respect thereof.

 

39. NOTICES

 

39.1 Any notice by one party (the sender ) to another (the recipient ) must be in writing.

 

39.2 A notice is duly served if given by any means from time to time authorised by law including:

 

  39.2.1 if delivered to the recipient;

 

  39.2.2 if sent by first class special delivery or recorded delivery post addressed to the recipient;

in each case at an authorised address.

 

30


39.3 Any notice so served shall be deemed to have been received as follows:

 

  39.3.1 if delivered – on the day of delivery if delivered at least two hours before the close of business hours on a business day and in any other case on the next business day;

 

  39.3.2 if sent by post (otherwise than at a time when the sender is or ought reasonably to be aware of a disruption of the relevant postal service) – three business days after posting, exclusive of the day of posting;

 

39.4 For the purposes of this Clause:

 

  39.4.1 an authorised address means any of the following:

 

  39.4.1.1 in the case of a company its registered office;

 

  39.4.1.2 in the case of an individual his address as stated in this deed or other address last known to the sender;

 

  39.4.1.3 in the case of a partnership its principal place of business as stated in this deed or other principal place of business last known to the sender;

 

  39.4.2 a business day means any day expect Saturday Sunday or a bank or public holiday;

 

  39.4.3 business hours means the hours of 9.30 a.m. to 5.30 p.m. on a business day.

PART EIGHT: FORFEITURE

 

40. RIGHT OF RE-ENTRY

The Landlord may forfeit the Lease (and thereupon this demise shall absolutely determine but without prejudice to any right of action or remedy of either party in respect of any breach of the covenants herein contained) by proceedings or by re-entering the Premises (or part of them as if re-entering the whole) if:

 

40.1 any Rent or any other sum payable by the Tenant to the Landlord remains unpaid 21 days after it is due (whether formally demanded or not);

 

40.2 any covenant or stipulation in the Lease which is to be performed or observed by the Tenant is not performed or observed; or

 

40.3 the Tenant (or any one party included within the definition of the Tenant) or any guarantor for the Tenant becomes Insolvent (as defined in the next Clause).

 

41. INSOLVENCY

Insolvent means for the purposes of this part of the Lease:

 

41.1 for a company:

 

  41.1.1 the appointment of a receiver, administrative receiver, liquidator or administrator;

 

31


  41.1.2 the making of a voluntary arrangement;

 

  41.1.3 any other analogous event from time to time in England and Wales or any other applicable jurisdiction;

but excluding a voluntary liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction;

 

41.2 for an individual:

 

  41.2.1 the appointment of a receiver or a trustee in bankruptcy;

 

  41.2.2 the making of an individual voluntary arrangement or deed of arrangement;

 

  41.2.3 any other analogous event from time to time in England and Wales or any other applicable jurisdiction;

 

41.3 for a partnership:

 

  41.3.1 the appointment of a receiver, liquidator or administrator

 

  41.3.2 the making of a voluntary arrangement

 

  41.3.3 any other analogous event from time to time in England and Wales or any other applicable jurisdiction.

PART NINE: CERTIFICATION, THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, CONSENTS AND APPROVALS, JURISDICTION, LEASE CONTRACTED OUT OF THE LANDLORD AND TENANT ACT 1954, EXCLUSION OF COMPENSATION, STAMP DUTY LAND TAX, DELIVERY

 

42. CERTIFICATION

This is a new tenancy for the purposes of the Landlord and Tenant (Covenants) Act 1995.

 

43. THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

Unless otherwise stated in this Lease no person other than the Landlord or the Tenant may enforce any term of the Lease.

 

44. CONSENTS AND APPROVALS

For the avoidance of doubts consents and approvals given under this Lease must be in writing.

 

45. JURISDICTION

 

45.1 The Lease shall be governed by and construed in accordance with English law.

 

45.2 Each Party submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts in respect of all matters arising out of the Lease, but the Landlord shall have the right to bring proceedings in the courts of any other jurisdiction for the purpose of enforcing a judgment.

 

32


46. LEASE CONTRACTED OUT OF THE LANDLORD AND TENANT ACT 1954

 

46.1 The Landlord and the Tenant agree to exclude the provisions of section 24 to 28 of the Landlord and Tenant Act 1954 in relation to the tenancy created by this Lease.

 

46.2 The Landlord has served on the Tenant a notice in the form, or substantially in the form, set out in Schedule 1 to the Regulatory Reform (Business Tenancies) (England and Wales) Order 2003 (the Order ).

 

46.3 The requirements specified in Schedule 2 to the Order have been met in that the Tenant has made the appropriate declaration in the form, or substantially in the form, set out in Schedule 2 to the Order.

 

47. EXCLUSION OF COMPENSATION

Any statutory right of the Tenant to claim compensation from the Landlord (for improvements or otherwise) upon vacating the Premises at the End of the Term is excluded to full extent that the law permits.

 

48. STAMP DUTY LAND TAX

The Tenant must pay all taxes due in respect of this Lease, and will supply the Landlord with documentary evidence of the payment of the same.

 

49. DELIVERY

This deed remains undelivered until the date hereof.

IN WITNESS whereof the Parties have executed this Lease as a Deed the day and year first above written.

 

33


SCHEDULE 1 – RIGHTS

The Tenant and those deriving title through or otherwise authorised by the Tenant shall have the following rights in common with others during the Term:

 

1. Full right and liberty at all times of pedestrian access to and egress from the ‘Front Entrance’ of the Premises as the same is shown edged and annotated in pink for identification purposes only on the Plan titled ‘Access Plan’ (the “ Access Plan ”) along such route or routes as shall from time to time be designated by the Landlord in the absolute discretion of the Landlord, provided always that the person exercising any such right shall not cause a nuisance damage interference or annoyance to the Landlord and/or to any other tenant or occupier within the Old Truman Brewery, provided that the Landlord shall ensure that there is at all times adequate pedestrian access to and egress from the Premises.

 

2. Full right and liberty, subject to the provisions set out below, of:

 

2.1 pedestrian access to and egress from the ‘ Goods Entrance of the Premises as the same is shown edged and annotated for identification purposes only in pink on the Access Plan (the “ Goods Entrance ”); and

 

2.2 vehicular access to and egress from the point marked ‘A’ on the Access Plan at all times (subject to the provisions below) for the purposes of:

 

  (i) deliveries to and from the Premises in connection with the Tenant’s trade from the Premises; and

 

  (ii) emergency purposes,

such access referred to in paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2 being along such route or routes as shall from time to time be designated by the Landlord in the absolute discretion of the Landlord provided that (subject to the provisions set out below) the Landlord shall ensure that there is at all times such pedestrian and vehicular access,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT for the avoidance of doubt in respect of that part of the route to the Goods Entrance between the points marked ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the Access Plan the route and the access and egress rights shall be pedestrian only, and not vehicular, and

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT for the avoidance of doubt that the Access Plan is provided for identification purposes only, is not to scale, and is not conclusive as to the size or extent of the Premises (in respect of which the relevant Plans titled ‘Premises Plan’ shall be conclusive as to the size and extent of the Premises),

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT in the event of construction and/or other major works to the Retained Property which render the route to the Goods Entrance via the points marked ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the Access Plan unusable:

 

  (a) the Landlord shall seek to provide the Tenant pedestrian access to and egress from the Goods Entrance via such route or routes as shall from time to time be designated by the Landlord in the absolute discretion of the Landlord between the points marked ‘C’ and ‘D’ on the Access Plan; and

 

34


  (b) the Tenant shall, solely for the period that the usual route to the Goods Entrance (via the points marked ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the Access Plan) is unusable, have the full right and liberty of vehicular access to and egress from the Front Entrance of the Premises and also to the point marked ‘C’ on the Access Plan for the purpose of deliveries along such route or routes as shall from time to time be designated by the Landlord in the absolute discretion of the Landlord,

provided that at the relevant times the Landlord shall ensure that there is at all times adequate vehicular access to the Front Entrance of the Premises and the point marked ‘C’ on the Access Plan,

but not further or otherwise,

and PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT:

 

  (I) the person exercising any such right shall not cause a nuisance damage interference or annoyance to the Landlord and/or to any other tenant or occupier within the Old Truman Brewery;

 

  (II) for the avoidance of doubt any right of vehicular access does not include a right to park any such vehicle in the Old Truman Brewery save for the purpose of deliveries as referred to above;

 

  (III) the Tenant shall comply with, and the Tenant shall direct the drivers of any vehicles entering the Old Truman Brewery for the purposes of making deliveries to the Tenant to comply with the applicable car parking regulations from time to time (which currently provide that vehicles remaining in the Old Truman Brewery whether for delivery purposes or otherwise for longer than 30 minutes are required to pay the appropriate car parking fee at that time); and

 

  (IV) (separate to the provisions above in respect of the suspension of access to and egress from the Goods Entrance) the Landlord may interrupt vehicular access to point marked ‘A’ on the Access Plan for temporary periods where necessary conditional upon the Landlord ensuring that the Tenant may unload or authorise the unloading of goods reasonably close to the point marked ‘A’ on the Access Plan so that the ability of the Tenant or a third party to deliver goods to the Goods Entrance is not materially affected, and in this respect the parties shall co-operate and act in good faith.

 

3. The right:

 

3.1 to lay such Conduits to exclusively serve the Premises as are identified on the following Plans along such routes as are identified below and on the following Plans:

 

  (a) eight (8 x) 100mm diameter fibre conduits along the route identified on the Plan titled ‘Fibre Connection to Front of Blk D. Drawing number 09-017-400/1, Rev B, October 2011’;

 

  (b) six (6 x) 100mm diameter fibre conduits along the route identified on the Plan titled ‘Fibre Connection to Rear of Block D. Drawing number 09-017-400/2, October 2011’; and

 

35


  (c) twelve (12 x) 32mm diameter high voltage electricity conduits along the routes identified on the Plan titled ‘HV cabling. Drawing number 09-017-400/3, Rev B’,

Provided always that the Tenant will consult in advance with the Landlord in relation to the exact and precise physical route of such Conduits and the manner of laying and attaching them prior to such laying, and shall have due regard to the Landlord’s reasonable requirements (acting reasonably) in this respect,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT the Landlord has the right (but only as reasonably necessary in connection with the development of a part of the Retained Property and/or any other reasonable requirement of the Landlord in relation to any of the Retained Property) to require the Tenant (at the Landlord’s cost) to reroute any such Conduit along such other route or routes as the Landlord shall determine in its absolute discretion PROVIDED THAT the Landlord gives the Tenant no less than three months’ prior notice in writing of any such re-routing requirement; and

 

3.2 subject to obtaining the prior written consent of the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion, to lay other Conduits to exclusively serve the Premises over such part or parts of the Retained Property as shall be previously approved in writing by the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion and (once the appropriate consent has been granted by the Landlord) to enter onto the appropriate parts of the Retained Property (on giving at least one month’s prior written notice except in the case of emergency) for the purpose for laying such Conduit,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT in the exercise of such right the Tenant shall procure that the Tenant and/or other third party exercising such right shall cause the minimum nuisance or damage reasonably possible to the Landlord and/or the other tenants and occupiers of the Old Truman Brewery and shall with all due diligence (and immediately in the case of emergency) reinstate and make good any damage caused in the exercise of such rights to the reasonable satisfaction of the Landlord and shall indemnify the Landlord against any liability howsoever incurred by the Landlord as a result of the Tenant or other third party exercising such right,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT any such works must be carried out under and subject to such licence to carry out such works as the Landlord may reasonably require which shall be executed between the Landlord and the Tenant,

and PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT the Landlord has the right (but only as reasonably necessary in connection with the development of a part of the Retained Property and/or any other reasonable requirement of the Landlord in relation to any of the Retained Property) to require the Tenant (at the Tenant’s own cost) to reroute any such Conduit along such other route or routes as the Landlord shall determine in its absolute discretion PROVIDED THAT the Landlord gives the Tenant no less than three months’ prior notice in writing of any such re-routing requirement.

 

4. The right to connect into and use (subject to the regulations of any appropriate authority) existing Conduits for the supply of electricity to the Premises.

 

36


5. The right, subject to obtaining the prior written consent of the Landlord (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) to enter (after at least seven days’ previous written notice except in the case of emergency) upon such parts of the Retained Property as are necessary for that purpose at reasonable times for the purpose of inspecting, repairing, cleansing, maintaining, amending, altering, replacing, relaying or renewing any Conduit the laying of which has previously been authorised under the terms of this Lease and which exclusively serves the Premises Provided That in the exercise of such right the Tenant shall procure that the Tenant and/or other third party exercising such right shall cause the minimum nuisance or damage reasonably possible to the Landlord and/or the other tenants and occupiers of the Old Truman Brewery and shall with all due diligence (and immediately in the case of emergency) reinstate and make good any damage caused in the exercise of such rights to the reasonable satisfaction of the Landlord and shall indemnify the Landlord against any liability howsoever incurred by the Landlord as a result of the Tenant or other third party exercising such right, provided always that the exercise of this right must be reasonably and practically possible, and in the case of any such inspecting, repairing, cleansing, maintaining, amending, altering, replacing, relaying or renewing which will require disruption to the Retained Property in terms of digging up any road surfaces the Tenant must (except in the case of emergency) give not less than 3 months’ prior notice in writing of its intention to exercise this right.

 

6. The right, subject to obtaining the prior written consent of the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion, to lay fibre optic and other cabling for the purpose of the use of the Premises for the Permitted User over such part or parts of the Retained Property as shall be previously approved in writing by the Landlord in the Landlord’s absolute discretion and (once the appropriate consent has been granted by the Landlord) to enter onto the appropriate parts of the Retained Property (on giving at least one month’s prior written notice except in the case of emergency) for the purpose for laying, relaying, repairing, replacing and maintaining such cabling,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT in the exercise of such right the Tenant shall procure that the Tenant and/or other third party exercising such right shall cause the minimum nuisance or damage reasonably possible to the Landlord and/or the other tenants and occupiers of the Old Truman Brewery and shall with all due diligence (and immediately in the case of emergency) reinstate and make good any damage caused in the exercise of such rights to the reasonable satisfaction of the Landlord and shall indemnify the Landlord against any liability howsoever incurred by the Landlord as a result of the Tenant or other third party exercising such right,

PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT any such works must be carried out under and subject to such licence to carry out such works as the Landlord may reasonably require which shall be executed between the Landlord and the Tenant,

and PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT the Landlord has the right (but only as reasonably necessary in connection with the development of a part of the Retained Property and/or any other reasonable requirement of the Landlord in relation to any of the Retained Property) to require the Tenant (at the Tenant’s own cost) to reroute any such fibre and/or other cabling that passes over, under or through the Retained Property along such other route or routes as the Landlord shall determine in its absolute discretion PROVIDED THAT the Landlord gives the Tenant no less than three months’ prior notice in writing of any such re-routing requirement.

 

7. The right of support and protection for the benefit of the Premises from all other parts of the Building.

 

8. The right at all reasonable times and upon reasonable written notice of not less than 48 hours (except in case of emergency) to enter upon the Common Parts of the Building in order to carry out works of maintenance to the Premises and for the purpose of observing the Tenant’s covenants and conditions contained in this Lease.

 

37


SCHEDULE 2 – EXCEPTIONS AND RESERVATIONS

 

1. All rights of support and protection afforded by the Premises.

 

2. The full, free and uninterrupted passage and running of water and soil, gas, electricity and all other services or supplies (if any) passing through the Premises for the benefit of the Retained Property for the Landlord and the owners, lessees or occupiers for the time being of nearby or adjoining premises through the Conduits which now, are or may hereafter be in, upon, over or under the Premises.

 

3. The full and free right and liberty giving at least 48 hours’ prior written notice (except in the case of emergency) to enter the Premises accompanied (except in the case of emergency) by at least one of the Tenant’s employees (which the Tenant covenants to provide within the 48 hour notice period) upon such parts of the Premises as are necessary for that purpose at all reasonable times for the purpose of connecting, laying, inspecting, repairing, removing, diverting, cleansing, maintaining, amending, altering, replacing, relaying or renewing any Conduit (if any) the person or persons so entering causing as little interference as reasonably possible to the Tenant in exercising such right and making good all damage thereby occasioned to the Premises as soon as reasonably practicable and to the reasonable satisfaction of the Tenant.

 

4. The full and free right and liberty (only where reasonably necessary) to erect scaffolding on the Retained Property provided that there shall be no material interference with access of air to the Premises or interference with any other right or easement, provided always that the Landlord must not interfere with the Tenant’s right to quiet enjoyment of the Premises (contained in Clause 26) and shall ensure that the rights of access to the Premises and supplies of water, gas and electricity and all telecommunication services of any description and drainage (where applicable) will be maintained at all times and ensure that the Tenant’s ability to carry on its normal trade and business from the Premises is not materially affected.

 

5. The full and free right and liberty after at least 48 hours’ prior written notice (except in the case of an emergency) accompanied by at least one of the Tenant’s employees (which the Tenant covenants to provide within the 48 hour notice period), at all reasonable times to enter upon the Premises to view the state and condition of the Premises and/or to inspect the Premises in order to ascertain whether the Tenant is complying with the Lease, the person exercising such right making good any damage to the Premises thereby occasioned as soon as reasonably practicable and to the reasonable satisfaction of the Tenant and causing as little interference as is reasonably practicable to the Tenant in exercising such rights.

 

6. The full and free right and liberty at reasonable times to enter the Premises after at least 48 hours’ notice (except in the case of an emergency) accompanied by at least one of the Tenant’s employees (which the Tenant covenants to provide within the 48 hour notice period) in connection with the security thereof and/or adjoining or neighbouring premises provided that the Landlord shall as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter make good any damage caused to the Premises and to the Tenant’s fixtures fittings and equipment.

 

7. The full and free right and liberty where reasonably necessary after at least 48 hours’ prior written notice (except in the case of an emergency) to enter upon the external parts of the Premises to carry out repair and/or construction work to the Retained Property and in addition to erect scaffolding on such external parts of the Retained Property provided that there shall be no material interference with access of air to the Premises or interference with any other right or easement, provided always that the Landlord must not interfere with the Tenant’s right to quiet enjoyment of the Premises (contained in Clause 26) and shall ensure that the rights of access to the Premises and supplies of water, gas and electricity and all telecommunication services of any description and drainage (where applicable) will be maintained at all times (including the use of any authorised air conditioning outlets) and ensure that the Tenant’s ability to carry on its normal trade and business from the Premises is not materially affected.

 

38


8. All rights of light and air enjoyed by the Premises over any premises within the Old Truman Brewery and/or any nearby or adjoining premises.

 

9. The Landlord shall have the right to affix cut into and enclose on the New Premises (including for example but without limitation, for attaching fixtures onto the outside of the New Premises and/or for the support of adjoining buildings/structures) provided always that:

 

9.1 this does not adversely affect the structure of the Premises;

 

9.2 in exercising such right the Landlord shall ensure that the Tenant’s ability to carry on its normal trade and business from the Premises is not materially affected and shall keep the Tenant reasonably informed of the intended times and dates that the Landlord will be exercising this right; and

 

9.3 any damage to the Premises thereby caused shall be made good as soon as reasonably practicable thereafter.

 

10. All rights which the Tenant covenants to permit under Part Three of the Lease.

 

11. The Landlord may in its own discretion change any of the emergency exits and/or emergency exit routes from the Premises, provided always that in so doing the number of permitted allowable persons in the Premises is not adversely affected, and provided always that in exercising such right the Landlord must make good all damage to the Premises and the Tenant’s fixtures and fittings thereby occasioned as soon as reasonably practicable and to the reasonable satisfaction of the Tenant and causing as little interference as reasonably possible to the Tenant in exercising such right such that the Tenant’s ability to carry on its normal trade and business from the Premises is not materially affected, and provided always that the Landlord must give the Tenant not less than three months prior written notice of its intention to exercise such right.

 

39


SCHEDULE 3 – RENT

Part 1 – Existing Premises

 

1. From and including the Term Commencement Date to and including 30 April 2012, * * *

 

2. From and including the Rent Commencement Date to and including 30 October 2012, * * * per annum.

 

3. From and including 1 November 2012 to and including 30 October 2013, * * * per annum.

 

4. From and including 1 November 2013 to and including 30 October 2014, * * * per annum.

 

5. From and including 1 November 2014 to and including 30 October 2015, * * * per annum.

 

6. From and including 1 November 2015 to and including 30 October 2016, * * * per annum.

 

7. From and including 1 November 2016 to and including 30 October 2017 (“ Year 6 ”), the higher of:

 

  (a) * * * per annum; and

 

  (b) the Rent per annum for the Premises agreed or determined pursuant to Part Six of this Lease.

 

8. From and including 1 November 2017 to and including 30 October 2018 (“ Year 7 ”), the rent per annum in Year 6 increased by 4 %.

 

9. From and including 1 November 2018 to and including 30 October 2019 (“ Year 8 ”), the rent per annum in Year 7 increased by 4%.

 

10. From and including 1 November 2019 to and including 30 October 2020 (“ Year 9 ”), the rent per annum in Year 8 increased by 4%.

 

11. From and including 1 November 2020 to and including 30 October 2021 (“ Year 10 ”), the rent per annum in Year 9 increased by 4%.

 

12. From and including 1 November 2021 to and including 30 October 2022 (“ Year 11 ”), the higher of:

 

  (a) * * * per annum;

 

  (b) the Rent per annum for the Premises agreed or determined pursuant to Part Six of this Lease; and

 

  (c) the amount payable (but for any abatement of Rent) in Year 10 increased by 4%.

 

13. From and including 1 November 2022 to and including 30 October 2023 (“ Year 12 ”), the rent per annum in Year 11 increased by 4%.

 

14. From and including 1 November 2023 to and including 30 October 2024 (“ Year 13 ”), the rent per annum in Year 12 increased by 4%.

 

15. From and including 1 November 2024 to and including 5 April 2025 (“ Year 14 ”), the rent per annum in Year 13 increased by 4%.

 

40


Part 2 – New Premises

 

1. From and including the Term Commencement Date to and including 19 March 2014, * * *.

 

2. From and including 20 March 2014 to and including 30 October 2014, * * * per annum.

 

3. From and including 1 November 2014 to and including 30 October 2015, * * * per annum.

 

4. From and including 1 November 2015 to and including 30 October 2016, * * * per annum.

 

5. From and including 1 November 2016 to and including 30 October 2017 (“ Year 6 ”), the higher of:

 

  (a) * * * per annum; and

 

  (b) the Rent per annum for the Premises agreed or determined pursuant to Part Six of this Lease.

 

6. From and including 1 November 2017 to and including 30 October 2018 (“ Year 7 ”), the rent per annum in Year 6 increased by 4 %.

 

7. From and including 1 November 2018 to and including 30 October 2019 (“ Year 8 ”), the rent per annum in Year 7 increased by 4%.

 

8. From and including 1 November 2019 to and including 30 October 2020 (“ Year 9 ”), the rent per annum in Year 8 increased by 4%.

 

9. From and including 1 November 2020 to and including 30 October 2021 (“ Year 10 ”), the rent per annum in Year 9 increased by 4%.

 

10. From and including 1 November 2021 to and including 30 October 2022 (“ Year 11 ”), the higher of:

 

  (a) * * * per annum;

 

  (b) the Rent per annum for the Premises agreed or determined pursuant to Part Six of this Lease; and

 

  (c) the amount payable (but for any abatement of Rent) in Year 10 increased by 4%.

 

11. From and including 1 November 2022 to and including 30 October 2023 (“ Year 12 ”), the rent per annum in Year 11 increased by 4%.

 

12. From and including 1 November 2023 to and including 30 October 2024 (“ Year 13 ”), the rent per annum in Year 12 increased by 4%.

 

13. From and including 1 November 2024 to and including 5 April 2025 (“ Year 14 ”), the rent per annum in Year 13 increased by 4%.

 

41


SCHEDULE 4

SERVICE CHARGE

 

1. The Service Charge payable by the Tenant shall be as follows:

 

  a. In respect of the Existing Premises, from the Term Commencement Date to and including 30 October 2012, * * * per annum.

 

  b. In respect of the Existing Premises, from and including 1 November 2012 to and including 30 October 2013 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge in respect of the Existing Premises increased by 4.5%).

 

  c. In respect of the New Premises, from the Term Commencement Date to and including the day before Practical Completion, £nil.

 

  d. In respect of the New Premises, from the date of Practical Completion to and including 30 October 2012, * * * per annum.

 

  e. In respect of the New Premises, from and including 1 November 2012 to and including 30 October 2013 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge in respect of the Existing Premises increased by 4.5%).

 

  f. From and including 1 November 2013 to and including 30 October 2014 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4.5%.

 

42


g. From and including 1 November 2014 to and including 30 October 2015 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4.5%.

 

h. From and including 1 November 2015 to and including 30 October 2016 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

i. From and including 1 November 2016 to and including 30 October 2017 (“ Year Six ”) the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

j. From and including 1 November 2017 to and including 30 October 2018 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

k. From and including 1 November 2018 to and including 30 October 2019 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

l. From and including 1 November 2019 to and including 30 October 2020 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

43


m. From and including 1 November 2020 to and including 30 October 2021 (“ Year 11 ”) the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

n. From and including 1 November 2021 to and including 30 October 2022 (“ Year Eleven ”) the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

o. From and including 1 November 2022 to and including 30 October 2023 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

p. From and including 1 November 2023 to and including [            ] 2024 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

q. From and including 1 November 2024 to and including 5 April 2025 the higher of:

 

  i. * * * per annum; and

 

  ii. in the event that the Service Charge has been increased pursuant to paragraph 2, the previous year’s Service Charge increased by 4%.

 

2. If the Landlord’s cost of provision of the Services increase to the extent that the Service Charge collected from the Tenant is insufficient to meet a proportion of the Landlord’s cost (including a reasonable management charge) of provision of the Services which is fair to be charged to the Tenant, then the Landlord shall be entitled, upon providing reasonable supporting evidence of the cost of the Services and of the fair proportion thereof to be paid by the Tenant, to increase the Service Charge by a fair amount acting reasonably, and the Tenant shall be obliged to pay such revised Service Charge in accordance with the provision of this Lease.

 

44


SCHEDULE 5

SCHEDULE OF CONDITION

Existing Premises Schedule of Condition

 

45


SCHEDULE 6

TENANT’S WORKS

The Tenant’s Works includes all of the works as are referred to below and as are in the drawings referred to below, provided always for the avoidance of doubt that in respect of the extent of the Premises the plans titled ‘Premises Plan’ shall be conclusive.

 

1. Removing the existing fire escape stairwell to the rear (North) of the Premises consisting of a steel staircase to the first second and third floors of the Existing Premises, to be dismantled, labelled and delivered up to the Landlord.

 

2. Building a new steel fire escape stairwell to the rear (North) of the Premises providing access to all floors of the Premises except the ground floor, as shown in more detail on the attached drawings.

 

3.

Building, installing and full commissioning of a new goods/passenger lift to the rear (North) of the Premises with a load level of 2,800 kg in accordance with the drawings attached and also the specification attached and titled ‘OUR QUOTE CE2978/1 – Dated 11 th MARCH 2011’ providing access to all floors of the Premises except in relation to the ground floor such access is external to the Premises.

 

4. In respect of the new staircase and goods/passenger lift to the rear (North) of the Premises, the enclosure to the same is to include a steel framework, brick fascia on the East and West elevations and a ‘kingspan’ cladding on the North elevation and roof, as further detailed in the drawings referred to below and attached.

 

5. Building the New Premises, comprising:

 

  a. Part (infill) Third Floor by way of extending the existing building structure and alike, to be constructed in sympathetic materials subject to agreement with the local authority and to include construction of data halls and associated plant rooms;

 

  b. Fourth Floor by way of extending the existing building structure and alike, to be constructed in sympathetic materials subject to agreement with the local authority and to include construction of data halls and associated plant rooms;

 

  c. Fifth Floor/Plant Deck by way of extending the existing building structure, with the new roof floor finish being a high performance single ply membrane, installation of a steel galvanised plant deck and grillage (to accommodate proposed plant and equipment), installation of a new rainwater system designed by specialists with the perimeter of this floor having installed a glazed and louvered screen constructed in sympathetic materials in agreement with the local authority; and

 

  d. Stairwell, goods/passenger lift and enclosures at the rear (North) of the Premises accessing all upper floors including plant deck of the Premises and access at ground floor level from immediately outside the Premises to the North.

as the same is shown in more detail on the attached drawings, and providing always that in relation to the to the detail of the Tenant’s Works, the specific materials to be used in carrying out the Works relating to the exterior of the New Premises must be approved by the Landlord in advance in relation to each part of such Works before such part of the Tenant’s Works commences, and this shall include where reasonable the supply to the Landlord in advance for consideration of the Landlord’s approval of sample materials, provided always that (i) the Landlord must be expeditious and reasonable in dealing with the approval of any such details and materials, (ii) if the Landlord has failed to respond within ten business days of being provided with such samples then the Landlord’s approval shall be deemed to have been given in respect of such sample, and (iii) in the event that the Landlord’s opinion of the materials proposed by the Tenant to be used in carrying out the Works is in conflict with the requirements of the local authority in respect of the same then the requirements of the local authority shall prevail.

 

46


6. In respect of the building of the New Premises, the Tenant’s Works shall include:

 

  a. the structural and load bearing elements of the New Premises, including without limitation foundations, steelwork, floor slabs, ceiling slabs, walls, cladding and roofing;

 

  b. the internal surface finishes of the walls, columns, floor slabs and ceiling slabs;

 

  c. internal and external cladding and roofing which are not load bearing;

 

  d. internal and external walls which are not load bearing;

 

  e. power being brought to the New Premises and connected to the appropriate number of distribution boards, provided that in respect of the amount of such power this shall be assumed not to be the actual amount of power the Tenant brings to the New Premises, but such reasonable amount of power as would be required if the New Premises were to be used as open plan office;

 

  f. the installation of raised floor in the New Premises, provided that this shall be assumed to be such raised flooring as would reasonably be expected to be installed if the New Premises were to be used as open plan offices;

 

  g. doors, door frames, windows and window frames;

 

  h. the installation of lighting in the New Premises;

 

  i. the installation of Conduits relating to the items referred to above,

as detailed in the attached drawings:

 

  (i) BHP Early Works Existing Fire Escape Demolition Process. Drawing number: 11-011-SK1003, 12 May 2011;

 

  (ii) BHP Proposed Lift & Stair Enclosure Details, sheet 1. Drawing number: 11-011-518 rev D, 9 May 2011;

 

  (iii)

Goods/Passenger Lift Specification. Drawing number: Our Quote CE2978/1 – Dated 11 th  March 2011;

 

  (iv) BHP Proposed Third Floor Plan. Drawing number: 11-011-023 rev A, 2 August 2011;

 

  (v) BHP Proposed Fourth Floor Plan. Drawing number:11-011-024 rev A, 2 August 2011;

 

  (vi) BHP Proposed Roof Plan. Drawing number: 11-011-025 Rev A, 2 August 2011;

 

  (vii) BHP Proposed Elevations. Drawing number: 11-011-026 Rev B, 3 August 2011;

 

  (viii) BHP Existing and Proposed Section A-A. Drawing number: 11-011-027 Rev A, 2 August 2011; and

 

  (ix) BHP Existing and Proposed Section B-B. Drawing number:11-011-028 Rev A, 2 August 2011.

 

47


SCHEDULE 7

COLLATERAL WARRANTY

 

48


SIGNED AND DELIVERED AS A DEED

by AMIRA ZELOOF in the presence of:

Witness signature:

Witness name:

Witness address:

Witness occupation:

SIGNED AND DELIVERED AS A DEED

by OFER ZELOOF in the presence of:

Witness signature:

Witness name:

Witness address:

Witness occupation:

SIGNED AND DELIVERED AS A DEED

by OREN ZELOOF in the presence of:

Witness signature:

Witness name:

Witness address:

Witness occupation:

EXECUTED as a DEED by INTERXION

CARRIER HOTEL LIMITED acting by two

authorised signatories:

 

Director

 

Director/Secretary

   

 

49

Exhibit 4.19

(English Translation)

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

LEASE

THE UNDERSIGNED:

CORPET LOUVET

Société par actions simplifieé [simplified limited company] with share capital of €79,248

Listed in the Bobigny Register of Trade and Companies as number 552 112 278

With its registered office at 87/95, avenue Victor Hugo – 93300 Aubervilliers, France

Represented by Mr Paul Taïeb under the terms of a special power of attorney dated 17/12/2010

Hereinafter known as the “Landlord”

 

         ON THE ONE HAND,

AND:

The Company known as INTERXION FRANCE , SAS with share capital of €200,000, listed in the Bobigny Register of Trade and Companies as No. 423 945 799, with its registered office at 45 avenue Victor Hugo, Bâtiment 260, 93534 Aubervilliers Cedex, France

Represented by Mr Fabrice Coquio, Chairman

Hereinafter known as the “Tenant”

 

         ON THE OTHER HAND


WHEREAS:

1 – Definitions

In this instrument the generic terms appearing below shall have these meanings:

 

   

Lease: means the lease covered by this document

 

   

Landlord: means CORPET LOUVET

 

   

General Terms and Conditions: means the general terms and conditions of the Lease

 

   

Special Terms and Conditions: means the special terms and conditions of the Lease

 

   

The Property or the Premises: means the property covered by the Lease

 

   

Tenant: means INTERXION

2 – Investigations carried out by the Tenant

Without prejudice to the conditions precedent referred to in Article 3 of the Special Terms and Conditions the Tenant acknowledges that it has had the opportunity, before today, to conduct any investigations that it may deem to be necessary in respect of the Property so as, in particular, to check its condition and ensure that it is possible to operate its business activities there, as envisaged. Notwithstanding the above, the Landlord hereby states that the Property is not encumbered by mortgages or other third party rights which could affect, by virtue of the enforcement of surviving or other rights, the rights invested in the Tenant in application of this document.

NOW THEREFORE, MOVING ONTO THE LEASE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT:

The Landlord shall lease, for a period of 12 full and consecutive years from the effective date as stated in paragraph 3 of the Special Terms and Conditions of this Lease, within the context of the commercial lease statute, as defined in Articles L 145-1 et seq. of the French Commercial Code, to the Tenant which accepts, the Property described in the Special Terms and Conditions below.

The Lease is granted and accepted under the Special and General Terms and Conditions laid down below, which shall constitute an indivisible whole.

It is specified herein that in the event of contradiction between the General Terms and Conditions on the one hand and the Special Terms and Conditions, on the other, the provisions of the Special Terms and Conditions shall prevail.


CHAPTER I – SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LEASE

1 – Description of the Property

The Property referred to in this document is situated at La Courneuve (Seine Saint Denis) 1-3, rue Râteau, France: it comprises land on which has been constructed a building for use as a warehouse with ancillary offices and outbuildings broken down as follows:

 

   

Site of the building: 18,019m 2

 

   

Buildings:

 

   

Warehouses: 6,642m 2

 

   

Dwellings: 300m 2

 

   

Offices: 219m 2

(annex 1: plan of the Property).

As viewed and approved by the Tenant.

2 – Intended use – Use of Premises

As shown above, the Property is intended for use as a warehouse and ancillary offices.

The Tenant may, however, use it for its business supplying hosting, fitting out and installation services in the field of IT and Telecommunications, providing connections between Telecom operator networks, technical support services to telecommunications companies, providing therein the transfer and recording of telecommunications capacity, as well as any related services, provided that it has obtained licences and carried out, at its own risk and expense, any work which may be required in order to carry on this business.

3 – Effective date of the Lease

The Lease, agreed for a twelve-year fixed term, shall come into force as of notification of the fulfilment or waiver by the Tenant of these conditions:

 

   

Approval of this Lease by the Tenant’s general shareholders’ meeting,

 

   

Confirmation from ERDF of the supply of electricity cables delivering at least 20 MW of power by 1 January 2012 at the latest,

 

   

Granting of the licence relating to installations classified for the protection of the environment (ICPE)

 

   

Granting of planning permission to construct a building designed to house the business activities envisaged by the Tenant and free from any third party recourse or right to withdraw said permission,

 

   

Release of the Premises by VSR by 30 April 2011 at the latest,

 

   

Issue of an asbestos and lead report

 

   

Issue of a mortgage certificate that is less than 30 days old certifying that the Premises are not encumbered by mortgages,

and shall come to an end on the same date in twelve years’ time.


The conditions required for the Lease to come into force are stipulated for the benefit of the Tenant which alone shall be entitled to enforce or waive said conditions.

The Tenant alone shall be responsible, at its own expense, for doing its utmost to fulfil the first four conditions required for the Lease to come into force. For its part the Landlord shall be responsible for doing its utmost to fulfil the last three conditions, at its own expense, by 31 May 2011 at the latest.

The fulfilment or waiver of the conditions precedent shall be notified by the first party to take action, by recorded delivery letter, said letter being taken as completion of this Lease without the need for any further formalities.

Should the Tenant fail to fulfil the conditions precedent incumbent upon it within the specified deadline, the Landlord may, on its own initiative, notify the Tenant of the cancellation of this contract, without compensation on either side.

4 – Period between the Lease being signed and coming into force

4.1) Nature of the contractual relationship

In order to enable the Tenant to conduct any investigations required in order for it to set up and operate its business in the Property, the Landlord shall grant the Tenant, during the period between the Lease being signed and coming into force, a temporary right of occupancy which, by mutual agreement between the parties, shall not be subject to public policy rules of commercial lease statutes but shall be governed by common contract law.

The parties shall adopt the system of temporary occupancy due to the following considerations:

 

   

The Lease is subject to conditions precedent which render its entry into force uncertain,

 

   

The Property is partially occupied by a tenant (VSR) to be evicted by the Landlord.

4.2) Legal basis of the temporary occupancy

The temporary right of occupancy is based on a reduced site which excludes the premises currently occupied by VSR.

4.3) Duration of the temporary occupancy

This temporary right of occupancy shall be effective for a maximum of eighteen (18) consecutive months from the date of signing.

The temporary right of occupancy shall be split into two separate periods:

 

   

An initial period of six (6) months from the date of signing of this document during the course of which the Tenant shall agree to do its utmost to fulfil the first four conditions required for the Lease to come into force, as stipulated in Article 3 above, without prejudice to the Landlord’s obligations by virtue of the conditions precedent incumbent upon it.

 

   

Should one or more of the first four conditions stipulated in Article 3 above and required for the Lease to come into force, fail to be met by the end of this initial period, the temporary right of occupancy shall continue for a maximum of twelve (12) months from the expiry of the initial six- (6) month period, during which the Landlord undertakes to lend the Tenant its support in fulfilling these conditions and, in particular, in obtaining final planning permission.


By mutual agreement between the parties, this temporary right of occupancy shall be automatically cancelled:

 

   

on the date of fulfilment of the conditions precedent under the terms provided for in Article 3, the Lease coming into force immediately,

 

   

Or, if the Tenant fails to obtain final planning permission by the end of the eighteen (18) months of temporary occupancy, without prejudice to the rights of the Tenant in the event of the non-fulfilment of the conditions precedent incumbent upon the Landlord by the required deadline.

4.4) Occupation rent

In exchange for the temporary right of occupancy granted by the Landlord the Tenant shall be liable to pay a fixed occupation rent as follows;

4.4.1) Occupation rent for the first six months

During the first six months from signing of this document an occupation rent set on an annual basis, exclusive of taxes and charges, at * * *, i.e. a quarterly occupation rent, exclusive of taxes and charges, of * * *.

The occupation rent is payable per quarter, in advance.

The Tenant shall pay, upon signing of this document, the occupation rent for the current calendar quarter, on a pro rata basis, for the time remaining until the end of the quarter.

4.4.2) Occupation rent for the following twelve months

During the twelve (12) months following on from the first 6-month period stipulated above the occupation rent set on an annual basis, exclusive of taxes and charges, at * * *, i.e. a quarterly occupation rent, exclusive of taxes and charges, of * * *.

The occupation rent is payable per quarter, in advance.

4.4.3) Occupation rent, if the Lease does not come into force

The parties expressly agree that if, during the course of the first six (6) months of the temporary period of occupancy, the Tenant decides to refuse the Lease for any reasons other than:

 

   

Failure to obtain from ERDF, by 1 January 2012 at the latest, the supply of electricity cables delivering at least 20 MW of power,

 

   

Failure to obtain the licence relating to installations classified for the protection of the environment (ICPE),

 

   

Failure to fulfil the conditions precedent incumbent upon the Landlord,

 

   

Failure to obtain planning permission to construct a building designed to house the business activities envisaged by the Tenant and free from any third party recourse and any right to withdraw,

the Tenant shall be immediately liable for fixed and final overall compensation of * * *, exclusive of taxes, plus VAT at a rate of 19.6% and undertakes to irrevocably release the premises from any occupancy on its part by 30 June 2011 at the latest.


It is expressly stipulated that the Tenant’s right to refuse the Lease under the terms stated above may only be exercised during the first six (6) months of the temporary occupancy.

4.5) Prohibition

The Tenant shall be irrevocably prohibited, during the course of the period of temporary occupancy, from demolishing all, or part, of the existing buildings. The Landlord does, however, authorise the Tenant to carry out any surveys on the Property, but with responsibility for making good.

4.6) Other conditions of temporary occupancy

The temporary right of occupancy is subject to all the Special or General Terms and Conditions contained in this document that are not contrary to the stipulations of this Article 4.

5 – Tax system

In accordance with the provisions of Articles 260-2 of the French General Tax Code and 193 and 195 of annex II of the French General Tax Code the Tenant has opted to pay VAT on rental received from the Property, including the occupation rent referred to above.

Consequently, the rent, charges, occupation rent, considerations and, generally speaking, any sums owing by the Tenant to the Landlord in execution of this document shall be taken as being subject to VAT. The same holds good for any replacement, additional or similar taxes that may be created.

6 – Rent

6.1 – Basic rent

This tenancy is approved and agreed for an annual principal rent, exclusive of taxes and charges, of:

 

   

* * *, from the effective date of the Lease until the commencement of the commercial use of the Property, this being characterised by the presence of employees and the hosting of the Tenant’s clients within the context of its business, but until no later than 30 June 2012,

 

   

* * * from the date of commencement of commercial use of the Property, this being characterised by the presence of employees and the hosting of the Tenant’s clients within the context of its business, but by 1 July 2012 at the latest.

In consideration of:

 

   

the occupation rent granted above at a reduced rate,

 

   

the cost incurred by the Landlord alone, inclusive of any registration fees that may be due, of evicting its current tenant in a very short period of time,

 

   

the Landlord’s undertaking to transfer, free of charge, to the La Courneuve Commune, between 3,000 and 5,000 m 2 of land situated at the edge of the Property so as to enable improvements to be made to the access to said Property,

 

   

the Landlord’s agreement to renew the Lease, if requested by the Tenant and subject to the latter having perfectly adhered to the terms and conditions of this contract, Lease for a new fixed twelve-year period at the rental amount in force at the end of this Lease,

the parties irrevocably agree that the annual rent, exclusive of taxes and charges, shall automatically increase every year on the anniversary of its effective date, by two point five percent (2.5%), this two point five percent increase making it possible to gradually offset the benefits accorded hereinabove by the Landlord.


The minimum increase of two point five percent (2.5%) shall apply for the entire duration of the Lease and for any subsequent renewals.

This clause is an essential condition of the parties’ agreement to the Lease, without which they would not have entered into the contract.

This two point five percent (2.5%) increase shall apply notwithstanding the application of movements in the INSEE construction price index which serves as the benchmark for the escalator clause stipulated in the General Terms and Conditions, up to a maximum annual increase in this index of two percent (2%).

6.2 – Advance rent

In consideration of the exemption from payment of a deposit, granted in paragraph 8 below, by the Landlord to the Tenant, the Tenant shall pay the Landlord, upon signing of this document, in addition to the rent payable on the due date, a permanent advance amounting to one quarter’s rent, plus charges, plus VAT at the current rate, i.e. the sum of * * *, by express agreement between the parties, such that the Landlord holds, on a continuous basis, irrespective of the quarterly due dates, a sum amounting to 3 months rent and charges, inclusive of tax.

For the period prior to the effective date, after that for the period from the effective date, the amount of the permanent advance amount shall be calculated pro rata of the value of 3 month’s rent and charges, inclusive of tax for the periods in question.

This advance shall be indexed under the same terms as the principal rent.

At the end of the Lease, which may have been renewed, the advance paid by the Tenant shall be returned to it, after deduction of any sums which may still be owing to the Landlord, for whatever reason and, in the first instance, for making good the premises.

In the event of premature cancellation of the Lease due to failure to fulfil its terms and conditions for any reason whatsoever for which the Tenant is responsible, said advance shall be retained by the Landlord by way of initial damages, without prejudice to any other subsequent damages.

7 – Benchmark index used to update the rent

For the application of the indexation clause stipulated in Article 3.2 of the General Terms and Conditions, the index shall be the index published last, i.e. that of the 2nd quarter of 2010, at a value of 1517.

8 – Deposit

Notwithstanding Article 3.7 of the General Terms and Conditions below, the Tenant is exempted from paying the Landlord a deposit.


9 – Amount of 1st quarterly provision for charges

9.1 – Reimbursement of charges privatives [charges for private use]

The provision for reimbursement of charges for private use is set at five percent (5%) of the annual rent, exclusive of taxes and charges.

9.2 – Reimbursement of impôt foncier [property tax]

The provision for reimbursement of property tax is set at the sum of * * * exclusive of tax, plus VAT, per quarter.

This provision has been set on the basis of the 2010 property tax advice annexed to this document.

9.3 – Reimbursement of annual tax on premises for use as offices, retail premises and for storage

The provision for reimbursement of this tax shall be set on the basis of the first call made by the Tax Authorities once the Tenant’s construction works are complete.

10 – Tenant’s works

10.1 – Performance of works by the Tenant

The Tenant has informed the Landlord of its plans to carry out major demolition and reconstruction works in the Property.

The Landlord authorises the Tenant to carry out the structural and construction works in accordance with planning permission thereby enabling it to carry on its business on the site.

The parties have expressly agreed that the Tenant’s structural and building works may never be used as the basis for an increase in rent on the occasion of rent reviews or upon renewal of the Lease.

The Tenant agrees to comply with any regulations regarding these works and to apply for and obtain, any prior administrative authorisation required.

The Tenant’s objective is to file an application for planning permission, after obtaining the approval provided for in Articles L510-1 et seq. of the French town planning code, if necessary, by 31 January 2011 at the latest. It shall inform the Landlord, as soon as it receives notification of the preparatory investigation deadline and shall inform the Landlord, at the latter’s first request, of how the investigation into the application is progressing.

The works shall be carried out at the Tenant’s own expense and risks, by companies providing full guarantees of expertise.

The Tenant alone shall pay for any damages caused directly or indirectly during the course of the performance of these works or at a later date simply by virtue of their existence and shall cover the Tenant’s liability in full should action be taken against it in this respect.

Should the need arise, please note that the fact that the Landlord is aware of the specifications of the Tenant’s works shall in no way result in its liability being incurred, the Tenant continuing to be solely and entirely responsible for the works.


Prior to commencement of the works the Tenant shall send the Landlord a certificate of the builder’s liability insurance issued by the insurer as well as a copy of the policy taken out.

In addition it shall send the Landlord a copy of any administrative authorisations as soon as they are received.

When the works are completed the Tenant undertakes to supply the Landlord with the final working drawings for the installations, the end-of-contract technical inspection report, a copy of the declaration of completion of works, the certificate of conformity, the opening administrative authorisations, the acceptance testing reports and, more generally speaking, any document proving the successful completion of its works, as well as any technical instructions appertaining to their operation, particularly in relation to air-conditioning.

10.2 – Charge for works carried out during the Lease

Notwithstanding Articles 5.2 et seq. of the General Terms and Conditions of the Lease, the Tenant shall carry out, at its own expense and risks, as and when required and shall continue to pay for any work that may be needed on the Property during the course of the Lease, for whatever reason and irrespective of the nature and extent of said work, even when attributable to hidden defects (maintenance work, repairs, replacements etc.) without exception, including by derogation of the provision of Article 605, those referred to in Article 606 of the French Civil Code, repairs involving the structure or the soundness of the Property, compliance works, those resulting from any injunctions that may be served by administrative authorities and even, notwithstanding Article 1755 of the French Civil Code, in the event of force majeure or obsolescence.

It shall expressly waive any rights under the provisions of Articles 1719, paragraphs 2, 3 and 4, 1720, 1721 and 1724, paragraphs 2 and 3 of the French Civil Code for all works carried out by it, including those covered by Article 606 of said Civil Code.

10.3 – What becomes of the works at the end of the Lease?

As an exception to the General Terms and Conditions stipulated below, ownership of the Tenant’s structural and construction works shall pass to the Landlord only in the event of the Tenant leaving the premises, i.e. in the event of the keys being returned with no hope of return and discontinuation of rental payments, unless the Tenant asks for the constructions to be destroyed as stipulated in the General Terms and Conditions. For the purposes hereof it is expressly agreed that the Tenant’s equipment and materials and any of its clients installed on the premises, may not be considered to be fixtures even if they are fixed to the Premises. On the other hand, the Tenant agrees to have them professionally removed.

11 – Unrestricted release of the Property

The Landlord irrevocably agrees to take action to release, entirely at its own expense, the Property which is currently partially occupied by VSR.

The Property shall be free of any occupation by VSR by the time that the Tenant obtains planning permission at the latest.


12 – Renewal of the Lease

The Landlord agrees, at the Tenant’s request and subject to the latter having perfectly complied with the terms and conditions of this document, to renew the Lease for another fixed twelve-year period at the rental amount in force at the end of the current Lease.

The Lease shall be renewed for another fixed twelve-year period.

This undertaking on the part of the Landlord is given solely out of consideration for the Landlord in person such that said undertaking cannot be transferred to any third party, by any means whatsoever, unless it is transferred to a company belonging to the Tenant’s group of companies and subject to the Tenant continuing to act as guarantor and remaining jointly and severally liable for the duration of the renewal term.

CHAPTER II – GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LEASE

This Lease is subject to the commercial lease statute, as codified by Articles L. 145-1 et seq. of the French Commercial Code.

1 – DEFINITION OF THE PREMISES

1.1 – Description of the Premises

The Premises are described in the Special Terms and Conditions.

The Tenant hereby declares that it is perfectly aware of the nature of the premises, having viewed and visited them. Any difference between the surface areas appearing in the Special Terms and Conditions or resulting from the plan annexed and the actual surface areas of the Premises shall not justify any reduction or increase in rent, the parties referring to the surface areas of the site such as they are.

The parties agree that the Premises shall form an indivisible whole for the entire duration of the Lease, its renewals, tacit renewals and even in the event of any disposals.

1.2 – Intended use – Use

The Tenant shall use the Premises on a personal basis and solely for the use stated in the Special Terms and Conditions in accordance with the Property’s intended use and in compliance with the provisions of Articles 1728 and 1729 of the French Civil Code.

The Tenant shall arrange for any administrative authorisations and for the payment of any sums, taxes and/or duties appertaining to the activities to be carried out on the Premises and to their use.

The Tenant shall also personally ensure that the Premises are compliant in respect of the business being conducted therein, so that the Landlord is never inconvenienced in this respect.

2 – CONDITIONS RELATING TO THE TERM OF THE CONTRACT

2.1 – Term

This Lease has been approved and accepted for a period of twelve whole consecutive years commencing on the effective date specified in the Special Terms and Conditions of the Lease appearing above.


The Tenant expressly waives its right to request the cancellation of the Lease before the end of the twelfth year, the Lease being for a fixed period of twelve years.

If the Lease is renewed, the parties expressly agree, wherever possible, that the Lease shall be renewed for the same twelve-year fixed term, without the Tenant being entitled to terminate the Lease at the end of each three-year period.

If, despite committing to a fixed twelve-year term, the Tenant is obliged to give notice between the effective date of the Lease as specified in the Special Terms and Conditions and the expiry of the twelfth year of the Lease, it shall be liable to pay the Landlord compensation for early cancellation corresponding to the full amount of rent, inclusive of charges and VAT, still due for the remainder of the twelve-year period.

2.2 – Notice given by the Tenant

The Tenant may give notice at the end of the fourth three-year period only, pursuant to the provisions of Article L. 145-4 of the French Commercial Code in accordance with the Special Terms and Conditions.

The Tenant shall give the Landlord notice by means of an extrajudicial document one year prior to the expiry of the twelfth year of the Lease at the latest.

The Lease shall continue until the effective date of the notice even if the keys have been returned to the Landlord prior to this date.

3 – FINANCIAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

3.1 – Rent

This Lease has been approved and agreed for an annual principal rent, the reference value of which is stated in the Special Terms and Conditions. The rent shall change pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Special Terms and Conditions appearing above.

3.2 – Rent indexation

The rent shall automatically go up, but never down, every year, on the anniversary of the effective date of the Lease without the need for prior notification, pursuant to the stipulations of the Special Terms and Conditions.

Upon the occasion of the first annual rent review, the ratio of this benchmark index to the index for the same quarter the subsequent year shall be calculated.

Every year the same ratio is calculated between the benchmark index used for the previous indexation and the index for the same quarter the following year.

If this index is not known on the anniversary date of the Lease, a provisional indexation is calculated on the basis of the last known index.


If, for whatever reason, the aforementioned index selected for the annual rent review, should cease to be published, this review would be made on the basis of either the replacement index or a new index chosen by mutual agreement.

Should an agreement fail to be reached on the choice of the new index to be adopted, the parties shall then refer the matter to an expert appointed by the Presiding Judge at the Tribunal de Grande Instance [court of first instance] with jurisdiction in the area where the Premises are located. The Tenant alone shall be liable for legal costs and for the cost of any expert reports.

This indexation clause constitutes an essential and determining clause without which the Lease would not have been agreed. Failure to apply this clause, even in part, may authorise the Landlord, and it alone, to ask for the Lease to be cancelled, without compensation.

3.3 – Charges

3.3.1) Communal charges

The rent stipulated shall be considered to be net of any charges and taxes for the Tenant (“quadruple net” rental as is customary for “investor leases”).

Consequently, the Tenant shall reimburse the Landlord for charges of any kind appertaining to the Premises, facilities and items of equipment installed therein provided that these charges can be justified and correspond to clearly identified services of relevance to the Premises and, where applicable, the share of communal charges for communal areas of the Premises and for shared equipment, if the Property has not been rented to the Tenant in its entirety.

The charges to be reimbursed by the Tenant to the Landlord include, in particular, without the list being exhaustive, property insurance, property taxes, the annual tax on offices, the tax on commercial and storage premises, as well as any other tax or duty which may subsequently be created, added or substituted and for which the Tenant would also be liable, (iv) management fees for the Property fixed at two (2) percent (%) of the annual rent, exclusive of taxes and charges, (v) maintenance costs for roads, green spaces and for security services, costs relating to installing and maintaining items enabling the Building to be supplied with all fluids (water, gas, electricity etc.), (vi) as well as the cost of ensuring that the Premises comply, for the entire duration of the Lease and its renewals, with health and safety and environmental regulations.

If the building has co-ownership status or is incorporated into any other legal entity, generally speaking, the Tenant shall reimburse the Landlord for any resultant charges.

3.3.2) Methods of reimbursement

The Landlord shall be reimbursed by calling for a quarterly provision payable at the same time as the rent, based on expenses forecast for the year.

A reconciliation is conducted on an annual basis to take into consideration the actual expenses incurred for the previous year.

The charges are divided between the various Tenants in line with the percentages specified in the Property’s rules of procedure, if there are any and, failing this, charges are divided pro rata of the surface areas rented.


In order to take into consideration fluctuations in charges, the Landlord reserves the right to change the amount of provision requested.

Payment and reimbursement of all charges referred to in the Lease are payable as of the date on which the Tenant takes possession of the Premises and until the Premises are fully vacated.

The amount of the initial quarterly provision specified in the Special Terms and Conditions.

The Landlord also reserves the right to call for working capital to cover charges corresponding to one quarter of the annual budget projection.

3.3.3) Personal charges – Meters

The Tenant shall be responsible for the upkeep, surveillance and security of the Premises.

It shall take out maintenance contracts to cover the equipment and Premises rented as well as contracts appertaining to any mandatory testing required by legislation or regulations.

It shall open customer accounts for water, gas, electricity and telephone etc.

It shall be obliged to pay the premiums on a regular basis and shall settle all individual utilities bills direct, in accordance with its meter readings, as well as any taxes for which it is liable, the Landlord being released from all liability in this respect.

3.4 – Taxes and duties

The rent, as defined in the Special Terms and Conditions, expressed exclusive of taxes.

Since the Landlord has opted for VAT liability, in application of Article 260-2 of the French General Tax Code, the rent plus VAT at the current rate, at each demand.

All charges invoiced to the Tenant pursuant to the provisions of the Lease shall, for tax purposes, by classed as additional rent and, consequently, shall be subject to VAT at the current rate.

The Tenant shall be responsible for any increase or any other tax that may be added or substituted for VAT by new regulations.

The Tenant is, in addition, required to settle any municipal, administrative or refuse collection charges for which tenants are ordinarily liable, so that the Landlord is never inconvenienced in this respect.

It shall, in particular, settle any personal property taxes, rental taxes, the cotisation foncière des enterprises [local corporate property tax since 2010 based on property’s rental value] and any other taxes for which the Tenant is charged, but for which the Landlord is liable for whatever reason and to provide proof of payment when requested and at least eight days prior to departure at the end of the Lease.


3.5 – Payment terms

The Tenant shall pay the Landlord the rent and ancillary charges in four equal instalments, in advance, on 1 January, 1 April, 1 July and 1 October each year and for the first time on the effective date of the Lease.

This initial payment is calculated pro rata of the time between the effective date of the Lease and the end of the calendar quarter in which this effective date occurs. Each day shall correspond to 1/360th of the annual rent. All payments shall be made to the Landlord’s domicile or to any other place indicated by it.

The Tenant agrees, for this purpose, to sign a direct debit authorisation in favour of the Landlord in relation to a bank or post office account.

The rent shall continue to be payable until the Lease expires, even if the keys have been returned to the Landlord prior to the agreed end date.

3.6 – Penalty clause

Any late payment, not made on the exact due date, of one single instalment of rent, charges or ancillary expenses, or occupation rent referred to in Article L. 145-28 of the French Commercial Code and, more generally speaking, non-payment of any other sum due under the Lease, within the required deadlines and, for reasons beyond the Landlord’s control, shall automatically render the Tenant liable, fifteen (15) days after formal prior written notification remains unheeded, for the payment of interest calculated on the basis of the legal interest rate plus three points per year, plus VAT. Interest shall be payable as of the due date and every new month begun shall be payable in full.

In the event of repeat offences on the part of the Tenant over a continuous two-year period and upon expiry of a deadline of fifteen days from the scheduled due dates, all sums payable, after calculation of the aforementioned indemnities, shall automatically be subject to a fixed penalty of 10% without the need for any formal notification or notice. VAT shall be payable on these penalties.

The application of the previous two paragraphs may not at any time be considered as authorisation for late payment and shall not in any way hinder the issue of action for rescission of contract referred to in Article 9 above.

3.7 – Deposit

3.7.1) Amount

In order to warrant the performance of the obligations incumbent upon it under the Lease, the Tenant shall pay the Landlord a deposit amounting to one quarter of the annual rent, exclusive of taxes, as specified in the Special Terms and Conditions,

The deposit shall be readjusted, automatically and without formality, every time that the principal rent changes, such that it always amounts to one instalment of rent in advance.

This deposit is not interest-bearing.

3.7.2) Means of enforcing the warranty

This warranty may be enforced throughout the duration of the Lease, until full and final settlement of all rental and ancillary payments and until the Tenant has executed all its obligations in full.


Said warranty is returned to the Tenant once the Premises have been vacated, an inventory has been drawn up and the Tenant has produced proof of payment of its contributions, taxes and other duties.

The amount reimbursed shall be less any sums owing for whatever reason and, in particular, shall be less the balance of charges for the period of occupancy as well as the cost of making good the Premises.

The Tenant may not, under any circumstances, use this deposit to offset any rent or ancillary charges that may be due upon its departure.

If the Lease is cancelled due to failure to fulfil its conditions or for any reason whatsoever for which the Tenant is responsible, said deposit shall remain the property of the Landlord by way of initial damages, without prejudice to any subsequent damages.

3.8 – Furnishings

The Tenant shall keep the rented premises constantly filled with plant, furniture and merchandise in such quantities in terms of value that the latter shall always serve as a guarantee to the Landlord of payment of rent as well as ancillary charges and obligations under this Lease.

3.9 – Occupation rents

If, subsequent to discontinuation or cancellation of the Lease, whether court-ordered or not, the premises are not returned to the Landlord, fully vacant, on the agreed date, the Landlord or its assigns shall be liable for a monthly occupation rent amounting to the current monthly rent plus 50%.

This occupation rent shall be due from the day after the rental ends and until the date on which the Premises are returned, any month commenced being due in full.

Charges shall also continue to be due until the date on which the premises are returned to the Landlord, all without prejudice to any other damages.

3.10 – Costs – disputes

Each party shall be responsible for the cost of taking advice on drafting the Lease.

The Tenant shall be liable and shall continue to pay for any costs incurred by the Landlord upon the occasion of valid actions issued against the Tenant to obtain fulfilment of the terms and conditions of the contract.

3.11 – Assignment of sums owing

In the event of disputes, payments made by the Tenant shall be assigned in this order to:

 

   

costs of recovery and proceedings,

 

   

damages,

 

   

interest,

 

   

rent paid in advance or increases in rent paid in advance,


   

claims for rent or occupation rent: with respect to this item, the Landlord shall, as a priority, assign the payments to sums not subject to dispute,

 

   

provision for communal charges.

4 – TERMS AND CONDITIONS RELATING TO ENJOYMENT OF THE PREMISES

4.1 – General terms and conditions of enjoyment

4.1.1) Rules of occupancy

The Tenant shall refrain from any act, on its own part or on the part of its employees, which may harm the activities of other occupants of the Property, as well as disturbing their peace and quiet.

It shall refrain from any dangerous, insanitary and nuisance-causing activities.

The Tenant agrees to refrain from doing anything that may interfere with neighbours’ quiet enjoyment of their premises. The Tenant agrees to take the place of the Landlord in any legal proceedings that may be initiated by one or more neighbours for disturbance of enjoyment arising from the Tenant’s activity.

The Tenant shall comply with any measures relating to the order and cleanliness of the Property. It shall, in particular, dispose of its refuse as necessary.

It shall be prohibited from dumping anything, even temporarily, in the halls or communal parts of the Property, including stairs, car parks, access routes and gardens.

In the event of these clauses being breached, the Landlord may, eight days after formal notice sent by recorded delivery letter remains unheeded or without prior notice in the case of an emergency, arrange for the necessary removals, at the Tenant’s expense, the latter being obliged to reimburse this cost simply upon presentation of an invoice.

The Tenant agrees to inform the Landlord of the existence of any equipment liable for declaration as a classified installation. It agrees to make the required declarations for any equipment subject to said regulations.

The Tenant shall comply with regulations set by the Landlord or by local authorities with respect to refuse collection.

Generally speaking, it shall comply with any requirements, recommendations and orders issued by the labour inspectorate, health and safety committees and, more generally speaking, any relevant administrative departments, such that the Landlord shall not, under any circumstances, incur any liability. This shall, notably, also be the case when the property being rented is part of an IGH [high-rise building] that is subject to specific regulations with which the Tenant undertakes to comply in every respect.

It shall make due and exact payment of personal taxes and contributions, property taxes or other taxes for which Tenants are liable, such that the Landlord is never inconvenienced in this respect.


4.1.2) Access and inspection rights

The Tenant shall give the Landlord, as well as its representatives, architects and companies, access to the Premises as often as is required, so that their condition can be inspected and work carried out on communal areas and facilities, subject only, apart from in the event of an emergency, to the Landlord giving the Tenant 48 hours’ prior notice.

Once notice has been issued, the Landlord shall be free to erect any boards, signs or notices that it may deem necessary in locations of its choice.

In the event of sale or rental of the Premises, the Tenant shall allow visits to the Premises on working days between 9am and 6pm.

Should it fail to comply with this rule, the Tenant may be liable to the Landlord for any damages relating to losses incurred by the latter.

4.1.3) Security and technical management of the Property

The Tenant shall take personal responsibility for the security and surveillance of the Premises as well as for maintenance of the Premises.

It shall ensure that the Premises always have an operational fire protection system and, in particular, a fire alarm.

The Tenant shall arrange, at its own expense, for periodic checks on items of equipment, lifts, safety (in particular those relating to fire detection, warning and protection) and electrical installations etc.

4.2 – Signage

Any signs or name plates may only be installed by the Tenant, inside or outside the Property, once it has obtained the necessary administrative authorisations together with the Landlord’s prior, written approval. In this respect, the Landlord has already approved the sign described in annex .

The Tenant shall be personally responsible for complying, where necessary, with special regulations relating to said signs and signage in general, with co-ownership regulations, with Property or area requirements or with any current administrative regulation governing either the Property or the area in which it is located.

Said signs shall be installed at the Tenant’s own expense and risk. It shall ensure that they are installed securely, kept in a perfect state of repair and it alone shall be liable for any accidents occasioned by their installation or existence.

4.3 – Disturbance of enjoyment

4.3.1) Destruction of Premises – Expropriation

In the event of compulsory purchase for reasons of public interest, the Lease shall purely and simply be cancelled, if the Tenant believes this to be appropriate, without the Landlord being liable for compensation. Should the Premises be destroyed, the compensation paid by the insurance company shall be paid to the Tenant and it shall be responsible for rebuilding the Premises within a maximum of twenty four (24) months.


4.3.2) Interruption of service

The Tenant may not claim any reduction in rent or compensation in the event of interruption or reduction, even if this is prolonged, of collective services, on the part of third parties such as water, heating, electricity or telephone, the Landlord not being obliged, moreover, to give the Tenant prior notice of said interruptions or reductions in service.

The Property’s services shall be provided by any means that the Landlord deems appropriate and it may change said means with a view to optimising the management of the Property.

5 – TERMS AND CONDITIONS RELATING TO MAINTENANCE OF THE PREMISES

5.1 – Ingoing inventory

The Tenant hereby accepts the premises in their current state, without being entitled to ask for any repairs or improvements, neither when possession is taken nor during the course of the Lease.

An inventory shall be compiled jointly by the parties when the Tenant takes possession of the property.

If, for any reason, this inventory should fail to be compiled and, in particular, if the Tenant, having been duly invited, fails to attend, the Premises shall be deemed to have been rented in perfect condition.

5.2 – Upkeep – repairs

For its part, the Tenant shall carry out, at its own expense and risk, as required and shall continue to pay for, any works including those referred to in Article 606 of the French Civil Code (repairs, making good, refurbishment or replacement) which may be required, now or in the future, by the Premises and their installations (such as, if they exist, heating, air conditioning and ventilation systems, technical equipment, access control and security systems, electricity, lighting, cabling, windows, woodwork and doors and windows, plumbing, sanitary facilities, carpeting, ceilings and false ceilings, walls, dividing walls, floors etc.) for whatever reason, irrespective of the nature and extent of said works and even if caused by age or hidden defects and shall proceed, at its own expense and as often as is required, with any treatments to rid the Premises of rats or insects.

In addition, the Tenant shall be responsible for any deterioration or loss in respect of the Premises, even if the Tenant is not at fault.

The Tenant shall carry out, at its own expense and risk, as required and shall continue to pay for, any works, improvements, installations or construction work required for compliance with current or future regulations, in particular, with respect to environmental protection, health and safety or security, including works covered by Article 606 of the French Civil Code.

The Tenant shall carry out, in the Premises, throughout the duration of the Lease and at its own expense, cleaning and maintenance work, minor repairs and refurbishment or replacement of any fixtures and fittings, paintwork, flooring, wall coverings or ceilings as soon they become necessary and for whatever reason, even if due to age or wear and tear, such that the Premises are, at all times, kept in a good state of repair.


It shall comply with any order issued by the Landlord to this effect, including during the course of the Lease.

The Tenant shall make any repairs that may become necessary with respect to meters, pipework, valves and fittings and locks and metalwork.

The Tenant shall ensure that the Premises comply, on a continual basis, with various regulations on public safety and on the safety of occupants, on working conditions, sanitary conditions, personal health and on environmental protection.

The Tenant shall be responsible for any works which may prove to be necessary under these regulations, even if the need to carry out these works is not the result of the business activity carried on by the Tenant in the Premises, but of the situation of the Property itself.

In this respect the Tenant shall comply with any administrative orders or requirements, in particular, those issued by safety committees, the Labour inspectorate or competent prefectural departments.

In the event of failure by the Tenant to comply, 15 days after formal notice by recorded delivery letter remains unheeded, the Landlord may have the aforementioned works carried out with costs being reimbursed to the Landlord by the Tenant at first request.

Upon expiry of the Lease, the Tenant shall return the property in a good state of repair, well maintained and operational. The Landlord hereby waives the right to request that the Premises be returned in their original condition, but expressly reserves the right to demand that the Tenant should demolish, at its own expense, existing constructions and clear away any rubble. It also acknowledges that any plant and equipment belonging to the Tenant or to its clients which is located on the Premises may not be considered as fixtures, however installed and fixed in the Premises and the Tenant shall be responsible for having them professionally removed in accordance with regulations applicable to ICPE.

5.3 – Works carried out by the Tenant

5.3.1) Adaptations – Improvements

The Tenant may not carry out any work on the premises that may change the intended use of the Property or make it unsound. It may not overload floors under penalty of being held responsible for any damage or accidents that may result from such overloading.

Subject to the above the Tenant may change the layout of the Premises, make any modifications, carry out any demolition work and knock through any walls or partition walls.

5.3.2) Compliance works

The Landlord alone shall pay for any works that may prove necessary in order to bring the Property’s Premises into line with current or future regulations.

The same holds good during the course of the Lease, if these regulations come to be amended thereby rendering the rented Property non-compliant with regulatory standards.

The Tenant shall ensure that the Landlord is never, at any time, inconvenienced in this respect.


5.4 – Works carried out by the Landlord

Whatever the inconvenience caused, the Tenant shall accommodate any repairs, reconstructions, height increases and any works whatsoever that may be carried out in the Property or in neighbouring properties, without being entitled to ask for any reduction in rent or cancellation of the Lease, whatever the extent and duration of said works, even if the latter should take more than forty days by derogation of Article 1724 of the French Civil Code.

5.5. – External works

In addition, the Tenant shall take direct recourse against the Local authority, neighbouring businesses and proprietors for works which may be carried out on the public highway or in neighbouring properties, should they prove to inconvenience the operation of its business activities, without the Tenant being entitled, at any time, to issue proceedings against the Landlord for these external events.

5.6 – Return of the premises

Upon its departure, the Tenant shall return the Premises in a good state of repair or, failing this, shall pay the Landlord for the cost of the works required in order to make said Premises good, the Tenant continuing to be liable for obsolescence resulting from wear and tear.

To this end an inventory shall be compiled on the expiry date of the Lease at the latest or when possession comes to an end, in the presence of the Tenant, having been duly invited to attend and following which the Tenant shall return the keys to the Landlord.

Should the Tenant fail to attend at the time and date set for the inventory, the latter shall be compiled by a bailiff, if necessary with the assistance of a locksmith, solely at the expense of the Tenant. The inventory shall include, if appropriate, a survey of repairs to be made, a list of which shall be compiled at a later date by the Landlord’s architect to which the parties hereby grant an irrevocable mandate for this purpose.

Should work prove to be required, the Landlord shall have a costing drawn up, which shall be agreed by the Tenant within ten days of the costs being notified.

Should the Tenant fail to reply, the cost of making good shall be deemed to have been agreed by the Tenant and the Landlord may have the works carried out by companies of its choice, the Tenant alone being responsible for costs.

6 – INSURANCE

6.1 – Landlord’s insurance

The Landlord shall cover the pecuniary consequences of any public liability that it may incur as owner.

The Landlord shall insure itself or as part of the co-ownership, if there is one, its property as well as any related developments and installations, at replacement cost, any compensation being delegated to the Tenant in application of Article 4.3.1.


Should the Premises be made up, wholly or partly, of individual co-ownership lots, the Landlord shall be entitled to take out, in addition to any cover taken out by the building’s management association, any additional policy that it may deem necessary, the corresponding premiums being paid for by the Tenant.

Should the business carried on by the Tenant result in the Landlord or neighbours or joint tenants being obliged to pay any additional insurance premiums, the Tenant shall reimburse the interested parties in full.

Insurance premiums and any additional premiums paid for by the Landlord shall be reimbursed by the Tenant under the terms stipulated in Articles 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 of the General Terms and Conditions.

6.2 Tenant’s insurance

As soon as the lease comes into force, the Tenant shall cover the pecuniary consequences of any public liability that it may incur as a result of its business activities, in particular with respect to neighbours and third parties in general, by taking out policies with insurance companies widely known to be solvent. Since the parties have agreed that the Landlord shall not give the Tenant any guarantee against disturbance to its enjoyment that may be caused by third parties, for whatever reason, said Tenant shall take out its own insurance to cover loss of enjoyment and operating losses.

The insurance shall, in particular, include cover against the risk of fire, explosions, storms and floods in relation to its goods, equipment, plant and merchandise, as well as to any adaptations that it may have made.

The Tenant shall take out insurance against operating losses, broken glass, broken windows and equipment of any kind.

The Tenant shall take out cover ‘at replacement cost’ and shall provide the Landlord with evidence of such insurance on an annual basis.

The Tenant shall provide the Landlord with evidence of its insurance policies and of payment of the corresponding premiums, as soon as the Lease has been signed.

The insurance policies relating to these covers shall be kept in force for the entire duration of the Lease and the Tenant shall pay all premiums and contributions and may be required to provide evidence of same simply at the Landlord’s request.

6.3 – Mutual waiver of recourse

The Tenant hereby expressly waives the right, and shall have its insurer waive the right, to any recourse against the Landlord and its insurers for destruction or total or partial deterioration of any plant, furniture or other items of value and merchandise, due to loss or disturbance of possession of the Premises and even in the event of total or partial loss of operating facilities, including intangibles.

The Landlord reciprocally expressly waives the right and shall have its insurers waive the right, to any recourse that it may be entitled to exercise against the Tenant and its insurers.


6.4 – Accidents – Disturbances

The Tenant shall inform the Landlord or its authorised agent, immediately of any accidents occurring on the Premises.

It shall inform the Landlord immediately of any repairs made necessary by any wear or deterioration even if there is no apparent resultant damage, under penalty of being held liable for any direct or indirect worsening of the situation resulting from its silence or delay, in particular, with respect to the Landlord’s insurers.

The Tenant shall allow both the Landlord and any experts commissioned by insurance companies, free access to the Premises. It may not exercise any recourse against the Landlord for the performance of these expert appraisals.

It shall, at its own expense and without delay, move its furniture, remove any cabinets and decorations as well as any installations the removal of which may be required in order to diagnose and repair leaks of any kind as well as any cracks and, generally speaking, for the performance of any works.

7 – LIABILITY AND RECOURSE

The Tenant shall waive the right to any action for damages against the Landlord and, in particular:

7.1 – In the event of theft or any other offence to which the Tenant may be victim in the Premises or in the Property’s outbuildings, the Landlord not having any duty to achieve a given result with respect to surveillance or security.

7.2 – Should the supply of water, gas, electricity or any other fluids be interrupted or in the event of the lifts being out of order, even if this is for a prolonged period.

7.3. – In the event of damages caused to the Premises and to objects contained therein, in particular, following leaks, floods, damp or other circumstances that may be due to any works, including those covered by Article 606 of the French Civil Code, the Tenant being obliged to take out insurance against these risks and being without recourse against the Landlord.

7.4 – In the event of behaviours resulting in liability being incurred by the building’s other occupants, their staff, suppliers or clients, the Tenant personally endeavouring to take direct recourse against those causing the disturbances.

7.5 – In the event of the Tenant’s enjoyment of the Premises being disturbed by any third parties, under these circumstances the Tenant being obliged to take direct action against said third parties without being entitled to involve or have recourse against, the Landlord.

8 – SUBLETTING – ASSIGNMENT

8.1 – Rental

The Tenant is prohibited from giving possession of all, or part, of the Premise to anyone at all (apart from one of its group companies), in any form whatsoever, even temporarily or free of charge or at will or under a management agreement. Any total or partial subletting is strictly prohibited (apart from to one of the Tenant’s group companies), under penalty of automatic cancellation of the Lease.


In the event of subletting to a company belonging to the Tenant’s group of companies or to a third party which may, on an exceptional basis, be authorised by the Landlord, the Tenant alone shall continue to be liable for payment, in full, of the rent to the Landlord and alone shall be responsible for the terms and conditions of the Lease, the sub-tenancy only being fully valid within the scope of the rights held by the Tenant by virtue of this document.

Subletting, even if it is authorised, shall be granted at the Tenant’s own risk and said Tenant agrees to take personal responsibility for the eviction of any sub-tenant.

Please note that the Premises form an indivisible whole and that, as a consequence, the sub-tenant shall not have any direct rights in respect of the Landlord and, in particular, any right to have the premises maintained or to have the Lease renewed.

No third party sub-letting can be authorised, if the Tenant owes any rent, charges or ancillary charges.

This clause does not aim to prevent the Tenant from making space available to its clients within the context of its business activity.

8.2 – Assignment

The Tenant may not assign, in whole or in part, its right to the Lease, under penalty of cancellation, unless to the acquirer of its goodwill.

No assignment may be made if the Tenant owes rent, charges or ancillary charges.

The Landlord shall be called for the deed of transfer by recorded delivery letter.

The Tenant shall remain as joint and several guarantor, waiving any right to contest or divide liability, of any subsequent assignee or assignees, both for the payment of rent and for the fulfilment of all the terms and conditions of the Lease.

Anyone subsequently becoming an assignee of the Lease shall continue to be liable in respect of the Landlord, jointly and severally with the Tenant, for payment of rent and for the fulfilment of the terms and conditions of the Lease, for the entire duration of same even if they are no longer at the premises and may even have assigned their rights under said Lease.

To fulfil this guarantee, in all cases of assignment, the Tenant’s successor as well as all subsequent successors shall, for the purposes of the validity of said assignment, provide the Landlord with a bank guarantee for payment of a sum corresponding to one year’s rent, inclusive of taxes, said rent being the rent in force on the date of assignment.

An execution copy of the deed of transfer, recorded as an original copy, shall be sent to the Landlord free of charge, the Tenant being obliged to adhere to rules of notification under Article 1690 of the French Civil Code.

8.3 – Transfer

As required, it is specified that in accordance with Article L. 145-16 of the French Commercial Code this Lease shall be freely transferred within the context of a T.U.P. (Complete transfer of assets and liabilities) transaction involving any merger, asset contribution-demerger or demerger, without needing to adhere to the formalities of Article 1690 of the French Civil Code.


9 – AVOIDANCE CLAUSE

Should exact payment of one single instalment of rent, any charge or ancillary charge or occupation rent under Article L. 145-28 of the French Commercial Code or more generally speaking, any sum owing by the Tenant, fail to be paid on its due date and one month after an order to pay or formal notice to pay given by means of an extrajudicial document containing the Landlord’s declaration of intent to enforce this clause, remains unheeded, the Lease shall automatically be cancelled, if the Landlord believes this is the right course of action, without any need to go to law.

The same clause shall apply, if one single clause of the Lease fails to be performed.

Should the Tenant refuse to vacate the premises, its expulsion shall result from a simple interim order issued by the Presiding judge at the Tribunal de Grande Instance with jurisdiction in the area where the Premises are located, which shall be provisionally enforceable without guarantee, notwithstanding the right of appeal.

In this case, whatever the reason for the cancellation, the advance rent, as defined in the Special Terms and Conditions shall be acquired by the Landlord for initial damages as per Article 3.7.2 above without prejudice to any other damages and the Tenant shall be liable to pay the Landlord occupation rent in application of Article 3.9 of the General Term and Conditions, irrespective of the rent outstanding on the date on which the Lease is cancelled.

10 – TOLERANCE

Any tolerance on the part of the Landlord in relation to the terms and conditions of the Lease, whatever the frequency or duration, may not, under any circumstances, be considered as amending or deleting said terms or conditions, nor as generating any right whatsoever, the Landlord being able to end said tolerance at any time.

11 – SEVERABILITY

The parties expressly agree that the invalidity or illegality, in terms of the impossibility of enforcement, of any one of the clauses of the Lease shall not affect the validity of the Lease and the possibility of enforcing the other provisions of the Lease, the disputed clause being deemed never to have been written.

12 – AMENDMENTS AFFECTING THE PERSON OF THE TENANT

The Landlord shall be informed of any amendments to the Tenant’s Memorandum and Articles of Association resulting in a change in the form of its company, a change of name, the transfer of its registered office, a change of capital or any change of Chairman or manager, within a period of one month, supported by an up-to-date Kbis extract [company registration information] and a certified copy of its current Memorandum and Articles of Association.

13 – SUBSTITUTION OF THE LANDLORD

Throughout the duration of the Lease and any renewals, should the Landlord transfer ownership of the Property, by any legal means, to a third party of its choice, whether this is a legal or natural person, the latter shall automatically be substituted for the Landlord, from the transfer date, in all the rights and obligations arising from this Lease, both actively and passively, without this substitution, which has already been agreed by the Tenant, resulting in a novation in respect of this Lease.


The Tenant hereby agrees that any deposit or surety or guarantee held by the Landlord by virtue of this Lease, should be transferred to the acquirer, thereby waiving the right to any recourse against the current Landlord, the vendor, by virtue of the restitution of these guarantees.

14 – ELECTION OF DOMICILE

For the execution of this document each party elects domicile at its registered office.

15 – ANNEXES

The documents below constitute the annexes of this Lease and form an integral part thereof:

Annex 1: Plan of the rented premises

Annex 2: Natural and technological risk report

Annex 3: Asbestos assessment

Annex 4: Termite assessment

Annex 5: Energy performance assessment

Annex 6: 2010 Property tax advice

Made in Paris on 03/01/2011

In two original copies

 

The Landlord    The Tenant
[signatures]   
Corpet Louvet Shareholder [Handwritten]   

[Stamp]

INTERXION FRANCE

Bât 260 – 45 avenue Victor Hugo

93534 Aubervilliers Cedex – France

Bobigny Register of Trade and Companies 423 945 799

APE 6311 Z

Tel.: +33 (0)1 53 56 36 10 – Fax: +33 (0)1 53 56 36 20

  

[Signature]

Chairman [Handwritten]

Exhibit 4.20

(English Translation)

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

LEASING AGREEMENT FOR NON-RESIDENTIAL USE FOR THE PROPERTY LOCATED IN CALLE ALBASANZ N° 73, MADRID 28037

In Madrid, on October 10, 2011

I

BY AND BETWEEN

FOR ONE PARTY,

Mr Mohandas Bhagwandas Chainani, an adult, with professional residence in calle Albasanz N° 73, Madrid 28037, holder of ID card no. 05420657-V , currently in force.

FOR THE OTHER PARTY,

Mr Robertus Johannes Michael Assink, an adult, of Dutch nationality, holder of Spanish Residence Permit (NIE) No. X-1589529-E , in force and with professional residence in calle Albasanz N° 71, Madrid 28037

II

THE PARTIES ACT

The former, on behalf of and in representation of the following business organisation:

Mr Mohandas Bhagwandas Chainani, in his capacity as Duly Empowered Representative, on behalf of and in representation of CHAINCO INVESTMENTS COMPANY, S.L., with VAT no. B-81222648 , with registered address in calle Albasanz N° 73, Madrid 28037, incorporated for an indefinite period of time by means of a deed executed in the presence of the Notary Public of Madrid, Mr José Marcos Picón Martín, on July 7, 1995, with his protocol number 1675 . Registered in the Companies House of this Province, in volume 9752 , book 0 , sheet 195 , section 8 , leaf M 156669 , entry 1 a . Hereinafter the “LESSOR”

The latter, on behalf of and in representation of the following business organisations:

 

(i) Mr. Robertus Johannes Michael Assink, with Spanish Residence Permit (NIE) No. X-1589529-E, in his capacity as Joint and Several Administrator, on behalf of and in representation of the business organisation called INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U., with VAT no. A-82517731 , by virtue of a deed authorised by the Notary Public of Madrid Mr. Carlos Pérez Baudín on May 18, 2010, with his protocol no. 1125 , with registered address in calle Albasanz N° 71, Madrid 28037, a company entered in the Companies House of Madrid, in Volume 14952 , Book 0, Sheet 161 , Section  , Sheet M-249071 , Entry 7a (15-06-2010). Hereinafter the “LESSEE” .

 

(ii) Mr. Robertus Johannes Michael Assink acts on behalf of and in representation of INTERXION HOLDING NV, with registered offices in Tupolevlaan 24 - 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk - Holland, a company duly incorporated in accordance with Dutch Law, and registered in the Chamber of Commerce of Amsterdam, Holland, with no. 33301892 , a position he holds by virtue of a special power as Joint and Several Guarantor, granted by Mr David Ruberg, Chief Executive Officer of INTERXION HOLDING NV in the presence of the Notary Public of Holland, Mr. Bartholomeus Johannes Kuck, on October 10, 2011 (copy attached as Annex 1 ), and authorised for this purpose by an agreement of the Governing Board of the Company by means of a certificate issued by Mr Jacobus Johannes Camman, Secretary of the Governing Board of INTERXION HOLDING NV (copy attached as Annex 2 ). Hereinafter the “JOINT AND SEVERAL GUARANTOR”.

All the parties reciprocally acknowledge their respective powers to enter into this Leasing Agreement for non-residential use, to which end


III

THEY STATE

I.- That the LESSOR is the owner of the property located in calle Albasanz N° 73, Madrid 28037 (hereinafter the “Property” ). The approximate surface area of the land is 1,517 m2. This land currently houses a building that has an approximate built-up surface area of 2,130 square metres.

The Property and the building are located in calle Albasanz N° 73, Madrid 28037. It is comprised of a ground floor, housing the loading and unloading area, reception offices, toilets, a warehouse compartment with mobile shelves for material storage. The first floor contains toilets, a kitchen and offices, and the second floor contains the rest of the offices, toilets and other management and personnel services. Both floors are connected by an inner stair, a lift and a service lift.

The built-up surface area of the ground floor is one thousand, four hundred and forty-five square metres (1,445 m2); The first floor is two hundred and seventy-five square metres (275 m2), and the second floor four hundred and ten square metres (410 m2), on the plot of one thousand, five hundred and seventeen square metres (1,517 m2), with a permanent 30.70-metre long garage entrance (keep clear area).

Registry description: Entered in the Property Register No.  17 of Madrid, Volume 1637 , Book 651 , Sheet 20 .

Cadastral Reference No.: 7471709VK4777A0001TF .

Permanent Garage Entrance (Keep Clear). Registration No.: 2000001583 .

Taxes and expenses: The Property is up to date in the payment of taxes, rates, contributions and other fees on the date of the signature of this Agreement.

Charges: Free of charges, encumbrances and tenants.

II.- The LESSEE states that it is aware of and accepts the current physical, building, legal, administrative, development and land registry status of the Property as described.

III.- That the LESSEE is interested in renting the property to use it for the company’s business activity, particularly the installation, operation and maintenance of data processing centres (DPC) and connections between networks of telecommunications operators, and the LESSOR is interested in leasing it to the LESSEE.

IV.- That the parties hereto being in agreement, and mutually and reciprocally acknowledging their respective legal empowerment to enter into this agreement, which is binding, and attaching particular importance to the good faith with which each one of them will honour their respective commitments, they agree, of their own free will, to enter into this leasing Agreement for non-residential use, hereinafter the “Agreement”, on the aforementioned property, which will be governed by the clauses of this Agreement and, in the event of any other circumstances not provided for herein, by the provisions of Title III of the current Spanish Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos [Urban Leasing Law] (Law 29/1994, of November 24), hereinafter the “LAU” and, as necessary, by the provisions of the Civil Code.


CLAUSES

First.- Definitions

For the purpose of this Agreement, the following expressions will have the definition attached to them below:

 

“LESSOR”    CHAINCO INVESTMENTS COMPANY, S.L., with VAT No. B -81222648, with registered address in calle Albasanz N° 73, Madrid 28037, a company entered in the Companies House of Madrid, in Volume 9752 , Book 0 , Sheet 195 , Section 8 a , Sheet M-156669 , Entry 1a .
“LESSEE”    INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U., with VAT No. B -82517731, with registered address in calle Albasanz N° 71, Madrid 28037, a company entered in the Companies House of Madrid, in Volume 14952 , Book 0 , Sheet 161 , Section 8 a, Sheet M-249071 , Entry 7 a .
“Box in Box”    The equipment, installations and movable elements built outside the building and added to it to carry out the activity of the corporate purpose of INTERXION ESPAÑA S.A.U., i.e. the specific DPC installations used to provide the service, in general: computing systems, servers, generators, transformers, chillers, RACs, etc., which may be disassembled and removed without affecting the structure, operation, appearance and legality of the building.
“Agreement”    This Leasing Agreement.
“Building”    It comprises the fixed construction erected on the ground according to the building projects submitted, as well as the parts of the buildings, elements, installations and equipment used to provide a service which cannot be removed without somehow jeopardising it, with the specific exclusion of the “Box in Box” .
“Start Date”    The date indicated in clause 3.1. (10-10-2011)
“Property”    The total of the land and real property described in the They State (I) section, as well as the buildings and facilities existing in the Property at any time.
“Joint and Several Guarantor”    INTERXION HOLDING NV, with registered offices in Tupolevlaan 24 - 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk - Holland, a company duly incorporated in accordance with Dutch Law, and registered in the Chamber of Commerce of Amsterdam, Holland, which endorses and guarantees, jointly and severally, and to the maximum extent permitted by law, the obligations taken on by the LESSEE in this Agreement until its termination, as agreed to herein.
“CPI”    Consumer Price Index (CPI)
“INE”    Instituto Nacional de Estadística [National Institute of Statistics] (INE)
“ITE”    Technical Building Inspection (ITE)
“Major Work”    Major Work is taken to mean all building work, be it in or on existing buildings, demolition or new building work, as well as any work which, before the building can operate, requires permissions and an administrative “Major Work” licence. This includes any actions that affect the structure of the buildings and work to extend the occupation and/or the built-up volume.
“Required Work”    Any Work required in accordance with the applicable legislation or regulations and applicable to the building and/or installations on the Property, as well as work required for the maintenance or repair of the building throughout the term of this Agreement.


“Other Work”

   All other work that does not correspond to Major Work and Required Work, and which, by way of examples which are not exhaustive, may be electrical installations, air conditioning, lifts, stairs, facade etc.

“Obligatory Compliance Period”

   The period of fifteen years to which the parties commit pursuant to this Agreement.

Second.- Object of the Agreement

By virtue of this Agreement, the LESSOR leases to the LESSEE, who accepts, a Property described in the They State section I, which the LESSEE states that it knows and accepts, accepts, in its current physical, building, legal, administrative, development and land registry status.

The LESSEE acknowledges that it receives the Property and its installations and services in good conditions of use and in a good state of repair.

The LESSEE will use the Property mainly for the specific activities of its corporate purpose, and particularly for the installation, operation and maintenance of data processing centres (DPC). It may also use the Property for complementary uses to the core activity provided that any such use does not involve a greater percentage than that of the core activity and that the clients to whom any such services are rendered are also clients of the LESSEE’s core activity.

As it is not a question of covering a permanent housing need of the LESSEE and the other people stated in Article 7 of the Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos [Law of Urban Leasings], this agreement is excluded from the system of protection established in titles I and II of the aforementioned Law, and is governed, pursuant to Article 4 of aforementioned Law, by the provisions of this Agreement, by the provisions of Title III of the aforementioned Law, in terms of the Articles whose application has not been expressly excluded in the conditions of this document or do not contradict the provisions of this Agreement, and subsidarily, by the provisions of the Civil Code.

Third.- Term of the Agreement

3.1. The Leasing Agreement will take effect as of its signature, on October 10, 2011 (the “Start Date” ), and will have an Obligatory Compliance Period of fifteen (15) years as of the aforementioned date of October 10, 2011, until October 9, 2026.

3.2. Following the expiration of the Agreement because the Obligatory Compliance Period of fifteen (15) years has elapsed, this Agreement will be automatically discharged.

3.3. If for any reason the LESSEE decided to abandon this Agreement or vacate or were obliged to vacate the Property before the fifteen (15) years of Obligatory Compliance have elapsed, it must pay the LESSOR the amount equivalent to the rent that would remain until the fifteenth year, taking into account, for the aforementioned calculation, that the updated rent for each annual period will be that which results from the application of the increases agreed to in this Agreement, until the end of the term of fifteen years, by way of damages which such an early discharge causes the LESSOR.


The indemnities provided for in this agreement will be added to the amount resulting from the provisions of the previous paragraph if the Work established in this Agreement has not been completed pursuant the Work Execution Project and to the corresponding administrative licence, without prejudice to other indemnities and amounts established in this Agreement in the event of non-fulfilment.

Fourth.- Delivery of the Property

4.1. Without prejudice to the enforceability of the Agreement as of its signature, the LESSEE authorises the LESSOR to maintain and use the Property for a term of (30) thirty days, at no charge to the LESSOR, during which term the LESSEE may not use the Property without the LESSOR’s express authorisation. After the aforementioned term of (30) thirty days has elapsed, the LESSEE will have full possession of the Property.

4.2. On the date it deems fitting within the aforementioned term of (30) thirty days, the LESSOR will deliver the building on the Property, and particularly the warehouse of the aforementioned building, with no fixed, mobile or anchored shelves.

Fifth.- Economic Conditions

5.1. RENT.- The rent agreed to in the leasing which is the object of this agreement will consist of:

For the first annual leasing period, from October 10, 2011 until October 9, 2012, the amount of * * *.

For the second annual leasing period, or in other words, from October 10, 2012 until October 9, 2013, the amount of * * *.

As of the third annual leasing period, i.e. from October 10, 2013 and thereafter, the amount of * * *, to be revised annually pursuant to the provisions of clause 5.6 of this agreement.

The aforementioned amounts refer exclusively to the price of the leasing and do not include taxes or expenses.

5.2. Value Added Tax (VAT) and/or other Taxes

This leasing is subject to Value Added Tax (VAT) and/or to any tax that may be levied on the leasing throughout the term of this Agreement, and consequently the total amount of each one of the successive rental invoices must accrue, according to the legal rate applicable at all times, and automatically, the corresponding amount of the aforementioned tax, which will be stated separately from the rest of the items on the corresponding invoice.

5.3. Payment of the Rent

Payment of the rent and other concepts which in accordance with the Law and the clauses of this Agreement may be charged to or paid by the LESSEE, will be made by means of bank transfer to CHAINCO INVESTMENTS COMPANY, S.L. into the Caixabank no. account 2100-2138-15-0200438756 , which to this end is indicated in this act by the LESSOR.

The rent will be paid by the LESSEE to the LESSOR in twelve monthly payments, paid one month in advance, within the first FIVE (5) days of each month, plus the corresponding VAT.


The LESSOR will be obliged to issue, on a monthly basis, to the LESSEE, the corresponding invoices for the amounts resulting from the provisions of this clause. In no case will failure to deliver an invoice constitute an excuse for non-payment of the rent by the LESSEE.

In this act, the LESSEE delivers to the LESSOR, as the first rent from the Start Date of this Leasing Agreement until October 31, 2011, the amount of * * *, by means of the nominal promissory note no. 6.075.722-0 8201-4 of the CaixaBank bank. The LESSOR receives the aforementioned cheque subject to it being credited to the account, granting, in this act, the firmest and most efficient letter of payment for the aforementioned amount.

5.4. Exemption from withholding of the LESSEE

This agreement will be subject to withholding in each payment of the monthly rent agreed to according to the applicable legislation. Nevertheless, when the law envisages exemption from making the withholding, the LESSEE will make no withholding if the corresponding legislative requirements are met. When the withholding exemption requires a certificate that should be sent by the LESSOR to the LESSEE, the latter will make no withholding as of the moment the aforementioned certificate is made available to it. The LESSEE delivers to the LESSOR in this act, attaching it to this contract, copy of the certificate issued by the Tax Authorities Exempting Lessors from making the Withholding.

5.5. Delay and non-payment of the Rent

Any delay in the payment of the rent will lead to a surcharge on the interests payable by the LESSOR at a variable annual rate that will be the result of applying, the interest rate on the Interbank market published by the Bank of Spain at the time of the non-fulfilment of the payment plus a ten percent (10%) increase during the first thirty days, and twenty percent (20%) as of day 31 of the non-payment and until total payment of the proper rent owing, besides all other expenses produced, without prejudice to the LESSOR being entitled to instigate eviction procedure due to lack of payment as of day sixty-one (61) as of the first day of the month of non-payment of the rent.

Non-fulfilment by the LESSEE of the obligation to pay the rent in the time, place and form established in this Agreement will entitle the LESSOR to demand termination of this leasing agreement and commence eviction proceedings as provided for by this Agreement.

5.6. Update of the Rent

5.6.1. The rent agreed to in clause 5.1 above will be updated as of the beginning of the fourth year (October 10, 2014) of accrual of the leasing on the date of the end of each year of the term, and throughout the term of the agreement in accordance with the percentage variation in the consumer price index (hereinafter, the CPI), in the twelve ( 12 ) months before the update in accordance with the data published for this purpose by the National Institute of Statistics ( INE ) or any organisation that replaces it, without, in any case, the increase in the rent being lower than three per cent (3%) a year.

To this end, and for the provisions of the following points referenced to the CPI, the initial index taken for the revision will be the index published by the INE on the effective date of the period being revised, and the final index taken will be the last one published before the expiration of the period being revised, and so on for each annual review.

If at the time of the update the aforementioned definitive indexes had not been published, the provisional index established by the INE will be applied, and once the definitive index is known, the corresponding settlement will be made taking into account the date the new rent became applicable, and the corresponding balance will be paid to the LESSOR or LESSEE.

5.6.2. Without prejudice to the agreement made for the annual update of the rent in accordance with the evolution of the CPI, the parties agree to exclude the application of the aforementioned update in the calendar years corresponding to the (6) sixth and (11) eleventh years, when, instead of the annual rate in force being updated according to the CPI, a percentage increase of ( 6% ) six per cent will be applied.

5.6.3. The variations in the rent derived from the revision agreed to in this clause will be added to the rent of this Agreement and will therefore be part of the basis for successive revisions which will be carried out pursuant to the provisions of this clause.


Sixth.- Conditions for return of the Property

6.1. On termination of the leasing, regardless of the cause, the LESSEE must vacate the Property and, on request by the LESSOR, return it to it, in good conditions of operation, conservation and maintenance, barring the wear produced by the normal use thereof and by the passing of time, or if the LESSOR chooses the total or partial demolition of the property, and/or total or partial removal of all kinds of equipment, installations and rubbish, the LESSEE will be responsible for all expenses and activities involved in the aforementioned demolition, removal and rubbish disposal, including all types of rates, taxes and licences needed to do so, technical fees, and all expenses for the removal of waste, goods, installations and rubbish to authorised landfills, leaving the Property free of any charges, encumbrances, obligations and debts that INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U. has to satisfy in accordance with this Agreement or with the legal ordinance, returning the keys and possession of the property to the LESSOR on the day the Agreement terminates.

6.2. Without prejudice to the previous clause, the LESSOR must inform the LESSEE in writing, within the minimum term of one (1) year before the termination of the Obligatory Compliance Period, which option it chooses, either total or partial demolition and/or removal of part or all equipment, installations and rubbish or the restitution of the Property. If the LESSOR does not notify its chosen option to the LESSEE in the term indicated, the LESSOR will be understood to have chosen the restitution of the Property.

This term of one (1) year will not be taken into account when the LESSEE must or wishes to return the Property for any reason before the expiration of the Agreement. In these eventualities, the LESSOR will notify its option within the maximum term of 60 days as soon as it learns of the LESSEE’s obligation to return the Property.

6.3. If the option were total or partial demolition and/or removal of all or part of the equipment and installations of the building, the LESSEE will have (90) days at most after the expiration date of the Agreement to execute, on its own account and cost, the option chosen by the LESSOR and in the established conditions of this Agreement, during which term it will pay the LESSEE 50% of the applicable rent.

6.4. On expiration of the Agreement, and if the LESSOR chooses not to demolish all or part of the Building and installations executed on the leased Property, it may choose to keep any work or improvements made by the LESSEE to the Property for its own benefit. The LESSOR may, at no cost whatsoever to it, have the LESSEE remove from the Property, totally or partially, any facilities, furniture and fittings, goods, equipment and other modifications made to it that do not affect the configuration of the building on the Property or the actual Property, except the pre-existing services and accessories, lift, service lift, air-conditioning and electrical installation, local area networks, technical floors, etc, and anything that may damage the building or the Property, which must remain in it without prejudice to the LESSOR’s entitlement to call for the total or partial demolition of the building on account of the LESSEE in the terms already expounded in this Agreement.

6.5. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the LESSEE will benefit from, and will remove, improvements that are not part of the building or do not damage or render it inoperative, useless or uninhabitable or detract from its value or which require repairs, fixes, replacements or the start-up of equipment or installations that are carried out in the Building and/or the Property leased pertaining to the Data Centre (the “ Box in Box ”), which refers to the self-sufficient building constructing a building in the Building and whose removal from the Building by the LESSEE cannot affect the operation and structure thereof, in which case the LESSEE will be entirely responsible for any damages caused by the removal on the configuration and structure of the building located in the Property.

6.6. If on termination of the leasing period, and following the term agreed to by the PARTIES for the LESSOR to execute the option of demolition, removal of equipment or recovery of the Property, the LESSOR has not received the Property in the terms and conditions expounded above, as for any other case in which the LESSOR has to recover the effective possession of the property pursuant to the Law or this Agreement, the LESSOR will be entitled to receive from the LESSEE an indemnity equivalent to 150% of the applicable daily rent at the time of the non-fulfilment per day of delay in the delivery of the Property over the first thirty (30)  days, which will be 200% for up to sixty (60)  days and 300% as of day sixty-one (61) , until the date the LESSOR recovers effective possession of the Property in the conditions agreed to herein, and all without prejudice to the LESSOR being entitled to avail itself of the other rights and actions provided for in the Law and/or in this Agreement to obtain the delivery of the Property and, as the case may be, collection of the relevant indemnity, and the fulfilment, as the case may be, of the total or partial demolition or total or partial removal of the equipment and installations from the building in the Property, with all the expenses incurred in all the above actions to be met by the LESSEE.


Seventh.- Work

7.1. Building adaptation work.

7.1.1. For the LESSEE, the core purpose of the leasing is to have, in the leased Property, a building with the requirements and installations it needs to carry on its activity.

To this end, the LESSOR authorises the LESSEE, throughout the term of this Agreement, to perform, entirely on its own account and its own expense and in accordance with this Agreement, any work on the Property required to adapt it to the purposes listed in the second clause, and any work deemed necessary and/or convenient for the development of its activity at all times, or any Other Work that is necessary or legally required, provided that in all cases the resulting building observes all the legislation and regulations required by the corresponding organisms and all the mandatory technical and city-planning legislation for building and for the activity carried on, as well as the industrial and safety legislation in force regulating the plot of land where they are located, at no time exceeding the plot’s buildability limit.

7.1.2. If the LESSEE chose to demolish the building located on the leased Property to build a new one that observes the conditions of this Agreement, the demolition, which the LESSEE will do entirely on its own account and its own expense, must have the legally required authorisations and licences, after informing the adjoining properties and securing their authorisation, if necessary, must be performed in safe conditions in the transfer of rubbish and its disposal in a legally established landfill in legal conditions.

The LESSEE will be responsible for all the technical projects required for the demolition and the cost of the demolition and the relocation of rubbish and disposal in authorised landfills, as well as the formalities required to obtain them.

The LESSEE will be entirely responsible for all damage that may be caused to third parties as a result of the execution of demolition, clearing away and waste disposal work. To this end, the LESSEE will take out a public liability insurance policy that will expressly cover this risk.

All the formalities, risks and expenses required to comply with this Agreement will fall to the LESSEE.

7.1.3. The LESSEE undertakes to deliver a copy to the LESSOR, before the execution of the Major Work involved in the construction of a new building and/or which requires some type of Major Work licence, of the basic and execution projects and all the modifications, duly signed by the architect and approved by the competent authorities, the planning of the work, as well as all the licences and all the permits that authorise the work and the activity, the payment of settlements and fees derived from these licences, as well the Site Safety and Occupational Health Plan, the approval of the Safety and Health Plan by the Safety and Health Coordinator, the opening of the work centre in the name of the builder.

If the project for the Major Work, licences and/or permits do not fulfil the legislation in force and the conditions of this Agreement, the LESSOR may have the LESSEE make the necessary modifications for the planned work to fulfil the agreement and the applicable legislation, without which the work cannot go ahead. In this case the LESSEE will meet all the costs and risks required to comply with the provisions of this paragraph.

The LESSOR may, having considered the project submitted or the execution of the works derived from it, insist that it fulfil all the city-development related legislation and regulations of the competent authorities applicable to the Required Work and/or be modified to guarantee the safety and stability of the Building. The LESSEE must take the measures and/or make the modifications indicated by the LESSOR pursuant to this clause.


7.1.4. The LESSEE will be totally responsible for any sanction, fine, fee or claim of any type and in any jurisdictional order which, with regard to the Major Work and/or Required Work it does, arises as a consequence of the non-fulfilment, delay or omission in compliance with city development, taxation or administrative legislation or with any orders delivered to it for this purpose by the competent administrations or the LESSOR, or as claim for indemnity for damages resulting from the aforementioned non-fulfilment, including those which may be brought against the LESSOR as the main, joint and several or subsidiary responsible party, and will keep the LESSOR free of any damages caused by the aforementioned omission until the termination of this Agreement.

As the LESSEE is responsible for the implementation of the Major Work and/or Required Work on the Property, in no case will the lack of execution of the work or the loss of licences or authorisations for the activity or the sealing or closure of the installation or the premises due to the lack of implementation of the aforementioned Major Work and/or Required Work constitute grounds for the termination of this Agreement.

7.1.5. In any case, and for the implementation of any Major Work and/or the Required Work, the LESSEE, besides the request for consent to be sent to the LESSOR, will deliver a technical project, and, if necessary, which complies with the applicable regulations and is duly approved by the Official College of Architects.

7.1.6. If any work is performed without the LESSOR’s consent when authorisation is required in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, the latter may have the LESSEE restore things to the envisaged authorised condition, with the LESSEE meeting all the expenses involved, or else maintain the modifications made, once the work has been legalised by means of the Technical Project drafted by the Competent Technician and approved by the corresponding organisation, as well as the licence that protects the action, at the expense and on account of the LESSEE, without the LESSEE being entitled, in such a case, to claim indemnity from the LESSOR.

7.1.7. After obtaining the written authorisation and consent of the owners of the Real Property located in calle Albasanz N° 71 with the LESSEE, the LESSOR authorises the opening-up of connections or passageways with the aforementioned adjacent real property or the demolition of the party walls between both of them as long as the LESSEE is also the LESSEE of the aforementioned adjoining Real Property, and with the LESSEE being obliged to close the aforementioned connections or passageways and/or build the party walls that guarantee the physical separation between both properties with materials of the same quality that may be used in building in the future once either of the two Leasing Agreements it has expires, either the building in calle Albasanz N° 71 or the leased Real Property in calle Albasanz N° 73, within the maximum term of thirty (30) calendar days as of the moment the obligation to close or cancel the passageways begins. The LESSEE undertakes to manage, on its own account and its own expense, all the necessary projects and permits with the local authorities and with the owners of the adjacent building in calle Albasanz N° 71, which it has also leased, and will meet, entirely on its own account and its own expense, the costs of opening and closing the passageways and/or connections that have been made.

The LESSEE, before beginning the demolition work on the building, must provide the LESSOR with the following documentation:

- Copy of all licences, authorisations and permits stated in this section.

Signed authorisation by the owners of the adjoining property, located in calle Albasanz No. 71, with INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U., expressly authorising the attachment of the aforementioned adjoining property to the property in calle Albasanz N° 73 and the performance of the party wall work, the opening of doorways, gaps and the restitution of both properties and in which the LESSEE takes on, vis-à-vis the owners of the property of calle Albasanz N° 71, all responsibility for the aforementioned attachment, party walls, doorways, gaps and restitution of the property, releasing the LESSOR from any responsibilities in this regard. Prior to the signature of the aforementioned document with the owners of the adjoining property, the LESSEE will submit the draft to the LESSOR so that the latter can compare the aforementioned document with the contents of this Agreement.


The presentation to the LESSOR of the aforementioned documents, including the authorisation of the adjoining property signed before the thirty-first of October 2011, will be an indispensable condition for undertaking any demolition or new building work of the BUILDING.

Without prejudice to the foregoing, the LESSEE will keep the LESSOR free from all claims that may be brought by the owners of calle Albasanz N° 71 for any reason, releasing the LESSOR from all responsibility.

On no account will the opening and use of the passageways constitute a right of passage or any type of right to the Property leased in favour of the adjacent property of calle Albasanz N° 71, and nor may it be entered in the Land Registry as such.

7.1.8. The LESSEE will deliver a copy of all the documentation generated as a result of the Major Work and/or the Required Work: execution drawings, projects, work certificates, administrative licences, receipts of payment of rates and licences, order books, authorisations for facilities, etc., until the completion of the major Work and/or the Required Work.

7.1.9. The LESSOR, throughout the term of the Agreement, will be kept up to date on the Major Work and/or the Required Work, and will be empowered to have the LESSEE make sure that the Major Work and/or Required Work is adapted to the project presented and/or to the applicable legislation.

The LESSEE will allow the LESSOR to see the subcontracting ledger of the Major Work and/or the Required Work at any time during the work, the LESSEE undertakes to provide the LESSOR with any documentation it requests on the subcontractors working on the “Major Work” and/or the Required Work at the time.

7.1.10. All work, including, as the case may be, those pertaining to connections between boundaries or passageways between buildings stated in this Agreement, will be contracted directly by the LESSEE, and the latter will take on, directly, personally and entirely, all the related responsibilities specific to a developer, both with regard to its execution, the project, permits, licences, authorisations, payment commitments, etc., releasing the LESSOR from any responsibility to third parties as a result of deficiencies in the project, execution of the work, building defects and payment commitments, as a result of the aforementioned work.


7.1.11. The LESSEE may not claim any damages or indemnity from the LESSOR due to a stoppage in the services or in its activity as a result of defects derived from the project and/or the work performed or to be performed by the LESSEE, including the services and facilities executed in the building or the Property, such as, by way of example, and without the list being regarded as exhaustive, electrical or air-conditioning installations, and nor may it claim discharge of the Agreement for any reason.

In no case will performance by the LESSEE of any work contained in this Agreement entitle the LESSEE to a reduction in the rent or the suspension thereof, nor to indemnity for work expenses or to abandon the Leasing Agreement even if the aforementioned work affects it relevantly.

7.2. Ownership of the work, declarations and registration of the work

On the Major Work has been completed, it will remain as the property and for the benefit of the LESSOR at no cost to the latter. The LESSEE will be obliged, entirely on its own account and its own expense, to perform the Declaration of New Building Work in the presence of a Notary Public, to have it entered in the corresponding registry and to declare it to the General Directorate of Land Registry, all in favour of the LESSOR, including the payment of taxes, professional fees and all the management costs incurred. The LESSOR will revise the documentation to be presented and will authorise the description of the property.

Moreover, the LESSEE will deliver to the LESSOR the Final Work Certificate signed by the Architect and the Quantity Surveyor and approval by the competent authorities, as well as copy of the legalisation projects and final Certificates of the installations signed by competent technicians approved by the corresponding organisation for all the installations of the building, bulletins of all the installations signed by authorised installers and stamped by the Authorised Control Organisation, copy of the licence and/or certificate of first occupation and opening licence.

7.3. Employer’s Obligations

7.3.1. The LESSEE undertakes, throughout the term of this Agreement, to ensure that the personnel hired and subcontracted for the execution of all the Work and Installations envisaged in this Agreement are properly contracted and that they are up to date in their Social Security contributions and other legal requirements, which it shall accredit at any time on request by the LESSOR.

7.3.2. The LESSEE expressly releases the LESSOR from any responsibility derived from the working relationship that the workers employed for the execution of the works and installations provided for in this agreement may have with the companies contracted or the non-fulfilment the latter of their obligations as employers, and will be directly and exclusively responsibility for any amount and/or responsibility that may be demanded of the LESSOR for such eventualities.

7.4. LESSEE’s responsibility for non-execution and/or non-completion of the work

7.4.1. If the LESSEE abandoned the leasing, or if the Agreement had to be terminated for reasons other than an act or breakage by the LESSOR, and the Work mentioned in this Agreement had not been completed, and, without prejudice to any other compensation established in this Agreement, the LESSEE will indemnify the LESSOR within a term of not more than ten days by way of damages, for the amount budgeted for the uncompleted work, obtained by obtaining the mean of three budgets submitted by three different companies of repute, in accordance with the indications of the architect managing the execution of the work, and/or the architect appointed by the LESSOR, for the part of the project and/or work with execution pending, plus any other expenses incurred until the new work is registered in the Land Registry.

7.4.2. Moreover, the LESSOR may choose to keep the work in its current status, at no charge to it, or have the LESSEE, on its own account and at its own expense, totally or partially demolish the work that has been built and clear the land, as provided for in this Agreement.

7.5. Information to the LESSOR

The LESSEE will inform the LESSOR in advance of any work it intends to carry out on the property, even if it is not Major Work and/or Required Work, and will provide it with copy of the project or of the licence, as applicable, on demand.


Eighth.- Conservation and Maintenance of the Property and installations

8.1. Throughout the term of this Agreement, the LESSEE will be responsible for carrying out all the Required Work necessary in accordance with the applicable regulations and legislation to conserve and maintain the property and its buildings in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, and its installations and services/utilities in suitable conditions for it to be used as intended, as well as any work and installations required at all times by the applicable legislation for the use of the building for the purposes envisaged in this Agreement, including the ITE (Technical Building Inspection). The LESSEE undertakes to contract the maintenance of the fire-fighting installations.

8.2. The LESSEE will be entirely responsible for any sanction, fine or claim of any type and in any jurisdictional order derived from the non-fulfilment, delay or omission of the obligations taken on in this Agreement, including those that may be carried out or brought against the LESSOR as the main, joint and several or subsidiary responsible party, and will keep the latter free of any damages caused through the aforementioned omission until the end of this Agreement.

In any case, if the LESSOR has chosen to keep the existing Building in the Property on expiration of this Agreement and has thus informed the LESSEE as provided for in this Agreement, the LESSEE must deliver the building with the Major Work and/or the Required Work totally completed. Should the LESSEE fail to observe this obligation, the LESSOR will be entitled to execute any of the guarantees provided for in this Agreement for the amount budgeted in the aforementioned Major Work and/or the Required Work.

8.3. To the extent that the LESSEE is responsible for the implementation of the Major Work and/or the Required Work on the Property, in no case will the non-execution of the Required Work, or the loss of licences or authorisations for the activity or the sealing or closure of the installations or the premises due to the lack of implementation of the Required Work constitute grounds for the discharge of this Agreement.

Ninth.- Licences and Authorisations

9.1. The LESSEE will be responsible, throughout the term of this Agreement, for all the formalities for obtaining all the authorisations, permits and licences needed before all the organisations involved, be they municipal, regional, state or those required by the European Union, as well as private organisations, to carry out all kinds of work, including the work prior to the beginning of the activity, those pertaining to connections between boundaries or passageways between buildings as stated in this Agreement, or which arise as a consequence of the use or occupation of the Property and the building in it, and the fees of the professionals that have to be contracted, and all types of costs and taxes derived from the work, as well as all authorisations, permits and licences needed to open the building and for the beginning and development of the activity which the LESSEE aims to carry out on the Property. The LESSEE will be exclusively responsible for obtaining all the permits, authorisations and licences, expressly releasing the LESSOR from any responsibility for obtaining them.

9.2. In no case will the failure to obtain the necessary permits, authorisations and licences of any kind from the relevant organisations to perform all kinds of work, including work prior to the beginning of the activity, those pertaining to the connection or passageway between the buildings stated in this agreement and any licences that may be required to carry out the core or subleased activity or activities the LESSEE intends to carry out in the building in accordance with the provisions of this agreement constitute grounds for the discharge of this agreement.

9.3. If the application for the licence has to be made by the Owner of the Property, the LESSOR authorises the LESSEE to act as the Owner’s agent and representative for the application and management of the corresponding licence with the competent authorities, provided that the Major Work project requiring the licence fulfils all the requirements stipulated in this Agreement and this has been substantiated to the LESSOR.

The LESSEE will be directly and exclusively responsible for any administrative penalty or claim brought against the LESSOR or the Ownership of the Property as a consequence of or with regard to any licence that the LESSEE requires in accordance with the provisions of this clause, regardless of the cause thereof, without prejudice to any other indemnity for damages established by this Agreement.


Tenth.- Supply, Services, Expenses, Rates and Taxes

10.1. Expenses for utilities and services

The LESSEE will have total freedom to contract utilities and services with the companies it deems fitting, on its own account and at its own expense.

The consumption of electricity, telephone, fibre optic, hot and cold water, etc. corresponding to the leased Property and the building in it and in general any utility or other private expenses derived from the use of the latter and their installations and services contracted by the LESSEE, or the maintenance thereof, will be paid by it to the utility companies, with which it should contract these utilities directly.

Any adaptations in the installations to the applicable regulations during the term of this Agreement will be paid for in their entirety by the LESSEE.

The LESSOR accepts no responsibility whatsoever for interruptions or cuts in services such as lighting, fibre optic, hot and cold water, telephone, gas, heating or any others, and the LESSEE agrees to make no claims for such eventualities. Neither will the LESSOR be obliged to apply rent reductions or any other penalties for the interruptions referred to.

10.2. Taxes

10.2.1. The LESSEE will also be responsible for paying all taxes, rates and expenses, be they municipal, regional, state or required by the European Union levied on the property and/or on the activity, as well as any other rate or tax which in the future and throughout the term of this Agreement may be levied on the property or on the activity carried on by the LESSEE, barring the Impuesto de Bienes Inmuebles [Property Tax] (IBI) and the Technical Building Inspection (ITE), to be paid by the LESSOR.

10.2.2. The LESSEE undertakes to maintain and renew the Permanent Garage Entrance (Keep Clear sign) in its current condition and with all the dimensions cited in the They State I section, as well as its sign and the payment of the corresponding rates or fees until the end of this agreement. The receipt of payment of the Permanent Garage Entrance (Keep Clear sign) corresponding to the latest annual payment is attached as Annex 3.

10.2.3. All expenses, taxes or rates referred to in this clause will be paid directly by the LESSEE, who will deal with the relevant formalities and will deliver to the LESSOR, within a term of ten days, the receipts substantiating payment of these taxes and rates.


Should the LESSEE fail to pay any of the expenses, taxes or rates agreed to herein, and the LESSOR paid them, the LESSEE will pay the LESSOR the amounts of these taxes or rates, as well as interests, surcharges, costs or penalties the LESSOR may have had to pay within a maximum term of ten days as of presentation thereof to the LESSEE. Failure to settle the payment will generate the interests established in this Agreement until it has been fully paid.

If on the other hand, the LESSOR who failed to pay the IBI or the ITE and the LESSEE were legally obliged to attend to make these payments in lieu of the LESSOR or on being required to do so by the competent authority, the LESSOR may subtract the amounts of these taxes which the LESSEE had to pay from the rent the latter is obliged to pay according to the provisions of this Agreement.

Failure by the LESSEE to pay these amounts will be regarded as a basic non-fulfilment and grounds for terminating this Agreement.

Eleventh.- Responsibilities and Insurance

11.1. Responsibilities

The LESSEE is directly and exclusively responsible for any damages caused to it or to third parties, people or things as a direct or indirect consequence of the business installed or of the complementary uses carried out on the Property, releasing the owner from all types of responsibility, including damages derived from installations for services or utilities, as well as damages that may be caused to the different departments of the building and caused through omission, negligence and improper use by the occupants of the building or any other reason, all the foregoing without prejudice to any other legal responsibilities established for this purpose.

11.2. Insurance

11.2.1. The LESSEE undertakes, at its own cost, from the beginning of possession of the Property by the LESSEE and throughout the term of this Agreement, to have contracted the insurance policy in the terms and conditions established by the applicable legislation at all times, and with sufficient coverage for the building and risks derived from flooding, fire or any other cause of force majeure, as well as to cover public liability for damages caused to third parties inside the property or outside it by projecting elements and off-levels, and will contract the following insurances:

Public liability, both for the activity carried on and the possession of the real property, for an insured sum of 5,000,000 Euros (FIVE MILLION EURO) per claim and annual period, with the LESSOR being the third party.

Guarantee of Replacement Insurance in the event of accident, for the appraised value of the Real Property built the LESSEE, of which the LESSOR will be the sole and exclusive beneficiary. The LESSEE must have this insurance contracted when it has the certificate of completion of the adaptation work agreed to herein, and must provide the LESSOR with copy of the policy and the corresponding receipt of payment within a maximum of one week as of the aforementioned completion of work.

11.3. The appraisal value of the Guarantee of Replacement Insurance stated in the preceding clause will be delivered by the LESSEE, together with copy of the Final Certificate of Work signed by the Architect and Quantity Surveyor as provided for in this Agreement.

11.4. The insurance policies indicated herein will be contracted by the LESSEE with a reputable insurance company and with the conditions, limits and usual exclusions in this type of insurance.

11.5. The LESSEE undertakes to deliver to the LESSOR, every year, a copy of the insurance policy that covers the risks stated and the receipts of payment of the annual premiums beginning with the effective date of this Agreement and throughout its term.


11.6. Without prejudice to the preceding insurance policies, and besides all the insurances that may be legally required, and in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, the LESSEE must have entered into or prove that it has entered into the following insurance policies:

Insurance on the building and 10-year liability (insurance) against major structural faults for a value equivalent to that of the real property that is to be built.

Public Liability Insurance that guarantees public liability resulting from the execution of the Work and/or demolition it carries out for an insured sum of 5,000,000 Euros (FIVE MILLION EUROS) per claim, with the LESSOR being the third party.

The LESSEE accepts full responsibility for the existence of the aforementioned insurance, even if it is not the LESSEE that subscribes it directly, and accepts responsibility for any damage, claim, sanction or demand that may be brought as a consequence of or due to the lack of insurance, keeping the LESSOR free from any damage caused to it by the aforementioned omission.

11.7. The capitals and claim limits of the above insurance will increase as follows:

According to the increase in the CPI for the twelve months immediately preceding the date of each annual maturity date in the case of the public liability insurance.

In accordance with the increase in by the CPI for buildings and other constructions in the twelve months immediately preceding each annual maturity date in the case of the Guarantee of Replacement Insurance.

Twelfth.- Visits and inspections of the Property

12. The LESSOR will be entitled to appoint people to carry out, in its name, any inspections and visits to the work site and the Property and its buildings that may be necessary throughout the term of this Agreement, provided that the LESSOR acts in accordance with the Safety Standards the LESSEE has in place at that time and with a minimum notice of one (1) working day. If the inspection is to be performed outside public opening hours, the LESSOR must give at least two (2) working days notice.

Thirteenth.- Hazardous goods and materials

13.1. If in the usual performance of its activities and in the rendering of its services the LESSEE had to store or handle any substance or material usually or legally acknowledged as hazardous, harmful or pollutant material, the LESSEE is authorised to do so provided that it complies with the following conditions:

It has all the legal licences and authorisation required by the corresponding authorities.

It has taken the legally required precautions and safety measures or those which, even if they are not legally required, are commonly recognised as suitable or necessary.

It informs the LESSOR.

It contracts, on its own account and at its own expense, fully comprehensive insurance that specifically cover the risks for public liability and damage to the leased building through the possession, storage or handling of these substances.

The LESSEE undertakes to inform both of the existence of usually or legally approved substances or materials, such as hazardous, harmful or pollutant material, as well as its compliance with the conditions stated in this clause, providing the LESSOR with the documentation that substantiates it.

13.2. THE LESSEE expressly releases the LESSOR from any responsibility derived from the possession, storage or handling of these substances, with the LESSEE also being responsible for all expenses and handling incurred through the measures it has to take with regard to the possession, storage or management of such substances, as well as any rates or taxes levied on the aforementioned possession, storage or handling, any fines or penalties imposed by the authorities due to non-fulfilment of the regulations or requirements derived from the aforementioned possession, storage or management or the withdrawal or management of the refuse such materials produce until the end of the term of this Agreement.


Fourteenth.- Posters and Signs

14.1. The LESSOR authorises the LESSEE to install, at any time, both inside and on the facade of the building, any advertising posters or signs with its trade name and other signs pertaining to its business that it wishes, provided that it is compatible with the safety of the building, with the applicable legislation and that it has all the necessary permits and authorisations to do so.

The LESSEE will be exclusively responsible for obtaining all the permits, authorisations and licences, expressly releasing the LESSOR from any responsibility for obtaining them.

In any case, authorisation for the installation of signs on the outside facade will be conditioned to the LESSEE presenting to the LESSOR, before the installation of the posters or signs, a technical implementation project, with the LESSOR reserving the right to make any necessary modifications according to objective reasons related to the building’s architectural composition.

14.2. The LESSEE will pay all the expenses, fees and taxes required for the preparation of the technical project and for obtaining the corresponding permits, authorisations and licences, as well as all the expenses involved in insurance coverage, installation, maintenance and removal of posters and signs.

Fifteenth.- Sublease and Assignment

15.1. The LESSEE may not assign this agreement without the LESSOR’s consent/authorisation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the LESSEE is solely and exclusively empowered to partially sublet the property for uses complementary to its core activity provided that any such use does not involve a greater percentage than that of the core activity and the clients to whom these services are rendered are also clients of the LESSEE’s core activity.

The LESSEE may also sublet for uses other than those indicated above and alien to the LESSEE’s the activity or corporate purpose, having secured the LESSOR’s written authorisation. Sublease in these cases will entail an increase in the rent provided for in article 32.2 of the LAU, in proportion to the space subleased by the LESSEE.

The term of the indicated subleases will be linked to that of this Agreement, hence once this Leasing Agreement has expired, the subleases will automatically expire with it.

The SUBTENANTS will take on the same obligations and duties as the LESSEE with regard to the provisions of this Agreement.

The LESSEE will be jointly and severally responsible for any damage caused by the SUBTENANTS, as well as any breaches by the SUBTENANTS of the obligations established for the LESSEE in this Agreement, with all the consequences that this may entail, including eviction and discharge of the Agreement.


15.2. For these purposes, the LESSEE will deliver to the LESSOR, on a quarterly basis, a list of the subleasing Contracts with third parties on the leased Property, only those which require the LESSOR’s authorisation, indicating the beneficiary of the subleasing, subleased surface, the amount of the sublease and the beginning and end dates of the subleasing. The LESSEE undertakes to show the LESSOR, on request, the Agreements included in the lists.

15.3. The LESSOR may assign its rights pursuant to this Agreement to another legal or natural person, and must inform the party to whom or to which it is going to sell the Property of the existence of this Agreement. The parties hereby expressly agree that should the LESSOR decide to avail itself of this right, the condition of LESSOR would be taken over by the aforementioned assignee, and all the parties hereto reciprocally and expressly undertake, in such an eventuality, to replace this Agreement with another one with the same contents, entered into by the aforementioned assignee, maintaining the commitment and the obligations taken on in this Agreement, with none of the parties being entitled to oppose the assignment.

Sixteenth.- Waiver of the rights of redemption and pre-emption and other rights of the LESSEE

16.1. In fulfilment of the provisions of section 4 of Law 29/1994, of November 24, on Urban Leasings, the parties expressly agree to exclude the application of the provisions of article 25 of the aforementioned current Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos [Law of Urban Leasings] to this Leasing Agreement, with the LESSEE waiving the rights of redemption and pre-emption established in the aforementioned article.

16.2. The parties also expressly agree to exclude the application of the provisions of article 34 of the aforementioned Law to this Leasing Agreement, with the LESSEE waiving the right to the indemnification payable by the LESSOR as established in the aforementioned article.

16.3 Similarly, the LESSEE expressly waives the suspension, discharge and resolution of the Agreement and the reduction in the rent provided for in articles 21, 22 and 26 of the applicable Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos [Law of Urban Leasings].

Seventeenth.- Eviction and Discharge

17.1. Each Party will be entitled to discharge this Agreement in accordance with the provisions of article 1124 of the Civil Code if the other Party fails to fulfil any of its contractual obligations, as well as those provided for in articles 35 and 27.2 of the Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos, and fails to remedy the aforementioned breach within a maximum term of SIXTY days (60) as of the relevant notification made by the creditor unless a different term is established in the corresponding clause. Notification expenses will be met by the breaching party.

The term of remedy established excludes non-fulfilment in the delivery of the banker’s guarantees or extensions thereof established in this Agreement by way of guarantee of the obligations taken on by the LESSEE, hence the non-delivery thereof within the term agreed to will entail non-fulfilment, constituting grounds for immediate discharge, as well as for the initiation of eviction proceedings for non-payment of rent, which will be regulated as specifically provided for to this end, with all the effects established in this Agreement.

17.2. Failure by the LESSEE to pay the corresponding leasing amount, including expenses and other amounts that fall to it in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, will be sufficient grounds for the LESSOR to bring eviction proceedings and to enforce the corresponding procedure for the discharge of this Leasing Contract. Nevertheless, the LESSEE may, one time only, in each one of the years of the term of the Agreement, remedy non-payment of the rent within a maximum term of sixty days (60) as of notice given by the LESSOR, delivered in a reliable way.


17.3. If the LESSOR is obliged to bring eviction proceedings should the other Party fail to honour any of its contractual obligations, the LESSEE will pay for all kinds of expenses, interests, including all court costs caused to the LESSOR and the fees of lawyers and solicitors according to the applicable rates of the official colleges that may be hired by the latter, provided that the action and services were mandatory. To this end, eviction will be regarded as equal to abandonment of the Agreement by the LESSEE, with all the effects provided for in this Agreement.

17.4. In the event of discharge of this Agreement, and by way of guarantee of the amounts owing by the LESSEE, the LESSOR may withhold the contents inside the leased Property (furniture and fittings, equipment and computing systems, goods, etc.) that do not constitute installations to which the LESSOR has the right to demand total or partial removal of the LESSEE.

Eighteenth.- Deposit, Banker’s guarantees and joint and several guarantee of INTERXION HOLDING NV

18.1. Deposit

The LESSEE delivers to the LESSOR, by way of deposit, in order to guarantee the obligations taken on pursuant to this Agreement, i.e., * * *, by means of a promissory note from the CaixaBank bank, with no. 6.075.721-6 8201-4. The LESSOR receives the aforementioned cheque subject to it being credited to the account, granting, in this act, the firmest and most efficient letter of payment for the aforementioned amount.

The existence of this deposit will never be used as a pretext to delay payment of the rent and nor may it be allocated to the payment of rent, not even the last monthly rental payment according to the Agreement.

The amount of the deposit will be updated every five years according to the amount which at the aforementioned time is to be paid to the LESSEE as rent for the following monthly payments.

The amount of the deposit will be returned to the LESSEE provided that it has fulfilled all the clauses of this Agreement. Otherwise it will be retained by the LESSOR, without prejudice to the LESSEE being entitled to any indemnity for damages that may be applicable according to the provisions of this Agreement and/or the Law.

18.2. Banker’s Guarantee

18.2.1. In order to answer for payment of the contractual obligations, rent and other expenses and taxes as of the beginning of this Leasing Agreement and throughout its term, the LESSEE undertakes to deliver to the LESSOR, on signature of this agreement, * * *, from a reputable Banking Organisation, executable on first presentation, and with a term until the termination of the Agreement, thus guaranteeing its contractual obligations until the termination of the Agreement. All the expenses incurred in the granting of the aforementioned Banker’s Guarantee will be met by the LESSEE.

18.2.2. Banker’s Guarantee during the demolition and execution of new building work

Complementary to and in addition to the * * * stated in this Agreement, and in order to further guarantee the obligations derived from the demolition and construction of a new building that the LESSEE may undertake in accordance with this Agreement, the LESSEE undertakes to deliver to the LESSOR, two weeks before the beginning of the demolition work on the building on the Property, * * *, from a reputable Banking Organisation, and for the term of two years or until the delivery to the LESSOR of the certificates of end-of-work and first occupation, guaranteeing its contractual obligations until the aforementioned date, with this guarantee being executable on presentation to the bank.

All the expenses involved in the granting of the aforementioned Banker’s Guarantee will be met by the LESSEE.


18.2.3. Extension of the Banker’s Guarantee in the event of changes in the LESSEE company

If during the term of this agreement there were a change in the shareholding of the LESSEE leading to the loss of control of the current lessee company’s shareholders, or the merger, transformation, demerger sale or transfer of the lessee company, INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U., or if in general there were legal or economic events which, without involving the disappearance of the lessee company, involved the modification of its partners or activity (unless these events occur between companies within the INTERXION HOLDING NV group) or affect the LESSEE’s economic solvency, the LESSEE undertakes to deliver * * * as well as, if the work had not been completed, * * * until the final certification of the work scheduled in this Agreement, from a top-level Banking Organisation, executable on first presentation, and with a term until the termination of the Agreement, guaranteeing its contractual obligations until the termination of the Agreement.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, and without prejudice to the maintenance and requirement of the other guarantees established in this Agreement, the delivery of the security regulated in this section will not be necessary when the new shareholders of the company have the same as or greater solvency than INTERXION HOLDING NV as current sole shareholder of INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U.

18.2.4. Expenses involved in the granting of Bankers’ Guarantees

All the expenses involved in the granting of the different Bankers’ Guarantees and their renewals agreed to in this clause will be met by the LESSEE.

18.2.5. Consequences inherent in the failure to secure or renew the guarantees

Failure by the LESSEE to obtain the guarantees stated in this Agreement or in any of their extensions for delivery to the LESSOR, or if they were delivered to the latter outside the established delivery term, will constitute an essential non-fulfilment of this Agreement by the LESSEE, and will empower the LESSOR to terminate this leasing Agreement, with all the consequences, conditions, compensation and amounts established in this Agreement for the case of non-fulfilment.

Delay in the delivery of the guarantees agreed to herein or any of their corresponding renewals will entitle the LESSOR to receive an indemnity of a daily amount equivalent to 0.5% of the amount for which guarantee should have been subscribed or renewed per day of delay in delivery to the LESSOR for the first 30 days, and which will be 1% from day 31 until the delivery date of the corresponding guarantee, besides all other expenses arising as a consequence of the delay in the delivery and without prejudice to the LESSOR being entitled to initiate eviction procedures as of day 61 counted as of the first day of non-fulfilment of the obligation to deliver the guarantees or renewals thereof, with all the effects provided for in this Agreement.

18.3. Responsibility of the Joint and Several Guarantor INTERXION HOLDING NV

INTERXION HOLDING NV, with registered offices in Tupolevlaan 24 - 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk - Holland, a company duly incorporated in accordance with Dutch Law, and registered in the Chamber of Commerce of Amsterdam, Holland, endorses and guarantees, jointly and severally, and to the maximum extent permitted by law, all the obligations taken on by INTERXION ESPAÑA NV in this Agreement, particularly those of an economic nature, and any of the other clauses contained in this agreement, until its termination.

The LESSEE will meet all the expenses involved in this Joint and Several Guarantor responsibility.


Nineteenth.- Conversion of the Agreement into a Public Document in the Land Registry

This Agreement may be converted into a public document by the Notary Public appointed by the LESSEE, with the LESSEE paying all fees, charges, costs and taxes involved in converting the Agreement into a public document and its registration in the Land Registry, delivering an authorised copy of this conversion to the LESSOR, at no cost for the latter.

The LESSEE releases the LESSOR from any responsibility regarding the payment of all fees, charges, rates, taxes, expenses and the Transfer Tax and Stamp Duty, with the LESSEE undertaking to pay them within the maximum term of five days following notice by the LESSOR if for any reason the LESSOR were required to pay these amounts by the competent administration.

Twentieth.- Summons and notifications

The parties state and mutually acknowledge, as their respective addresses for any summons or notification that may be necessary with regard to the provisions of this Agreement, the addresses given in this document or any other the parties may provide by a reliable form of notice.

The parties undertake to notify any changes in their registered offices within a maximum term of fifteen calendar days as of the date they occur.

Twenty-first.- Courts

All the parties, expressly waiving their right to any other jurisdiction, expressly submit to the Court and Tribunals of the city of Madrid for any controversies that may arise between them in the construction, execution and performance of this Agreement.

Twenty-second.- Legal Regulation

This Agreement will be governed by the will of the parties, and, for any eventualities not provided for herein, by the Ley de Arrendamientos Urbanos [Law of Urban Leasings], the Civil Code, and is subject, in all its aspects, to the regulations of the Spanish Legal System.

For the record, and for it to take effect, and in proof of their agreement with all the foregoing, the parties sign two original copies of this Agreement in the place and on the date indicated in the heading.

Signature

Mr Robert J.M. Assink

INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U.

For the LESSEE

Signature

Mr Robert J.M. Assink

INTERXION HOLDING, N.V.

For the JOINT AND SEVERAL GUARANTOR

Signature

Mr. Mohan B. Chainani

CHAINCO INVESTMENTS COMPANY, S.L.

For the LESSOR

Exhibit 4.21

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT MANAGING DIRECTOR INTERXION HOLDING N.V.


CONTENTS

 

Clause         Page  
1.   

Date of Commencement of Employment, Position and Tax Treatment

     1   
2.   

Duration of the Agreement and Notice of Termination

     2   
3.   

Salary

     2   
4.   

Annual Bonus

     3   
5.   

Severance

     3   
6.   

Expenses and Company Car

     3   
7.   

Holidays

     4   
8.   

Insurances

     4   
9.   

Sickness

     4   
10.   

Confidentiality

     5   
11.   

Documents

     5   
12.   

No additional occupation

     6   
13.   

Non-Competition

     6   
14.   

Gifts

     6   
15.   

Miscellaneous

     7   
16.   

Applicable Law, No CAO

     7   
Signatories      8   


THE UNDERSIGNED:

 

(1) InterXion Holding N.V. , established at 1119 NX Schiphol Rijk at the Tupolevlaan 24, hereinafter the Company ;

 

(2) David Ruberg residing at 1071 NZ De Lairessestraat 8, Amsterdam, hereinafter the Managing Director ;

WHEREAS:

 

  (a) The Managing Director and the Company have on 5 November 2007 entered into an employment agreement that, in accordance with its terms, will terminate by operation of law on 4 November 2010;

 

  (b) The Managing Director and the Company have expressed the desire to continue the employment arrangement of the Managing Director as Statutory Director ( statutair directeur ) of the Company for an additional three years;

 

  (c) The shareholders of the Company will meet on 16 September 2010 and decide about the continued appointment of the Managing Director as Statutory Director.

The Company will therefore continue to employ the Managing Director from 5 November 2010 onwards under the condition ( opschortende voorwaarde ) that the general meeting of shareholders of the Company will appoint the Managing Director as Statutory Dir e ctor ( statutair directeur ) and approve the remuneration package as proposed to the general meeting of shareholders (hereafter referred to as the Condition ).

 

  (d) If the Condition is not fulfilled, this agreement will be considered not to have been entered into and will have no effect whatsoever. Parties agree that if this agreement will not be effected because the Condition is not fulfilled they will have no claim against each other.

 

  (e) The parties desire to set forth the terms and conditions applying to the Managing Director’s employment in this agreement.

DECLARE AND HAVE AGREED AS FOLLOWS:

 

1. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF EMPLOYMENT, POSITION AND TAX TREATMENT

 

  1.1 The Managing Director shall enter into an employment agreement with the Company in the position of Statutory Director ( statutair directeur ) with the title of Chief Executive Officer, effective as of the moment the Condition has been fulfilled, but not before 5 November 2010 ( Commencement Date ).

 

  1.2 The Managing Director’s primary place of employment will be the office of the Company in Schiphol-Rijk. The Company will be entitled to change the place of employment after consultation with the Managing Director.

 

1


  1.3 The Managing Director shall fulfil all obligations vested in him by law, laid down in the articles of association of the Company and in instructions determined or to be determined in a management regulation, which may be updated from time to time.

 

  1.4 The Managing Director is obliged to do or to refrain from doing all that managing directors in similar positions should do or should refrain from doing. The Managing Director shall fully devote himself, his time and his energy to promoting the interest of the Company.

 

  1.5 If the Managing Director is a member of the Supervisory Board of another company within the same group on the basis of his position as Managing Director of the Company (so-called “q.q.-supervisory directorships”), or if the Managing Director is employed in any other position pursuant to his position as Managing Director of the Company (so-called “q.q.-positions”) he will pay the income derived therefrom to the Company, unless the Company decides otherwise. The Managing Director will not suffer any tax disadvantage.

 

  1.6 The salary amount as reflected in section 3.1 and the on-target bonus amount as reflected in section 4.1 have both been agreed to be based on the assumption that the tax authority will continue to grant a 30%-ruling to the Managing Director (see the addendum to this employment agreement).

In case the 30%-ruling is not granted, the salary amount and the on-target bonus amount will, subject to shareholder approval in a subsequent meeting, both be adjusted to the effect that the net amount for salary and on–target bonus will be equal to the net amount the Managing Director would have received if the 30%-ruling would have been granted. This means that the gross salary and on-target bonus will be adjusted to approximately EUR 660,000 each.

 

2. DURATION OF THE AGREEMENT AND NOTICE OF TERMINATION

 

  2.1 This agreement is entered into for a period of three years. This means that the employment agreement will end by operation of law and without notice being required three years after the Commencement Date ( Termination Date ).

 

  2.2 This agreement may be terminated before the Termination Date with due observance of a notice period of two months for the Company and one month for the Managing Director.

 

  2.3 At the termination of this agreement the Managing Director shall resign from the Supervisory Board position(s) and the so-called q.q.-position(s) held by him as referred to in Clause 1.5 of this agreement.

 

3. SALARY

 

  3.1 As of 5 November 2010 the Managing Director’s salary shall amount to EUR 500,000 gross per year, which shall be paid in twelve equal instalments at the end of each month. Holiday allowance is deemed to be included in this amount and the Managing Director shall therefore not be entitled to the payment of an additional holiday allowance.

 

2


4. ANNUAL BONUS

 

  4.1 The Managing Director will be entitled to an on-target bonus of EUR 500,000 gross subject to achieving certain targets as set annually by the Supervisory Board. The bonus targets will be set by the Supervisory Board not later than on 1 March of the year the targets apply to. Only as of this date will the bonus scheme become effective .

 

  4.2 Over the year his employment agreement commences or terminates, the Managing Director will be entitled to a pro rata part of his bonus, in so far as the pro rata targets for that year have been met.

 

5. SEVERANCE

 

  5.1 If this agreement ends by operation of law pursuant to section 2.1 or by a decision of the Company pursuant to section 2.2, the Managing Director is entitled to receive compensation equal to twelve months Base Salary (as defined under 5.4). In the case a court might award any form of compensation, this contractually agreed compensation will be decreased with the same amount as awarded by the court. This means that this contractual severance arrangement serves as a minimum and that the Managing Director will not be entitled to any contractual severance payment if a court awards a severance payment of twelve months or more.

 

  5.2 The Managing Director will not be entitled to any contractual severance payment as set out in this clause 5, if the employment agreement between the Company and the Managing Director is terminated because of cause ( dringende reden ) or the gross or wilful misconduct of the Managing Director.

 

  5.3 The Managing Director will not be entitled to any severance payment in the case of clause 5.2 when he terminates the employment agreement or takes the initiative thereto.

 

  5.4 Base Salary means the gross monthly salary as this may be from time to time, excluding any other form of compensation or allowances such as a (pro rata) bonus.

 

6. EXPENSES AND COMPANY CAR

 

  6.1 To the extent the Company has given prior approval for such expenses, the Company shall reimburse all reasonable expenses incurred by the Managing Director in the performance of his duties upon submission of all the relevant invoices and vouchers.

 

3


  6.2 The Company shall pay to the Managing Director an amount of EUR 40,000 gross per annum as car allowance as compensation for the use of his own car for company matters, or the Managing Director can lease a car on the basis of the InterXion company car policy to a maximum amount of EUR 40,000.

 

  6.3 The Company shall make available to the Managing Director a mobile phone and lap-top, as well as any other means of communication provided to members of the Company’s senior management.

 

7. HOLIDAYS

 

  7.1 The Managing Director shall be entitled to 25 working days vacation per year. In taking vacation, the Managing Director shall duly observe the interests of the Company.

 

8. INSURANCES

 

  8.1 The Managing Director will fall under the scope of the director’s liability insurance of the Company.

 

  8.2 The Company shall pay the statutory employer contribution to the Netherlands health insurance scheme for the Managing Director. In accordance with the terms of the Company’s collective health insurance scheme, the Managing Director and his spouse (once she has moved to the Netherlands and is registered as an inhabitant) are entitled to participate in this collective health insurance scheme. The Company is aware of the fact that the Managing Director will also maintain for his own account his current health insurance.

 

  8.3 The Managing Director shall not participate in any collective pension arrangement that the Company operates or may operate now or in the future, nor shall the Company contribute to any individual pension arrangement the Managing Director has entered into or might enter into in the future.

 

9. SICKNESS

 

  9.1 The Managing Director shall notify the Company the same day before noon. The Managing Director shall observe the Company’s policy pertaining to sickness, as determined by the Company from time to time.

 

  9.2 In the event of sickness, the Company shall from the first day of sickness pay to the Managing Director 100% of his salary as defined in Clause 3.1 up to a maximum of 52 weeks as from the first day of sickness. Following this period, the Company shall for a period of not more than 9 months pay 70% of the salary referred to in Clause 3.1. After that, the Company shall for a period of not more than 3 months pay 70% of the salary referred to in Clause 3.1, to the extent that this salary does not exceed the maximum daily pay (maximum dagloon) as defined in Article 17 paragraph 1 of the Dutch Social Insurance Funding Act. The above applies, however, only if and to the extent that pursuant to the requirements of Article 7:629 sub 3 through 7 and 9 of the Civil Code, the Company is under the obligation to pay salary in accordance with Article 7:629 , sub 1of the Civil Code.

 

4


  9.3 The Managing Director shall not be entitled to the salary payment referred to in paragraph 2 of this Clause, if and to the extent that in connection with his sickness, he can validly claim damages from a third party on account of loss of salary and if and to the extent that the payments by the Company set forth in paragraph 2 of this Clause exceed the minimum obligation referred to in Article 7:629 sub 1 of the Civil Code. In this event, the Company shall satisfy payment solely by means of an advanced payment on the compensation to be received from the third party and upon assignment by the Managing Director of his rights to damages vis-à-vis the third party concerned up to the total amount of advanced payments made. The advanced payments shall be set-off by the Company if the compensation is paid or, as the case may be, in proportion thereto.

 

10. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

  10.1 The Managing Director shall throughout the duration of this agreement and after this agreement has been terminated for whatever reason, refrain from disclosing in any manner to any individual (including other personnel of the Company or of other companies affiliated with the Company unless such personnel must be informed in connection with their work activities for the Company) any information of a confidential nature concerning the Company or other companies affiliated with the Company, which has become known to the Managing Director as a result of his employment with the Company and of which the Managing Director knows or should have known to be of a confidential nature for as long as this information has not become publicly known through no wrongful act or negligence of the Managing Director;

 

  10.2 If the Managing Director breaches the obligations pursuant to paragraph 1 of this Clause, the Managing Director shall, contrary to Article 7:650, sub 3, 4 and 5 of the Civil Code, without any notice of default being required, pay to the Company for each breach thereof, a penalty amounting to EUR 2,500. Alternatively, the Company will be entitled to claim full damages.

 

11. DOCUMENTS

The Managing Director shall not have nor keep in his possession any documents and/or correspondence and/or data carriers and/or copies thereof in any manner whatsoever, which belong to the Company or to other companies affiliated with the Company and which have been made available to the Managing Director as a result of his employment, except insofar as and for as long as necessary for the performance of his work for the Company. In any event the Managing Director will be obliged to return to the Company immediately, without necessitating the need for any request to be made in this regard, any and all such documents and/or correspondence and/or data carriers and/or copies thereof at termination of this agreement or on suspension of the Managing Director from active duty for whatever reason.

 

5


12. NO ADDITIONAL OCCUPATION

 

  12.1 The Managing Director shall perform his obligations on a full-time basis and shall not, without a prior approval from the Supervisory Board, engage in any other paid or unpaid activity, which approval shall not be withheld unreasonably.

 

  12.2 Activities referred to in sub-section 1 that the Managing Director is currently engaged in or at some time in the future is asked to be engaged in will be discussed between him and the Supervisory Board. The Supervisory Board will subsequently decide whether the Managing Director is authorised to commence or continue some or all of these activities or should terminate them. If the latter applies to activities that the Managing Director is currently engaged in, the Managing Director and Supervisory Board will jointly agree on a schedule, allowing the Managing Director to terminate such activities as soon as reasonably possible. In that case the Managing Director will take the initiative and will provide a draft schedule to the Supervisory Board within four weeks after the Commencement Date of this agreement.

 

13. NON-COMPETITION

 

  13.1 The Managing Director shall throughout the duration of this agreement and for a period of one year after termination hereof, not be engaged or involved in any manner, directly or indirectly, whether for the account of the Managing Director or for the account of or employed by others, in any enterprise which conducts activities in a field similar to or otherwise competes with that of the Company or any of its subsidiaries or affiliated companies nor act as intermediary in whatever manner directly or indirectly. This obligation applies solely to any work activities or involvement of the Managing Director within the territory of any member state of the European Union.

 

  13.2 The Managing Director remains under the obligation to adhere to the non-competition clause referred to in paragraph 1 of this Clause with respect to the Company, if the Company of the Managing Director or a part thereof is transferred by the Company to a third party within the meaning of Article 7:662 and onwards of the Civil Code and this agreement terminates before or at the time of such transfer, while in the event of continuation of the employment agreement the Managing Director would have entered the employment of the acquirer by operation of law.

 

  13.3 In the event the Managing Director breaches the obligations as expressed in paragraph 1 of this Clause, the Managing Director shall, without notice of default being required, pay to the Company for each such breach a penalty equal to an amount of EUR 100,000, plus a penalty of EUR 2,500 for each day such breach occurs and continues. Alternatively, the Company will be entitled to claim full damages.

 

14. GIFTS

The Managing Director shall not in connection with the performance of his duties, directly or indirectly, accept or demand commission, contributions or reimbursement in any form whatsoever from third parties. This does not apply to customary promotional gifts of little value.

 

6


15. MISCELLANEOUS

 

  15.1 This agreement supersedes all previous agreements between the Managing Director and the Company and between the Managing Director and any affiliated companies and takes their place. After this agreement has been signed, the Managing Director and the Company can no longer derive any rights from agreements which have been superseded herewith.

 

  15.2 This agreement constitutes the entire employment agreement between the Managing Director and the Company. The Managing Director is not employed by any affiliated companies of the Company.

 

  15.3 Amendments to this agreement may only be agreed upon in writing and with regard to the Company, solely when a decision to that effect has been taken by the competent body of the Company.

 

  15.4 Insofar as the Managing Director involves an external counsel to provide advise to him about the draft employment agreement, the Company shall pay the related fees up to a maximum amount of EUR 2,500 (excluding VAT) against receipt of an invoice from the external counsel.

 

16. APPLICABLE LAW, NO CAO

 

  16.1 This agreement is governed by the laws of the Netherlands.

 

  16.2 No Collective Labour Agreement (in Dutch: “CAO”) is applicable to this agreement.

 

7


SIGNATORIES

 

SIGNED by: Mr. D. Ruberg    )   
For and on behalf of:    )   
InterXion Holding N.V.:    )   
Date:    )   
SIGNED by:    )   
Mr. D. Ruberg:    )   
Date:    )   

This agreement and its terms are in accordance with the resolution adopted by the Supervisory Board of Interxion Holding N.V. in its meeting of 18 August 2010.

Mr. J. Baker

Chairman of the Supervisory Board

 

8

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS

I, David Ruberg, certify that:

 

 

1.

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.;

 

 

2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

 

3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

 

4.

The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

 

(a)

Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

 

(b)

Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

 

(c)

Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

 

(d)

Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

 

5.

The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

 

(a)

All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

 

(b)

Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ David C. Ruberg

 

David C. Ruberg

Chief Executive Officer

Date: April 27, 2012

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Josh Joshi, certify that:

 

 

1.

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.;

 

 

2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

 

3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

 

4.

The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

 

(a)

Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

 

(b)

Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

 

(c)

Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

 

(d)

Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

 

5.

The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

 

(a)

All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

 

(b)

Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Josh Joshi

 

M.V. “Josh” Joshi

Chief Financial Officer

Date: April 27, 2012

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned officer of the Company hereby certifies to the undersigned’s knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

 

1.

The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

 

2.

The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

/s/ David C. Ruberg

 

David C. Ruberg

Chief Executive Officer

Date: April 27, 2012

Exhibit 13.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned officer of the Company hereby certifies to the undersigned’s knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

 

1.

The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

 

2.

The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

 

/s/ Josh Joshi

 

M.V. “Josh” Joshi

Chief Financial Officer

Date: April 27, 2012